Civil Service Reviewer - Updated

All rights reserved.
No part of this workbook material may be reproduced in any

form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, and photo
copying without the prior permission of the owner.
Nothing is impossible. The word itself says
Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

-2-
TOPIC PAGE
LANGUAGE PROFICIENCY
I. Word Analogy …………………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 4

II. Paragraph Organization ………………………………………………………………… 5 - 10
III. Identifying Error ……………………………………………………………………………… 11 - 14
IV. Reading Comprehension …………………………………………………………………… 15 - 21
V. Grammar and correct usage ………………………………………………………… 22 – 25
VI. Alphabetizing (Names and Companies) ……………………………… 26 - 28
VII. Common Confusing Words
Advice vs. Advise ……………………………………………………………………………… 29 - 31
Assume vs. Presume …………………………………………………………………………… 31 - 32
May Be vs. Maybe ………………………………………………………………………………… 33 - 34
Who vs. Whom …………………………………………………………………………………………… 35 - 36
Who’s vs. Whose …………………………………………………………………………………… 37 - 38
Except vs. Exempt ……………………………………………………………………………… 39 - 40
Farther vs. Further ………………………………………………………………………… 41 - 42
Has been, Have been, Had been ……………………………………………… 43 - 44
Adapt, Adopt, Adept ………………………………………………………………………… 45 - 46
Would, Should, Could ……………………………………………………………………… 47 - 48
Me, Myself, I ………………………………………………………………………………………… 49 - 50
In, On, At ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 51 - 52
Into, Onto, Unto ………………………………………………………………………………… 53 - 54
Fill Up, Fill In, Fill Out ……………………………………………………… 55 - 56
Loss, lost, lose, loose ……………………………………………………………… 57 – 59
VIII. Vocabulary Words ………………………………………………………………………………… 60 – 64
IX. Kasingkahulugan …………………………………………………………………………………… 65 - 67
X. Kasalungat ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 68 - 70
XI. Wastong gamit ng mga salita
Ng at Nang ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 71 - 72
Doon at Roon …………………………………………………………………………………………… 73 - 74
Din at Rin ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 75 - 76
Daw at Raw ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 77 - 78
Dito at Rito …………………………………………………………………………………………… 79 - 80
Kung at Kong …………………………………………………………………………………………… 81 - 82
Walisan at Walisin …………………………………………………………………………… 83 - 84

-3-
NUMERICAL REASONING
I. Divisibility Rules ……………………………………………………………………………… 85 - 91
II. Order of Operations - P.E.M.D.A.S ……………………………………… 92 - 94
III. Fraction, Percent, & Decimal Conversion ……………………… 95 - 98
IV. Rules of Exponent ………………………………………………………………………………… 99 - 100
V. Fraction Operation
Adding Fraction, Subtracting Fraction, Multiplying
Fraction, and Dividing Fraction …………………………………………… 101 - 106
VI. Radical Expressions …………………………………………………………………………… 107 - 110
VII. Rounding Off Numbers ………………………………………………………………………… 111 - 115
VIII. Scientific Notation …………………………………………………………………………… 116 - 121
IX. Area and Perimeter of a Square, Rectangle,
Triangle and Circle …………………………………………………………………………… 122 – 130
X. Basic Statistics …………………………………………………………………………………… 131 - 135
XI. Word Problems
Consecutive Numbers …………………………………………………………………………… 136 - 140
Age Problem ………………………………………………………………………………………………… 141 - 145
Work Problem ……………………………………………………………………………………………… 146 - 152
Mixture Problem ……………………………………………………………………………………… 153 - 157
Money Problem …………………………………………………………………………………………… 158 - 161
Investment and Interest Rate …………………………………………………… 162 - 166
Speed-Distance-Time …………………………………………………………………………… 167 - 171
LOGICAL AND ANALYTICAL REASONING
I. Alphanumeric Series …………………………………………………………………………… 172 - 176

II. Direction and Distance …………………………………………………………………… 177 - 182
III. Alphabet Test …………………………………………………………………………………………… 183 - 185
IV. Blood Relations ……………………………………………………………………………………… 186 - 189
V. Order and Ranking Arrangement ………………………………………………… 190 - 193
VI. Seating Arrangement …………………………………………………………………………… 194 - 199
VII. Assumption and Conclusion …………………………………………………………… 200 - 205
GENERAL INFORMATION
I. Philippine Constitution ………………………………………………………………… 206

II. Code of Conduct and Ethical Standards for Public
Officials and Employees (R.A. 6713 …………………………………… 207 - 217
III. Peace and Human Rights Issues and Concepts ……………… 218 - 234
IV. Environment Management and Protection …………………………… 235

-1-
I. WORD ANALOGY
• A word analogy is a vocabulary problem that compares two

things, something that shows how two things are alike, but with
the ultimate goal of making a point about this comparison. It
consists of one pair of keywords.
Examples and Explanation
1. dog:puppy :: cat: _______

a. kitty c. feline
b. moggy d. kitten
Explanation: You must first determine the relationship between dog and
puppy. Once you realize that a puppy is a baby dog, you can find the
corresponding relationship for a cat. A baby cat is a kitten.
2. bricks:road :: glass: _______

a. container c. bottle
b. pitcher d. plastic
Explanation: You might say that ‘bricks used to be used to create

roads, at which point all kinds of possibilities emerge: Bricks used
to be used to create roads as glass used to be used to create bottle.
3. night: ______ :: right:left
a. day c. daylight
b. time d. prime
Explanation: If you could notice, the given words seems to be the word
opposite in meaning to another, the opposite of right is left and the
opposite of night is definitely day.
4. ______ :guide :: drawing:illustration
a. conduct c. take
b. lead d. show
Explanation: In this example, the words are exactly or nearly the same
as another word, drawing and illustration is synonymous, lead and guide
is also a synonymous word.

-2-
EXERCISES:
1. catholic:priest :: moslem: ______ Word Analogy Tips and

Technique
a. rajah c. koran
COMMON WORD COMBINATIONS
b. hajji d. imam
1. Word & synonym
2. Word & antonym
2. italy:latin :: greece:______ 3. Part & whole
4. Tool & its action
a. grecian c. greek 5. Object & user
6. Category & example
b. French d. Greece
7. Cause & effect
8. Word & degree
3. masticate:chew :: eradicate:______ 9. Action & thing
acted
a. collect c. complete
b. count d. throw
4. hand:arm ::______:______
a. foot:leg c. waist:belt
b. hips:sway d. shoulder:neck
5. goat:kid ::______:______
a. bear:cub c. dog:dalmatian
b. chicken:hen d. tiger:tigress
6. BIR:taxes :: DPWH:______
a. public roads c. traffic

b. houses d. churches
7. theme:main idea :: moral:______
a. a value c. a piece of advice

b. a desire d. a standard
8. figurine:smallfigure :: heroine:______
a. small hero c. small drug

b. female hero d. female drug

-3-
9. food:cook ::______:______
a. farmer:crop c. tailor:clothing
b. furniture:wood d. jewelry:goldsmith
10. chapter:book :: handle:______
a. brake c. pedals
b. bicycle d. goal
11. FLQV:JISU :: DJNR:______
a. FGQN c. HMPS
b. HGPQ d. HGLQ
12. mnemonic:memory :: ______:______
a. audience:speech c. drama:acting
b. sedative:sleep d. audition:music
13. 10:1010 :: 11:______
a. 1342 c. 1352
b. 1351 d. 1331
14. skew:gloomy :: slant: ______
a. glee c. desperate
b. foible d. gloaming
15. miserly:cheap :: homogeneous: ______
a. extravagant c. alike
b. unkind d. friendly
16. ______:______ :: auditorium:audience
a. hall:picture c. coliseum:spectators
b. movie house:cinema d. commuters:transportation

-4-
17. monk:devotion ::______:______
a. maniac:pacifism c. visionary:complacency
b. explorer:contentment d. rover:wanderlust
18. ______:______ :: slapstick:laughter
a. fallacy:dismay c. satire:anger
b. genre:mystery d. horror:fear
19. ______:______ :: verve:enthusiasm
a. loyalty:duplicity c. intensity:color
b. devotion:reverence d. eminence:anonymity
20. spy:clandestine ::______:______
a. accountant:meticulous c. lawyer:ironic
b. furrier:rambunctious d. sheperd:garrulous
21.cobbler:shoe ::______:______
a. lockey:horse c. mason:stone
b. contractor:building d. cowboy:boot
22. hut:cottage:______ :: candle:lamp:floodlight
a. tent c. dwelling
b. city d. house
23. daisy:flower:plant :: bungalow:house:______
a. building c. apartment
b. cottage d. city
24. palette:easel:brush :: textbook:lesson plan:______
a. artist c. report card

b. teacher d. paint
25. rule:command:dictate :: doze:sleep:______
a. snore c. awakens
b. govern d. hibernate

-5-
II. PARAGRPAH ORGANIZATION
• Refers to the way sentences are ordered and structured to

create a unified and cohesive body of text. The principal
features to consider in paragraph organization are the topic
sentence and controlling idea, supporting details,
organizational patterns, and signal words.
Paragraph Organization Tips and Techniques

1. Determine the topic sentence – introduction, main topic, or
main idea
2. Next, find the supporting sentences that support the topic
sentence
3. Then look for the concluding sentences – the closing
sentence.
EXAMPLE:
A. When the spore case is ripe, it opens, and the ripe spores are
released.
B. A plant carries it spores in cases that are called sporangia.
C. In mosses, the spores are carried in a capsule at the top of the
stalk.
D. In a mushroom, the sporangium is inside the gills beneath the
mushroom cap.
E. Since they are finer than dust, the wind scatters them far and
wide.
a. EDCAB c. DBACE
b. ACDBE D. BDCAE
Explanation:
B -
The topic sentence is the spores/sporangia in a plant,
D -
Supporting sentence, the sporangium in a mushroom,
C –
Supporting sentence, spore in a moss,
A –
Supporting sentence, the spore case condition of plant, mushroom
and mosses,
E – The concluding sentence/closing sentence is they are finer that
dust, and since they are finer the story concluded that the wind
will scatters them far and wind.

-6-
EXERCISES:
Item 1
A. Imagine for a moment that an unknown animal had been discovered

deep in the jungles of South America.
B. What does it look like? What are its winning characteristics?
C. Make a paper now and draw it, making some notes about your sketch.
D. It is destined to replace the dog and the cat in popularity as a
domestic pet during this century.
a. ABCD c. ADCB
b. ADBC d. ABDC
Item 2
A. It is very vital to have social media presence however personal

blogs serve as web domains.
B. Most people including celebrities and businessman have blogs
nowadays.
C. Therefore, building them will help anyone in promoting himself
or his business.
D. Apparently, blogs are like our offices only they are in the
internet.
a. BDAC c. BACD
b. BADC d. BDCA
Item 3
A. The basic steps in building a website are easy to remember and

registering a domain name is the usual priority.
B. Designing a layout will come after that.
C. Finally, adding more content and social media presence are
required to keep your site active.
D. Then you need a hosting provider to host your site’s content in
the World Wide Web.
a. ABCD c. ACBD
b. ADBC d. ADCB
Item 4
A. As a child grows, the vocal cords become longer.
B. So, they produce short air waves.
C. A child has short vocal cords.
D. As they become longer, the voice becomes deeper.
a. ABCD c. CABD
b. DCBA d. BACD

-7-
Item 5
A. Others don’t realize yet what to pursue because they have many
dreams.
B. Finding the right course in college is one of the most challenging
decisions make.
C. Some people want to pursue their dreams ever since they were just
little.
D. Indeed, destiny is a matter of choice.
a. BDAC c. BADC
b. BCDA d. BCAD
Item 6
A. While passport, airline tickets and valid IDs are required, proof
of financial capacity may be required for visa application.
B. Many Filipinos rejoiced hearing that good news.
C. The Bureau of Immigration announced recently that proof of
financial capacity is not a primary requirement at the airport.
D. Positive points go to the bureau for this.
a. CBAD c. CABD
b. CADB d. CBDA
Item 7
A. This will be one of your tickets to land a job in the government.

B. That is why many people apply to take the Career Service
examination.
C. If you passed the exam, you will get a certificate of eligibility.
D. Career Service Eligibility is a major requirement to apply for a
job position in the government.
a. DCBA c. DBCA
b. DBAC d. DCAB
Item 8
A. Your passport will arrive in 7 days if you choose the rush

processing.
B. Getting a passport is faster nowadays.
C. Now, it only takes about 10 working days.
D. Compared before, it would take about a month for the regular
processing.
a. BCAD c. BADC
b. BDCA d. BACD

-8-
Item 9
A. Facebook has been the number one social media in the web and the
world for quite long time.
B. Mobile instant messaging apps are also dominating social presence
in the internet.
C. After many acquisitions, Facebook bought Instagram, one of the
fastest growing photo sharing networks.
D. Because of that, Facebook acquired WhatsApp, a leading instant
chat platform like Kakaotalk.
a. ACBD c. ADCB
b. ABCD d. ADBC
Item 10
A. They will help you to purchase through zero-interest installment
schemes.
B. Thus, you must be wise and pay in full if you want to avoid never-
ending debts.
C. Credit cards are helpful if you know how and when to use them
wisely.
D. However, they will produce interests from interests if you didn’t
pay the whole amount at the due date.
a. CDBA c. CDAB
b. CABD d. CADB
Item 11
A. In the Philippines, the population boom has derailed efforts to
make the benefits of economic growth trickle down to the
grassroots. Thousands of new people are born on our planet every
day.
B. With the population galloping toward the 110-million mark, the
Philippines will be among one of several developing nations
leading global population growth in the coming years, according
to the United Nations.
C. With limited resources and economic growth failing to keep pace
with the population boom, this means more people getting an ever-
shrinking share of the pie.
D. This has been a problem in previous administrations and remains
a problem of the Duterte government, despite sustained economic
growth since 2010.
E. This is true both in the Philippines and around the planet,
whose resources cannot meet the demands especially of the
poorest segments of the 7.2 billion population.
a. ABCDE b. ECBAD c. BCEAD D. DBCAE

-9-
Item 12
A. There is a hunger center that acts as a sort of brake on the

activities of the stomach and intestines.
B. When there is enough food in the blood, the hunger center slows
up the action of the stomach and intestines.
C. The feeling of hunger originates in the brain.
D. The intestines become active, and we experience a feeling of
hunger.
E. But if the blood doesn’t have enough nourishment, the hunger
center responds by releasing the brakes.
a. EBCAD c. CABED
b. BECAD d. CDABE
Item 13
A. A tobacco leaf is cured by heat, air or sun.

B. The purpose of this is to dry the leaf and bring out the proper
color.
C. In flue–curing, green leaves are hung in small insulated barns
that are heated by flues.
D. After harvesting, the tobacco must be cured.
E. Stalk–cut tobacco is air cured.
a. ECDBA c. DBACE
b. BACDE d. EDCBA
Item 14
A. Speaking in English every day is also proven effective.

B. Another way is watching English movies and TV shows particularly
with English subtitles.
C. Reading articles in books, newspapers, and magazine is just among
the helpful ways.
D. There are many ways to improve and develop English proficiency.
a. DCBA c. DABC
b. DACB d. DCAB
Item 15
A. They also inflated balls of larger sizes with which they played
a kind of football and other kicking games.
B. Some early people wove reeds into rounded shapes.
C. Later, generations of Greeks and Romans added a new idea – air.
D. A blown-up leather ball called a follis was used in games of
catch.

- 10 -
a. DBAC c. ACBD
b. BCDA d. BDCA
Item 16
A. One effective way is to diversify his funds to different

investments like real estate, stocks and money instruments like
bonds and trust funds.
B. It is always best to expand money to different investment wheels.
C. A wise investor must not put all his eggs in one basket.
D. He should always consider the risks involved in investing his
money.
a. CBAD c. CDAB
b. CBDA d. CDBA
Item 17
A. The Egyptians believed that the obelisk was the home of the spirit
of the sun.
B. Obelisks were unusually made in pairs and placed on each side of
the gates to temples and tombs.
C. The tops were often covered with bright metals, such as gold, to
reflect the sun rays.
D. Inscriptions in hieroglyphics on the four sides praised the
pharaohs who had ordered the obelisks.
E. All Egyptian obelisks came from a granite quarry near Aswan.
a. EDCBA c. EADCB
b. ABCDE d. DACEB
Item 18
A. You may not think about it, you can instinctively understand
that when someone helps you, you are expected sooner or later
to somehow pay them back, in some reasonable way.
B. You already know a lot more about influence than you realize.
C. Some of the time, you can just ask for what you need, and if
the other person or group can respond, they will.
D. Sometimes you have to work a little harder to figure out how
to get what you want.
a. BCDA c. CDBA
b. ABCD d. BACD

- 11 -
III. IDENTIFYING ERROR

• It is a type of competitive test where it needs to identify
the grammatical errors in a sentence.
TIPS AND TECHNIQUES
• Read the sentence and try to find possible errors

• Take a look at the options given if word choices correspond
to the sentence correctly.
• Substantiate your choice with a reason.
• Finally, read the whole sentence and figure out if the
sentence makes sense.
Examples and Explanation:
1. The students have discovered that they can address issues more
A B
effectively through letter writing campaigns and not through
C D
public demonstrations. No error.
E a b c d e
Explanation: The error in this sentence occurs at (D). When a

comparison is introduced by the adverb “more” as in “more effectively”
the second part of the comparison must be introduced by the conjunction
“than” rather than “and not”.
2. After hours of futile debate, the committee has decided to

A
postpone further discussion of the resolution until their next
B C D
meeting. No error.
E f
a b c d e
Explanation: The error in this sentence occurs at (D). A pronoun must

agree in number (singular or plural) with the noun to which it refers.
Here, the plural pronoun “their” incorrectly refers to the singular
noun “committee.”

- 12 -
EXERCISES:
1. At the music recital, Alexandra enjoyed listening to her friend

A
Mohammed's insightful interpretation, which she thought was
B
more sophisticated than the other performers. No error.
C D E
a. enjoyed listening d. than the other performers

b. which she e. No error
c. more sophisticated
2. Originally a protest on conventional painting, the Pre-Raphaelite

A B
movement exerted the great influence on the art of its time.
C D
No error.
E
a. Protest on c. exerted e. No error

b. Conventional d. of its
3. The board reviewing the courses offered by the college found that
A B
the quality of academic programs were generally good but somewhat
C D
uneven. No error.
E
a. reviewing c. were e. No error

b. found d. somewhat
4. If he had begun earlier, he might have succeeded in finishing the

A B C
extremely complex projects before the deadline. No error.
D E
a. he had begun c. in finishing e. No error

b. earlier d. extremely
5. Maude Adams, after her spectacular triumph as the original Peter

A
Pan, went about heavy veiled and was accessible to only a handful
B C D
of intimate friends. No error.
a. triumph c. heavy veiled e. No error

b. Went about d. only a handful

- 13 -
6. All states impose severe penalties on drivers who do not stop

A B
when he or she is involved in accidents. No error.
C D E
a. impose c. he or she e. No error

b. penalties d. only a handful
7. Because of the Internet, working at jobs at home have become

A B C D
much more common. No error.
E
a. Because of c. at home e. No error
b. working at d. have become
8. Pull it out by its plug, not by the cord,” said dad. No error.
A B C D E
a. by c. cord e. No error
b. its d. dad
9. Symptoms of this illness that warrant a doctor visit includes

A B
fever, vomiting, and diarrhea, as well as the loss of appetite.
C D
No error.
E
a. that warrant c. vomiting, and e. No error

b. includes d. loss
10. Either Lisa or Karen will always volunteer their valuable

A B C
time to serve on our board. No error.
D E
a. Either c. their e. No error

b. Will always be volunteer d. time
11. The conversation with her mother had a more profound affect
A B
on her than she expected. No error.
C D E
a. mother c. than e. No error

b. affect d. she expected

- 14 -
12. The President and the Speaker of the House found the
A B
Congressional Republicans’ filibusters to be all together
C D
specious. No error.
E
a. President d. all together

b. Speaker of the House e. No error
c. Congressional Republican
13. Professor Lane, our Computer Science teacher, was excited

A B
when he had the opportunity to meet Bill Gates, the president
C D
of Microsoft, Inc. No error.
a. President Lane c. Bill Gates e. No error

b. Computer Science d. president
14. Do you think they will except our plan without an

A B C D
argument? No error.
E
a. they c. except e. No error

b. will d. without
15. They had went to the lake without me by the time

A B C
I got there,” said Jacques. No error.
D E
a. had went c. by the time e. No error

b. without me d. I got there

- 15 -
IV. READING COMPREHENSION
• Is the ability to process text, understand its meaning, and

to integrate with what the reader already knows.
TIPS AND TECHNIQUES

• Read and understand the passage.
• Identify the key words.
• Answer the questions based on the passage you have read.
• Underline important details as possible.
Examples and Explanation:
1. In the words of Thomas De Quincey, “It is notorious that the

memory strengthens as you lay burdens upon it.” If, like most
people, you have trouble recalling the names of those you have
just met, try this: The next time you are introduced, plan to
remember the names. Say to yourself, “I’ll listen carefully; I’ll
repeat each person’s name to be sure I have it, and I will
remember.” You’ll discover how effective this technique is and
probably recall those names for the rest of your life.
The passage suggests that people remember names best when they
a. are intelligent c. are interested in people

meet new people d. decide to do so
Explanation: With this question, the key sentence from the passage is
“The next time you are introduced, plan to remember the names.” This
indicates that memory is a decision.
2. Social studies classes focus on the complexity of our social

environment.
The subject combines the study of history and the social sciences
and promotes skills in citizenship.
What does the second sentence do?
a. It proposes a solution.
b. It expands on the first sentence.
c. It makes a contrast.
d. It states an effect.

- 16 -
Explanation: In this case, the second sentence continues to elaborate
on the same idea as the first sentence. One key phrase here is “The
subject.” This phrase stands in for “Social studies classes.” In a
way, then, both sentences begin with the same exact idea: social
studies. That helps to identify the purpose of the second sentence.
EXERCISES:
Passage A
With varying success, many women around the world today struggle for
equal rights. Historically, women have achieved greater equality with
men during periods of social adversity. The following factors initiated
the greatest number of improvements for women: violent revolution,
world war, and the rigors of pioneering in an undeveloped land. In all
three cases, the essential element that improved the status of women
was a shortage of men, which required women to perform many of society’s
vital tasks.
1. We can conclude from the information in this passage that
a. women today are highly successful in winning equal rights

b. historically, the principle of equality alone has not
been enough to secure women equal rights.
c. historically, women have only achieved equality through
force
d. only pioneer women have been considered equal to men
Passage B
Some stores are testing a new checkout system that allows shoppers to
use their mobile phones to scan items as they walk through stores and
pay at self-service kiosks, skipping the cashiers’ lines.
The new mobile checkout system reduces long lines and customer wait
times in stores.
2. What does the second sentence do?
a. It expands on the first.

b. It gives an example.
c. It states an effect.
d. It contrasts with the first.
Passage C
There are two kinds of jewelry that I do. There is commercial jewelry
- class rings, necklaces, the kinds of things most people wear. I sell
these items to meet my expenses for raw materials, supplies, and to

- 17 -
make my living. The other, more creative work I do makes me feel that
I am developing as a craftsperson.
3. The author of this passage implies that
a. commercial and creative work fulfills different needs

for the artist.
b. rings and necklaces cannot be creative.
c. artists are poor.
d. there is no market for creative work.
Passage D
When another old cave is discovered in the south of France, it is not

usually news. Rather, it is an ordinary event. Such discoveries are so
frequent these days that hardly anybody pays heed to them. However,
when the Lascaux cave complex was discovered in 1940, the world was
amazed. Painted directly on its walls were hundreds of scenes showing
how people lived thousands of years ago. The scenes show people hunting
animals, such as bison or wild cats. Other images depict birds and,
most noticeably, horses, which appear in more than 300 wall images, by
far outnumbering all other animals.
Early artists drawing these animals accomplished a monumental and

difficult task. They did not limit themselves to the easily accessible
walls but carried their painting materials to spaces that required
climbing steep walls or crawling into narrow passages in the Lascaux
complex. Unfortunately, the paintings have been exposed to the
destructive action of water and temperature changes, which easily wear
the images away. Because the Lascaux caves have many entrances, air
movement has also damaged the images inside. Although they are not out
in the open air, where natural light would have destroyed them long
ago, many of the images have deteriorated and are barely recognizable.
To prevent further damage, the site was closed to tourists in 1963.
4. Which title best summarizes the main idea of the passage?
a. Wild Animals in Art

b. Hidden Prehistoric Paintings
c. Exploring Caves Respectfully
d. Determining the Age of French Caves
5. Based on the passage, what is probably true about the south

of France?
a. It is home to rare animals.

b. It has a large number of caves.
c. It is known for horse-racing events.
d. It has attracted many famous artists.

- 18 -
Passage E
Student Volunteers Needed!
On Saturday, December 12th, from 10 A.M. until 4 P.M., Carverton Middle

School will be holding a music festival in the school gymnasium. The
special event will feature a variety of professional musicians and
singers.
Task Time Date

Make posters 1 P.M. – 4 P.M. December 5th
Set up gym 11 A.M.– 4 P.M. December 11th
Help performers 9 A.M. – 4 P.M. December 12th
Welcome guests 10 A.M.– 2 P.M. December 12th
Clean up gym 4 P.M. – 7 P.M. December 12th
Interested students should speak with Ms. Braxton, the music teacher.
Students who would like to help at the festival must have written
permission from a parent or guardian.
6. What time will the festival begin?
a. 10 A.M. c. 1 P.M.
b. 11 A.M d. 2 P.M.
7. The word feature is closest in meaning to _______.
a. look c. include
b. keep d. entertain
8. What job will be done the day before the festival begins?
a. Making posters c. Cleaning up the gym

b. Setting up the gym d. Helping the performers
9. Who is told to talk to Ms. Braxton?
a. parents c. teachers
b. students d. performers
10. If setting up the gym starts at 11 A.M on December 11th,

and the clean-up of the gym ended at 7 P.M of December 12th,
what time will end the welcoming of guest on December 12th.
a. 4 P.M c. 2 P.M
b. 7 P.M d. 10 A.M

- 19 -
Passage F
Myths are stories, the products of fertile imagination, sometimes

simple, often containing profound truths. They are not meant to be
taken too literally. Details may sometimes appear childish, but most
myths express a culture's most serious beliefs about human beings,
eternity, and God.
11. The main idea of this passage is that myths
a. are created primarily to entertain young children

b. are purposely written for the reader who lacks imagination
c. provide the reader with a means of escape from reality
d. illustrate the values that are considered important to a society
Passage G
The Midwest is experiencing its worst drought in fifteen years.

Corn and soybean prices are expected to be very high this year.
12. What does the second sentence do?
a. It restates the idea found in the first.

b. It states an effect.
c. It gives an example.
d. It analyzes the statement made in the first.
Passage H
The victory of the small Greek democracy of Athens over the mighty
Persian Empire in 490 B.C. is one of the most famous events in history.
Darius, king of the Persian Empire, was furious because Athens had
interceded for the other Greek city-states in revolt against Persian
domination. In anger the king sent an enormous army to defeat Athens.
He thought it would take drastic steps to pacify the rebellious part
of the empire.
Persia was ruled by one man. In Athens, however, all citizens helped
to rule. Ennobled by this participation, Athenians were prepared to
die for their city-state. Perhaps this was the secret of the remarkable
victory at Marathon, which freed them from Persian rule. On their way
to Marathon, the Persians tried to fool some Greek city-states by
claiming to have come in peace. The frightened citizens of Delos
refused to believe this. Not wanting to abet the conquest of Greece,
they fled from their city and did not return until the Persians had
left. They were wise, for the Persians next conquered the city of
Eritrea and captured its people.

- 20 -
Tiny Athens stood alone against Persia. The Athenian people went to
their sanctuaries. There they prayed for deliverance. They asked their
gods to expedite their victory. The Athenians refurbished their weapons
and moved to the plain of Marathon, where their little band would meet
the Persians. At the last moment, soldiers from Plataea reinforced the
Athenian troops.
The Athenian army attacked, and Greek citizens fought bravely. The
power of the mighty Persians was offset by the love that the Athenians
had for their city. Athenians defeated the Persians in both archery
and hand combat. Greek soldiers seized Persian ships and burned them,
and the Persians fled in terror. Herodotus, a famous historian, reports
that 6,400 Persians died, compared to only 192 Athenians.
13. Athens had _________ the other Greek city-states

against the Persians.
a. refused help to
b. intervened on behalf of e. defeated
c. wanted to fight
d. given orders for all to fight
14. Darius took drastic steps to ________ the rebellious

Athenians.
a. weaken d. irritate
b. destroy e. none of the above
c. calm
15. Their participation _________ to the Athenians.
a. gave comfort d. gave fear

b. gave honor e. gave hope
c. gave strength
16. The people of Delos did not want to ______ the

conquest of Greece.
a. end d. daydream about

b. encourage e. none of the above
c. think about
17. The Athenians were _________ by some soldiers who

arrived from Plataea.
a. welcomed d. captured
b. strengthened d. None of these
c. held
d. captured

- 21 -
Passage I
The Los Angeles County Board of Supervisors has appointed a newly-

established Workforce Investment Board (WIB), which will implement the
Workforce Investment Act of 1998.
WIB’s mandate is to provide key policy decisions affecting the local

workforce development system, and to identify and certify the areas
within Los Angeles County where Work Source California Centers are
located to be designated as Workforce Investment Areas.
18. According to the passage,
a. WIB is chiefly responsible for providing decisions related to

policy.
b. County Board of Supervisors passed the Workforce Investment Act.
c. Work Source California Centers are unique to areas within Los
Angeles County.
d. the Workforce Investment Act will put into practice the Workforce
Investment Board
Passage J
The Agricultural Commissioner/Weights & Measures Department routinely

conducts price verification inspections at retail locations to confirm
that prices charged to consumers are the same as those posted or
advertised.
On a typical visit to a store, the inspector will select up to 15 items

and then take them to the check stand for payment. When the items’ bar
codes are scanned at the register, the price showing at the register
must match what is posted on the shelf or advertised.
If the prices do not match, the store will receive a notice of violation
and the case may be turned over to the District Attorney’s Office or
local city attorney for prosecution.
19. According to the passage,
a. an inspector will usually find a pricing error when 15 items are

being purchased.
b. an item costing less than the announced price will not be
considered a violation.
c. a store receives a violation when the shelf or advertised price
does not matched the charged price.
d. price violation cases are automatically turned over to the
appropriate jurisdiction’s attorney office.

- 22 -
V. GRAMMAR AND CORRECT USAGE

• It is whole system and structure of a language or of languages
in general.
• A particular analysis of the system and structure of language
or of a specific language.
Examples:
1. Which sentence uses “famish” correctly?
a. After the straight exam, I felt too exhausted and famished to eat
my favourite foods.
b. I could eat a horse, I am famish now.
c. I famished my stomach next time you treat me to a meal out.
d. I will bring lots of pizza, that’s a famish.
2. Priscila _______ rather not invest her savings in the stock market.
a. must c. could
b. has to d. would
3. Did you have any problem ______ our house?
a. Search c. searching
b. to search d. for searching
4. I hope you don’t mind _____ joining you.
a. to be c. that I may
b. I had been d. my
5. Most basketball players are 6 ____ tall or more.
a. foot c. foots
b. feet d. feets
6. These children _____ how to improvise more props for the play.
a. Knew c. know
b. Knows d. known
7. The company will upgrade ______ computer systems next week.
a. There c. its
b. Their d. it’s

- 23 -
EXERCISES:
1. Clara ___________ three thousand words for her essay.

a. have wrote c. have written
b. has wrote d. has written
2. You have too many_________but few times to prove you’re right.

a. hypothesis c. hyphothesis
b. hypotheses d. hypothesess
3. Neither Sarah nor Tina _______ the crime yesterday.

a. witness c. witnessed
b. witnesses d. witnessing
4. You do like going to the party alone. _____ you?

a. Does c. Do
b. Doesn’t d. Don’t
5. We had our house _______ in yellow.

a. painting c. paint
b. painted d. paint
6. He has been exercising but his immune system was steadily______.

a. weak c. weakened
b. weaken d. weakening
7. I was ______ that the weather would be sunny and we would be

able to enjoy our swimming.
a. hopeless c. hopelike
b. hopeful d. hopely
8. I think it’s not a great idea. I totally ______.

a. misagree c. inagree
b. unagreed d. disagree
9. So many ___________ I found in the library, now I’m ready to

report.
a. information c. infoes
b. informations d. infos
10. My grandpa always feed his flock of _______ early in the

morning.
a. sheeps c. ships
b. sheep d. ship
11. Happy memories are always remembered, not ________.

a. forget c. forgot
b. forgets d. forgotten

- 24 -
12. Flight Z735 ______ yesterday. 350 passengers were died.

a. crush c. crash
b. crushed d. crashed
13. There is a ________ message when you look closely at her

painting.
a. hid c. hided
b. hide d. hidden
14. I've never __________ to the Philippines.

a. been c. going
b. going d. gone
15. Maria gave ________________ for his birthday.

a. to her little brother a football brother
b. her little brother a football
c. a football for her little
d. a football to her little brother
16. Although the substance is normally quite______________,

scientists found that when tempered with other elements it could
be stored safely in metal containers.
a. caustic c. insoluble
b. voluminous d. vapid
17. Have you seen Gone with the Wind? _________ it's a very good
film.
a. apparently c. nevertheless
b. despite d. admittedly
18. Guys, have a piece of cake. I baked them ________.

a. myself c. my self
b. my way d. mine
19. There are more _____ than last year.

a. unemployed c. unemployments
b. unemployment d. unemployeds
20. The team informed me that ________ parents will be here any
moment now.
a. me c. mine
b. myself d. my
21. Please present a medical certificate _______ you will be excused

from the class.
a. or c. so
b. but d. and

- 25 -
22. Although we had tickets, we _________ for an hour.

a. have kept waiting c. had made waiting
b. were kept waiting d. made waiting
23. _____ me to your mother when you are in London.

a. Remind c. Greet
b. Tell d. Remember
24. Your shirt is dirty, I don't think it will _____ for the
wedding.
a. wear c. do
b. present d. make
25. The confusion ______ the discovery of the body made everybody
lose track of time.
a. caused by c. was caused by

b. had caused d. had been caused
26. Maria gave ________________ for his birthday.

a. a football to her little brother
b. to her little brother a football
c. a football for her little brother
d. her little brother a football
27. You wouldn't want to be late for the interview, __________?

a. will you c. would you
b. don’t you d. won’t you
28. Knowing he was late, he _________ .

a. fastly ate his sandwich. c. ate his sandwich quickly.
b. eating his sandwich quickly. d. ate quickly his sandwich.
29. I can't decide _____ to move in with my boyfriend.

a. About c. whether
b. That d. if
30. I think you should let your daughter ______ over at Judy's.
a. sleeps c. sleep
b. sleeping d. slept
31. Liam would have been a well-known actor __________ he moved to

Hollywood last year.
a. if c. unless
b. for d. or

- 26 -
VI. ALPHABETIZING (Names and Offices)

• Arrange (words or phrases) in alphabetical order.
• Alphabetizing is an important skill to master. It helps develop
organizational skills, executive functioning abilities and it
even improves memory. Furthermore, if we sequence materials
that we are encoding into our brains, it makes it easier to
access at a later date.
TIPS AND TECHNIQUES
• Do the word preparation (drop all spaces and symbols)

• Spell out abbreviated words (Ex. Dr. – Doctor, Jr. - Junior)
• Follow the structure and alphabetize
• Last name, First name, Middle name, Suffix, and Title
Example #1: Alphabetizing Names
a. Josephine Abad a. DACB

b. Jason Abadd b. ABCD
c. Joseph Abbad c. CBDA
d. Jane Abad d. BACD
Example #2: Alphabetizing Names
a. Felimon, Jason a. BCAD

b. Felipe, Julian b. CADB
c. Felimon, Jamie c. BADC
d. Felipe, Julia d. DABD
Example #3: Alphabetizing offices
a. Sports Zone Restaurant a. ABDC

b. Sports Resources Inc. b. CABD
c. Sports Values Inc. c. BCDA
d. Sports House and General d. DBCA
Merchandise
Example #4: Alphabetizing Address
a. St. Peter, Mahogany St., a. BDAC

b. Bagong Silang, Caloocan d. CADB
c. South Triangle, Quezon City c. BADC
d. Jehovah St., Carlatan City d. ADCB

- 27 -
EXERCISES:
Item 1 Item 7
a. Belen Nicanor a. CDBAE a. Analiza B. Viray a. BADCE

b. Jose Mario b. ABDEC b. Annaliza C. Vicencio b. CDBAE
c. Marcos Belen c. BACDE c. Mary Ann D. Santiago c. ABECD
d. Magno Bernard d. EDBCA d. Carmela M. Santos d. DBACE
e. Leo Rosario e. CADBE e. Janice O. Yap e. EDCAB
Item 2 Item 8
a. Rodrigo Lee a. EDACB a. Lily O. Allen a. ACBDE

b. Rosario Amor b. BADCE b. Mandy N. Perez b. BECDA
c. Sebastian Nicol c. BEDAC c. Gigi F. Hadid c. DABCE
d. Romeo Jose d. ABCDE d. Madison T. Reyes d. ABCDE
e. Pedro Bello e. CEBDA e. Arnold M. Reynoso e. BEADC
Item 3 Item 9
a. Neri Benedicto a. ACBED a. Collin S. Santa Maria a. DABCE

b. Rosa Patricio b. BEDCA b. Melani D. Delos Santos b. CEABD
c. Luzia Dee c. CADBE c. Wilson I. Ong-Yap c. BDCAE
d. Manuel Santos d. DBCAE d. Edison H. Florida d. BDCEA
e. Jerico Rodolfo e. BECDA e. Lexi T. Tramo e. BEACD
Item 4 Item 10
a. Niña Tanya a. ABDCE a. Sarah G. Hernandez a. CEABD

b. Miguel Carlos b. BDACE b. Elmo E. San Rafael b. DABCE
c. Juan Guzman c. BCEDA c. Anna I. Santo Tomas c. BACDE
d. Carlos Rico d. DABCE d. Lea S. San Bartolome d. AEDBC
e. Jose Mari e. DECBA e. Jasmine P. Hesarza e. DEACB
Item 5 Item 11
a. Celeste Laviste a. BDACE a. Mary Ann F. Dela Torre a. CBEDA

b. Chloe Clemente b. ACEBD b. Zenaida M. Zulaybar b. BEADC
c. Siara Faina c. BCEAD c. Andres P. Zuniga c. DAECB
d. Rosell Rafael d. CEBDA d. Mildred G. Dela Cruz d. BADCE
e. Enrique Jorge e. ACDEB e. Norman T. Delos Santos e. DAEBC
Item 6 Item 12
a. Rancho, Elian a. BECDA a. Junjun F. Aban-aban a. ADBEC

b. Rallon, Michel b. BCDAE b. Lando M. Abanag b. ABECD
c. Ramirez, Sean c. DACBE c. Harry T. Distro c. ABDEC
d. Rancho, Elaine d. BAEDC d. Helen S. Santiago d. ABCDE
e. Rondi, Faye e. DABCE e. Julie E. Enriquez e. ABCED

- 28 -
Item 13
a. Commission on The Filipino Language a. ABCD

b. Commission on Human Rights b. CBDA
c. Commission on Higher Education c. BCDA
d. Commission on Population d. ACBD
Item 14
a. Insurance Commission a. BDCA

b. Industrial Technology Development Ins. b. BACD
c. Institute of Labor and Manpower c. BCDA
d. Institutional Material Corporation d. BADC
Item 15
a. Ayala Plans Inc. a. BCDA

b. Ayala Health Care Inc. b. ABCD
c. Ayala Land Inc. c. DCBA
d. Ayala Life Insurance Inc. d. BACD
Item 16
a. St. Stephen’s School a. ABCD

b. St. Stephen’s University b. CDBA
c. St. Scholastica’s Academy c. CDAB
d. St. Scholastica’s College d. DCAB
Item 17
a. AA Industrial Chemical supply a. DCAB

b. AB Capital and Investment Corp. b. DCBA
c. A Soriano Aviation Incorporated c. ABCD
d. A-1 Driving Company Inc. d. CABD
Item 18
a. Presidential Commission on Good Gov. a. CBAD

b. Presidential Comm. to fight Poverty b. BADC
c. Presidential Comm. for Urban Poor c. CABD
d. Presidential Commission on Human Rights d. CADB
Item 19
a. Filspin Incorporated a. ACDBE

b. Filway Marketing Inc. b. CABDE
c. Filsov Shipping Company c. BCADE
d. Fina Products Inc. d. BACDE
e. Fina Production Services e. CADBE

- 29 -
VII. COMMON CONFUSING WORDS
• Pitfall words are often used in a sentence to confuse the

examiners, below are the common words that are used in a
sentence, be familiar on these words and their differences,
these might trick you.
ADVICE VS. ADVISE
ADVICE (payo)
• An opinion or suggestion about what someone should do, it is
also often offered as a guide to action and/or conduct.
• Guidance or recommendations offered with regard to prudent
future action.
ADVISE (payuhan)
• To give an opinion or suggestion to someone about what should
be done
• To give advice to (someone), or to recommend or suggest
(something)
Examples of ADVICE in a sentence:
1. Keep your advice for later.

2. The popular saying “follow your heart” is terrible advice.
3. Howie, I can't tell you what to do; only give you advice and try
to look at the options logically.
4. Good advice, she muttered and turned the page.
5. The only advice she was given was to talk to him.
6. The night my mother died; Eden gave me advice I've never
forgotten.
Examples of ADVISE in a sentence:
1. Her mother was away and couldn’t advise her.

2. We’ve brought in experts to advise on the scheme.
3. I advise you to withdraw your allegation before I contact my
lawyer.
4. He assembled a panel of scholars to advise him.
5. I’d advise buying your tickets well in advance if you want to
travel in August.
6. We’re looking to you to advise us on how to proceed.

- 30 -
Exercises:
1. We need the (advice, advise) of a qualified actuary using the

projected unit method.
2. Whether it was Pumpkin's (advice, advise) or the sunny day,

Cynthia's mood lightened as they drove.
3. I would strongly (advice, advise) against going out on your own.
4. It is easy for you to (advice, advise), but difficult to take

advice from others.
5. I think the best (advice, advise) I can give, is try to understand

that everything she does and says initially comes from fear and
shock.
6. lost sight of my mission, she said, grateful for the one piece of
(advice, advise) she could stomach.
7. I (advice, advise) you to buy one? it may come in handy one day.
8. It is easy for you to (advice, advise), but difficult to take

advice from others.
9. Shaftesbury had meanwhile ineffectually warned the king that

unless he followed his (advice, advise) there would be no peace
with the people.
10. She needed someone to (advice, advise) her.
11. In my perplexity I did not know whose aid and (advice, advise) to
seek.
12. In cases of poisoning by mushrooms immediate medical (advice,

advise) should be secured.
13. It was standard practice for untrained clerks to (advice, advise)

in serious cases such as murder.
14. You can get trusted, practical (advice, advise) on your desktop.
15. The government has set up a committee of industrialists and

academics to (advice, advise) it.

- 31 -
16. Any knowledgeable wine merchant would be able to (advice, advise)

you.
17. He taught the little girl how to write and gave her (advice,
advise) in reading.
18. I'm going to give you a piece of (advice, advise) you gave me a
few months ago.
19. They (advice, advise) that a passport be carried with you at all
times.
ASSUME VS. PRESUME
ASSUME (ipagpalagay)
• To think that something is true or probably true without
knowing that it is true.
• To take to or upon oneself
PRESUME (magpalagay)
• To believe something to be true because it is likely, although
not certain:
• To undertake without leave or clear justification
Examples of ASSUME in a sentence:
1. Alex had always taken care of his family, but was it irresponsible
to assume he always would?
2. He was ready to assume his position as head of the house.
3. History seems to assume that this force is self-evident and known
to everyone.
4. I shall assume that she has the normal child's capacity of
assimilation and imitation.
5. Instead, they had talked about the house and how she would assume
responsibilities.
Examples of PRESUME in a sentence:
1. I presume that's just what Mrs. Worthington's sister thought when

she opened her trunk.
2. Thus then, according to the philologists, arose the myth that
fire was stolen, a myth which, we presume, would not otherwise
have occurred to Greeks.

- 32 -
3. I would not presume to refute what you say.
4. None could presume to challenge the authority of the Committee of
Public Safety, and in the committee, none disputed the leadership
of Robespierre.
5. You've done this before, I presume?
EXERCISES:
1. Further, (assume, presume) the best job pays the most and is the
most fun, and the worst job pays the least and is the least fun.
2. Most statistics books and most data analysts wrongly (assume,

presume) it's always a problem.
3. I (assume, presume) it has gone out of print which is a real

shame.
4. Did he trust her or (assume, presume) she knew better than to

run?
5. Know then thyself, (assume, presume) not God to scan; The proper
study of mankind is Man.
6. Was she encouraging Alex to (assume, presume) a paternal role, or

was she merely old-fashioned enough to think that?
7. I (assume, presume) that you measure around the point where the
waistband of the trousers will naturally sit.
8. Maybe that was why he was in such a hurry to (assume, presume)

husbandly duties as well.
9. (Assume, Presume) this is the last day of your life, since it

might really be for both of us. What one thing would you have
done if you knew it was your last day?
10. This leads us to (assume, presume) he is the main playable

character in the story.
11. The Wahhabi movement in Nejd now began to (assume, presume)

serious proportions.
12. Since form cannot produce matter nor subject object, we are forced
to (assume, presume) a thing-in-itself.

- 33 -
MAY BE VS MAYBE
MAY BE (maaaring)
• Isn’t a single word, nor is it used like one—it’s two separate
words used together. Like maybe, it expresses uncertainty, but
unlike maybe, it functions as a verb.
MAYBE (siguro)
• Maybe means “possibly” or “perhaps.” It often functions as an
adverb, which in grammatical terms is a word that modifies
(describes) a verb (among other functions).
Examples of MAY BE in a sentence:
1. Let us be ready, for we may be sent for any minute.

2. They may be too busy running.
3. I absolutely must see him; however painful it may be for me.
4. Oh, I'm a Wizard; you may be sure of that.
5. And one person's solution may be another person's problem.
Examples of MAYBE in a sentence:
1. But maybe as a civilization, we have to talk out loud to figure

out where we stand, to make progress.
2. Maybe you don't think this deserves its own point.
3. I thought maybe by now you would have adjusted.
4. Maybe they are simply great enough to receive without misgiving.
5. Maybe she couldn't make the ugly beast go away completely, but
she had learned to control it.
EXERCISES:
1. It (may be, maybe) that he lays up no treasures in this world

which will cool his summer drink in the next.
2. Do not expect this to be a uniformly reassuring journey; it (may

be, maybe) more of a roller-coaster ride with some rather bleak
descents.
3. If Alex felt the need to protect her from Gerald, (may be, maybe)
she shouldn't be dancing with him.
4. On the other hand, (may be, maybe) he was simply surprised that
Alondra would want such a tame life.

- 34 -
5. (May be, Maybe) it caught up with him.
6. This difficulty and some others (may be, maybe) corrected when
she and Miss Sullivan have more time.
7. I thought (may be, maybe) we could get a van, but I didn't know
if we could afford it.
8. In fact, (may be, maybe) that was why Dulce didn't come to
breakfast.
9. Some conclusions (may be, maybe) briefly suggested.
10. It (may be, maybe) that the hand of the Lord is in this.
11. But a lot more complicated for the other two, (may be, maybe).
12. That is why her teacher's records (may be, maybe) found to differ
in some particulars from Miss Keller's account.
13. (May be, Maybe) the last situation was what gave her the courage
to speak up when the inheritance tension came back.
14. You (may be, maybe) proud of it!
15. (May be, Maybe) it was hunger or the pleasant company.
16. She'd have to wait, and (may be, maybe) by that time sanity would
have returned.
17. I (may be, maybe) the person who's having the visions but I can't
do it alone.
18. And (may be, maybe) he wasn't trying to keep her from seeing the
barn.
19. It should, however, be borne in mind that the apparent differences

between different species (may be, maybe) partly Table Xiv.
20. Come to think of it, (may be, maybe) that thought troubled him
as well.
21. (May be, Maybe) a little noise would frighten the animal away.

- 35 -
WHO VS. WHOM
WHO (sino)
• Used to introduce a clause giving further information about a
person or people previously mentioned.
• The person that or any person that (used relatively to
represent a specified or implied antecedent)
WHOM (kanino)
• Should be used to refer to the object of a verb or preposition.
Examples of WHO in a sentence:
1. The boy who sat beside him was his son.

2. I guess because the only one who should be looking at it is my
husband.
3. His attention shifted to Destiny, who was still sleeping.
4. Who are you looking for this time?
5. Carmen shot a glance at Alex, who was giving his meal undue
attention.
Examples of WHOM in a sentence:
1. Here in dwells an old man with whom I would like to converse.

2. He saw the kind faces of those whom he loved.
3. She was surprised to see three people within, none of whom looked
like they fit in the refined, elegant spaces of the parlor.
4. The famous men of whom I have told you in this story are commonly
called the Seven Wise Men of Greece.
5. He said, "They are mine; they are personal and I will choose with
whom to share them."
EXERCISES:
1. Dean felt equally acrimonious toward the overbearing state
official (who, whom) he hadn't seen since the winter and who, in
Dean's mind, had no business being back in Ouray.
2. Something drew her attention to Jonathan, (who, whom) was

watching Alex intently.
3. Just then Dorothy, (who, whom) had risen early and heard the
voices of the animals, ran out to greet her old friends.

- 36 -
4. The people (who, whom) they met gazed at them and wondered who
they could be.
5. This charcoal man, (who, whom) I know very well, ran past me with
a child in his arms.
6. The family on my father's side is descended from Caspar Keller,

a native of Switzerland, (who, whom) settled in Maryland.
7. (Who, Whom) decides what the Internet will become?
8. However, practically speaking, it sometimes has a corrupting

influence on those (who, whom) it empowers to act for the state.
9. Me (who, whom) everyone is so fond of?
10. It was a house full of people (who, whom) happened to be related

to him.
11. (Who, Whom) is that intemperate and brutal man whom we would
redeem?
12. It was a house full of people (who, whom) happened to be related

to him.
13. And the point is that we knew (who, whom) he had it from.
14. Pierre, not knowing (who, whom) to answer, looked at them all
and smiled.
15. Then he turned back to his father, (who, whom) was watching him
with interest.
16. Then, on Friday those (who, whom) have done the best may stand
up and read their compositions to the school.
17. You may go and kill (who, whom) you please, but I don't want to
do so anymore!
18. This is what they have done with me! thought he, full of an
irrepressible fury that welled up within him against the someone
to (who, whom) what was happening might be attributed.

- 37 -
WHO’S VS. WHOSE
WHO’S (sino ang)

• Is the usual spoken form of 'who is' or 'who has', especially
when 'has' is an auxiliary verb.
WHOSE (kaninong)
• Used especially in questions when asking about which person
owns or is responsible for something.
Example of WHO’S in a sentence:
1. Do you honestly think you can keep a secret that's a major part
of your life from someone who's sharing a bed with you?
2. That lady who's in the news, the one from Idaho who claims she's
the tipster, she wrote an entry.
3. I may be the person who's having the visions but I can't do it
alone.
4. That way he can do what he wants and who's to know?
5. He's like a modern-day king who's in charge of the superheroes
trying to beat down the evil villains.
Example of WHOSE in a sentence:
1. The web is a force for truth, connectedness, understanding, and

communication—all things whose absence can trigger war.
2. She looked up at Jule, whose features were grim.
3. When asked the color of someone whose occupation she did not know
she seemed bewildered, and finally said "blue."
4. I would drink deeper; fish in the sky, whose bottom is pebbly
with stars.
5. I regard my pupil as a free and active being, whose own
spontaneous impulses must be my surest guide.
EXERCISES:
1. To each of them he made some careless and agreeable remark except

to Pierre and Helene, (who’s, whose) presence he seemed not to
notice.
2. It certainly is fair to look at that class by (who’s, whose) labor

the works which distinguish this generation are accomplished.
3. What about that intern (who’s, whose) been calling you so much?

- 38 -
4. Martha, (who’s, whose) stay with them was at first a simple good
deed, then a delight and now so very much more.
5. He and his wife, (who’s, whose) as nutty as Planters, aren't on

anyone's top one hundred list of the rich and famous.
6. He's one of these type A personality guys (who’s, whose) always

wound up tighter than a spring—wears whatever face suits the
crowd.
7. Among them stood a man (who’s, whose) white shirt was stained
with blood.
8. You may be a cop, but you're also an obnoxious slob (who’s, whose)
soiling a clean carpet with your discarded body parts.
9. Claire was all that remained of his brother, and he'd loved her
out of respect for a man (who’s, whose) death he'd never been
able to accept.
10. Then he added, you might have better luck learning (who’s, whose)
been trying to buy the worthless mine and who at Bird Song swiped
the itsy-bitsy bone you found.
11. I don't know them personally, but they should be on top of the
case with this bastard (who’s, whose) chasing you.
12. In 2005, rice became the first crop plant (who’s, whose) complete
genome had been compiled.
13. Look and see (who’s, whose) selling the other ones the other
Lucky Strike tins!
14. She twisted in her chair to see a man near the dark windows
(who’s, whose) eyes were the color of her bright purple Easter
dress.
15. A long time ago there lived a poor slave (who’s, whose) name was
Aesop. He was a small man with a large head and long arms.
16. Those plants of (who’s, whose) greenness withered we make herb

tea for the sick serve but a humble use, and are most employed by
quacks.

- 39 -
EXCEPT VS. EXEMPT
EXCEPT
• Is the term which is not followed by any preordained rules and
customs
• Is the word used to leave out a person from any group or
category?
EXEMPT
• Means to be excluded from a group or a category or simply not
including whereas exempt means to free (an organization or a
person) from pre imposed a set of rules and obligations.
Examples of EXCEPT in a sentence:
1. She is very quick-tempered and willful, and nobody, except her

brother James, has attempted to control her.
2. All the costumes reeked of mothballs, except the sweaty gorilla,
which needed them the most.
3. He didn't understand it, except that Bianca's touch finished what
Sofi started.
4. I don't remember much of my time before coming to this world,
except I was expelled.
5. But not a sound had broken the stillness since the strangers had
arrived, except that of their own voices.
Examples of EXEMPT in a sentence:
1. Different breeds are also exempt to certain coverage.

2. Some plans sponsored by churches are also exempt.
3. Though not exempt from considerable danger, he passed in safety
through the troubles of St Bartholomew's eve.
4. However, there are certain types of data that are exempt from
disclosure.
5. Temporary plans are exempt from HIPAA legislation.
EXERCISES:
1. Originally Caleb alone was (except, exempt) and for his faith
received a blessing; later tradition adds Joshua and in Deut.
2. But, (except, exempt) for these fleeting memories, if, indeed,

they be memories, it all seems very unreal, like a nightmare.

- 40 -
3. Petya stood on tiptoe and pushed and pinched, but could see
nothing (except, exempt) the people about him.
4. Personal property to the value of $300 also is (except, exempt)
from liability for debt.
5. In the same way consuls are often (except, exempt) from all kinds
of rates and taxes, and always from personal taxes.
6. Betsy suggested we each assign our new identities without telling

each other (except, exempt) our spouses.
7. But the county includes all other places, such as liberties and
franchises, which before 1888 were (except, exempt) from
contribution to county rate.
8. They form a union and get laws passed that no burgers can be
flipped (except, exempt) by a union member.
9. He was alone now, (except, exempt) for a soldier who was sitting
naked at the other side of the fire, warming his thin yellow body.
10. All these are (except, exempt) from taxes in consideration of

their military service.
11. As an allied city it was (except, exempt) from direct taxation,

though compelled on occasions to make "voluntary" presents to
Roman generals.
12. I didn't give them the time of day, (except, exempt) to confirm
what you told me on the record.
13. The nobles and the clergy, who has (except, exempt) from taxation
had no vote, became purely ornamental parts of the Cortes.
14. (Except, Exempt) she was suddenly hungry again, the faint, sweet
scent winding through her senses.
15. There was no answer to any of these questions, (except, exempt)

one, and that not a logical answer and not at all a reply to them.
16. Even the bar area was not (except, exempt) from screaming brats.
17. Who's afraid of this Psychic Tipster (except, exempt) a killer

who knows what was tipped couldn't be learned by normal means?

- 41 -
FARTHER VS. FURTHER
FARTHER (mas malayo)

• Refers to a greater physical distance, a distance that has
been measured.
FURTHER (karagdagang)
• Is defined as something that is additional or more, as well
as referring to distance. It is used when there is no knowledge
of the actual physical or time difference.
Example of FARTHER in a sentence:
1. The country was getting wilder and the homes were farther apart.
2. It was on one of these occasions that she wandered farther than
she realized.
3. Toby began to panic and pull, and the jaguar lowered itself
farther to the ground, planting its back legs and jerking the boy
towards the forest.
4. She couldn't focus on anything farther away than her hand, and
looking at her hand made her cry.
5. He walked farther than she preferred before disappearing into a
dark crevice.
Example of FURTHER in a sentence:
1. He offered no further information and she felt uncomfortable about

asking.
2. Miss Keller's later education is easy to understand and needs no
further explanation than she has given.
3. Before we take that further, let's consider something the Internet
has taught us about ourselves.
4. Without further argument, Sarah and Tammy left, and Lisa was
alone.
5. Len walked further into the room.
Exercises:
1. Betsy took his hand and we moved (farther, further) down the
sidewalk.
2. Mongolian settlements have lately been found very much (farther,

further) extended into the border countries of north-west India
than has been hitherto recognized.

- 42 -
3. Is it not possible to take a step (farther, further) towards

recognizing and organizing the rights of man?
4. While I dreaded frightening my wife (farther, further), I knew I

owed her the information on the motor home.
5. Christianity has made little way (farther, further) east then

Asia Minor.
6. Several fine hotels and a number of costly residences occupy a

plateau along the shore and the hillsides (farther, further)
back.
7. Saying that might go (farther, further) toward getting him to

forget the kidnapping and murder and going on with his life.
8. (Farther, Further) to the south is the large Jardin d'Essai,

containing five avenues of palms, planes, bamboos and magnolias.
9. The islands (farther, further) south in the Tyrrhenian Sea are

of an entirely different character.
10. And her sympathies go (farther, further) and shape her opinions
on political and national movements.
11. The Roman city extended much (farther, further) south and east.
12. In the week that followed, they drifted (farther, further)

apart.
13. He raised the dark brown (farther, further), blue eyes twinkling
with humor.
14. As the stele is traced (farther, further) upwards it becomes

bulkier, as do the successive leaf-bundles which leave it.
15. The responding part is situated some little distance (farther,

further) back, being in fact the region where growth is active.
16. Lyell, discussing the facts of zoological distribution, admits

that the (farther, further) we go north.
17. The accident did a hell of a job and the long coma and operations
(farther, further) messed him up.

- 43 -
HAS BEEN, HAVE BEEN, HAD BEEN
HAS BEEN (ay)

• Something began in the past and has lasted into the present
time, or was just finished not too long ago.
• As a general rule, “has” is used in the third person singular
(“he”, “she”, “it”) and singular nouns.
HAVE BEEN (naging)

• Something began in the past and has lasted into the present
time, or was just finished not too long ago.
• “have” is used for first- and second-person singular (when
using “I”, “we”, “they” and “you”) and plural nouns.
HAD BEEN (ay naging)

• Something began in the past, lasted for some time, then
ended. This is entirely in the past.
Example of HAS BEEN in a sentence:
1. Nothing has been the same.

2. Rose has been keeping secrets from you.
3. Nothing has been going on that you wouldn't be welcome to watch.
4. I don't know, but his gun has been fired since it was last cleaned.
5. According to Martha, no one has been near that mine in years.
Example of HAVE BEEN in a sentence:
1. I have been working on getting that piece done.

2. I have been present every day this week.
3. They have been living there for three years since they left
Philippines.
4. They have been working on a project for 4 years.
5. I have been going to gym every day.
Example of HAD BEEN in a sentence:

1. The lyricist had been writing realistic songs since the beginning
of his career.
2. Richard had been practicing to sing the song since morning.
3. Tom had been traveling around the world since the month of
December.
4. He had been reading different kinds of books since morning.
5. I had been shopping with my elder brother in the fair since
morning.

- 44 -
Exercises:
1. New, disease resistant trees are bringing back the splendor of

what (has been, have been, had been) called one of the prettiest
towns in New England.
2. We (has been, have been, had been) doing this since 2003.
3. Her son (has been, have been, had been) called from Denver and is
to arrive tomorrow on the afternoon train.
4. Jeff (has been, have been, had been) studying in the library
before he came to the class.
5. We think he might be an Ancient, but he is so weak and his face

(has been, have been, had been) so damaged, we can’t tell.
6. They (has been, have been, had been) playing the National Football
League in the field for two hours.
7. This courtship (has been, have been, had been) going on too long
and you're getting bored.
8. Tom (has been, have been, had been) traveling around the world
since the month of December.
9. We (has been, have been, had been) watching a scientific English

movie for three hours.
10. When she found none, she returned to the living room, where the
rest of the boxes (has been, have been, had been) deposited, and
searched them.
11. Teaching is my passion; I (has been, have been, had been) en

working as a teacher for five years.
12. Sarah broke in, "Elisabeth (has been, have been, had been)
telling us about your visit to New Orleans, as well."
13. This (has been, have been, had been) a typical day for me - with
the exception of a nice evening out.
14. I (has been, have been, had been) going to Spain on holiday every
year since 1987.

- 45 -
ADAPT, ADOPT, ADEPT
ADAPT (umangkop, iangkop, ibagay)

• To change your behavior so that it is easier to live in a
particular place or situation.
• To change (something) so that it functions better or is better
suited for a purpose.
ADOPT (magpatibay, kumopkop, hiramin)

• To take by choice into a relationship
• To take up and practice or use
• To accept formally and put into effect
ADEPT (sanay, dalubhasa, esparto)

• Very skilled or proficient at something / A person who is
skilled or proficient at something.
Example of ADAPT in a sentence:

1. That no code could do, and, as every practical government must
adapt itself to actualities.
2. How long would it take her to adapt to this culture?
3. That no code could do, and, as every practical government must
adapt itself to actualities.
4. Man is an animal who more than any other can adapt himself to all
climates and circumstances.
5. Many modern film stars also have names that would adapt well.
Example of ADOPT in a sentence:

1. It wouldn't hurt to adopt a more positive outlook.
2. It had been Alex who convinced her to take the risk and adopt
Jonathan.
3. Why would he want to adopt a child if he was feeling overwhelmed?
4. Weekends were private time for all of us and we weren't sure if
Howie would adopt the usual routine of doing our own thing.
5. Do you have any idea what it would be like to adopt that many
children?
Example of ADEPT in a sentence:

1. It's fine! answered Sidorov, who was considered an adept at
French.
2. They have also become adept at playing the game.
3. The French symbolists found an enthusiastic adept in Eugenio de
Castro.
4. For the technically adept this would be automatically disregarded.
5. Yeltsin has proved adept at controlling the first two.

- 46 -
EXERCISES:
1. But in this case the concrete being still wet can (adapt, adopt,
adept) itself more or less to the shape of the adjoining bags,
and strong rough walls can be built in this way.
2. Mark is an (adapt, adopt, adept) juggler who can easily manage

four balls in the air without dropping one.
3. In any case the inelastic quality of the Spartan system was unable
to (adapt, adopt, adept) itself to the spirit of the new age.
4. They declare their readiness to (adapt, adopt, adept) the law of

the synagogue to the law of the land, as for instance in the
question of marriage and divorce.
5. Although Stephanie seems to have a hard time in science, she is

(adapt, adopt, adept) at solving math equations.
6. Depending upon the agency, the limitations on who can (adapt,

adopt, adept) can be very restrictive.
7. The crown of Portugal was, however, much too weak to (adapt,

adopt, adept) energetic measures.
8. Karen is an (adapt, adopt, adept) seamstress who can turn a pair

of curtains into a beautiful evening gown.
9. To meet this challenge, Africa must acquire and (adapt, adopt,

adept) biotechnology to the agricultural sectors.
10. The only question was which form of Christianity were the Magyars
to (adapt, adopt, adept), the Eastern or the Western?
11. Even though I have a great job, I am not (adapt, adopt, adept)
at keeping to a budget and often end up broke between paydays.
12. We start with related facts, and (adapt, adopt, adept) a

particular method of visualizing the relation.
13. The sole justification for such a claim lay in the terms of the
Treaty of London, which the Yugosla y s could not (adapt, adopt,
adept) as a basis without stultifying their whole position against
Italy.

- 47 -
WOULD, SHOULD, COULD
WOULD (nais, gusto, ibig) – Past tense of will
• Used as a helping verb to show that something might be likely
or meant to happen under certain conditions.
SHOULD (dapat, nararapat)

• Used to indicate obligation, duty, or correctness, typically
when criticizing someone's actions.
COULD (maari, nakaya, nagawa) – Past tense of can

• Used to indicate possibility / Used in making polite
requests.
Examples of WOULD in a sentence:

1. That this democratization of information and opinion would lead
to vigorous debate and encourage a young monk to question the
church?
2. Maybe he thought she would change her mind, but it wasn't going
to happen.
3. We would get on our toboggan, a boy would give us a shove, and
off we went!
4. Plunging through drifts, leaping hollows, swooping down upon the
lake, we would shoot across its gleaming surface to the opposite
bank.
5. It is an interesting question how far men would retain their
relative rank if they were divested of their clothes.
Example of ShOULD in a sentence:

1. She should wash them, but there wasn't time.
2. We should live in all the ages of the world in an hour; ay, in
all the worlds of the ages.
3. It should have been an exciting discovery.
4. One second more and I should have understood it all!
5. So, the governor sent a messenger to Delphi to ask the oracle
what should be done with the tripod.
Example of COULD in a sentence:

1. I had let so much gas out of my balloon that I could not rise
again, and in a few minutes the earth closed over my head.
2. It seemed as if no one saw that coming because, frankly, no one
could conceive of it happening.
3. But not a trace could they find of the tiny creature they sought.
4. Bad science fiction plots, speculating on futures which could not
really happen, are the worst examples of this.
5. No one could deny that Alex was a devoted husband and father

- 48 -
EXERCISES:
1. And I (would, should, could) so like to thank Uncle once for all
his kindness to me and Boris.
2. Friends tried to discourage this tendency, fearing lest it

(would, should, could) lead to disappointment.
3. In the ancient world, man wanted guidance from the gods on what
he (would, should, could) do.
4. The Christmas tree (would, should, could) only be seen from the
back of the house, but that didn't matter.
5. It was almost as if he were shutting Felipa off before she (would,

should, could) reveal something.
6. But that's because I (would, should, could) be sharing the

experience with another human being, and human beings form
connections with other human beings.
7. In the ancient world, man wanted guidance from the gods on what
he (would, should, could) do.
8. The boys looked at her and wondered if the master (would, should,
could) really be as good as his word.
9. From their elevated position they (would, should, could) overlook

the entire valley, but not a single moving object could they see.
10. He stood still a moment to look about him, and think what he
(would, should, could) do first.
11. You (would, should, could) not be the first.
12. Thus, he stumbled on Bagovut's corps in a wood when it was

already broad daylight, though the corps (would, should, could)
long before have joined Orlov-Denisov.
13. He ran home as fast as he (would, should, could), blowing the

whistle as he ran.
14. He was not going very fast, but on his flanks specks of foam
began to appear and at times he (would, should, could) tremble
like a leaf.

- 49 -
ME, MYSELF, I
ME
• Is used when you are the object or recipient.
MYSELF
• Is reflexive, where it’s used to emphasize that the subject
is the doer.
I
• Is used when you are the subject or ‘doer’ of the Action in
the sentence.
Example of ME in a sentence:
1. My, aren't you the night owl tonight - the boy who has been
dancing with me half the night.
2. Do me a favor and don't listen to Dulce.
3. I have travelled a good deal in Concord; and everywhere, in shops,
and offices, and fields, the inhabitants have appeared to me to
be doing penance in a thousand remarkable ways.
4. It was, however—and this is sure to earn me the wrath of many
humanities professors—a time of surprisingly little originality.
5. For God's sake send me somewhere else if only in command of a
regiment.
6. I hate to ask you for another favor, but I wonder if I could pay
you to drive me home.
Example of MYSELF in a sentence:

1. I've told myself that a hundred times.
2. I want to apologize for forcing myself on you and I want to assure
you that it will never happen again.
3. How could I enjoy myself knowing he was being tended to and
surrounded by strangers?
4. I hadn't known how Annie was abducted and chastised myself for
not seeking the details.
5. I'm trying to guess what he might do; put myself in his boots.
6. To convince myself of this I do not lift it the next moment.
Example of I in a sentence:
1. Did I ever tell you that you're the most handsome man I've ever
seen?
2. They tell me I walked the day I was a year old.
3. Still, Alex was a good salesman, I guess.
4. First of all, I married Alex because I love him.
5. For starters, I think I got derailed when you said your mother's
name was Alexandrine.

- 50 -
EXERCISES:
1. But (me, myself, I) thought when people got married.
2. Curled up in a corner of the seat I amused (me, myself, I) for

hours making funny little holes in bits of cardboard.
3. Just remember, I'll always be there – whenever you need (me,

myself, I).
4. I consider (me, myself, I) fortunate to have such a subordinate

by me.
5. Just because it upsets (me, myself, I) doesn't mean I don't want

to know - or that you shouldn't tell me.
6. It doesn't matter to (me, myself, I) one way or another, but I

wish you would at least make an effort at seeing his side of it.
7. I consider (me, myself, I) fortunate to have such a subordinate

by me.
8. (me, myself, I) have the same need to nurture and protect.
9. This is between you and (me, myself, I), not the entire
neighborhood.
10. While you are under my roof, you will treat (me, myself, I) with
respect.
11. Have I disgraced (me, myself, I) in any way?
12. (me, myself, I) can take care of myself.
13. They didn't know what to think - you coming in here all huffy
and chewing (me, myself, I) out.
14. The way (me, myself, I) heard it, Grandma & Grandpa Barret were
rolling in money and Dad wasn't up to their standards,
financially.
15. But even if I had a robot that knew everything, (me, myself, I)
couldn't really say, "Tell me every custom they have here" and be
fully informed.

- 51 -
IN, ON, AT
IN (sa loob)
• Expressing the situation of something that is or appears to
be enclosed or surrounded by something else.
ON (nasa, tungkol sa)

• Physically in contact with and supported by (a surface).
• Forming a distinctive or marked part of (the surface of
something).
AT (sa, nasa)
• Expressing location or arrival in a particular place or
position.
• Expressing the time when an event takes place.
Example of IN in a sentence:
1. As it came to a stop the conductor called out in a loud voice.
2. There was not an ugly person in all the throng.
3. With this thought in mind the girl took heart and leaned her head
over the side of the buggy to see where the strange light was
coming from.
4. Katie stared at the potato in her hand.
5. And so, if she couldn't have it in her head, she'd put it into
his.
Example of ON in a sentence:
1. The expression on Felipa's face reflected both humor and interest.
2. I was born on June 27, 1880, in Tuscumbia, a little town of
northern Alabama.
3. He's catching on, isn't he?
4. On the other hand, Alex exuded confidence.
5. His warm hand on her waist was reassuring.
Example of AT in a sentence:
1. They would have some time to enjoy a late Christmas at home when
they returned.
2. When Josh died, Mary had indicated that she felt Carmen was at
least partially responsible.
3. So, with a snort and a neigh and a whisk of his short tail he
trotted off the roof into the air and at once began floating
downward to the street.
4. At some point, that stopped bugging her and became an attraction.
5. He stood at the back, and, though he had heard hardly anything,
understood everything in his own way.

- 52 -
EXERCISES:
1. Carmen gazed down (in, on, at) Destiny inside the oxygen tent.
2. Carmen stopped washing the dish (in, on, at) her hand and stared
at Mary in mute silence.
3. A few impressions stand out vividly from the first years of my

life; but "the shadows of the prison-house are (in, on, at) the
rest."
4. It shall be (in, on, at) your family's behalf that I'll start my
apprenticeship as old maid.
5. As she passed a neighbor boy, he waved (in, on, at) her, his two
missing front teeth displayed in a sweet smile.
6. There was a breath of danger (in, on, at) the very air, and every
few moments the earth would shake violently.
7. Later, she lay in bed, tucked warmly under the covers as his boots
clicked away from her (in, on, at) the hardwood floor - down the
hall and into the den.
8. The roof beside them had a great hole smashed through it, and
pieces of glass were lying scattered (in, on, at) every direction.
9. To her surprise, she caught Connie (in, on, at) home.
10. Well, if they turn you out, we'll just get a room (in, on, at)
a hotel in Bartlesville.
11. The roast will be ready (in, on, at) about 15 minutes.
12. No one did, because the Manganous did not wear hats, and Zeb had
lost his, somehow, (in, on, at) his flight through the air.
13. He paused and kissed her (in, on, at) the lips.
14. I suppose no place is better than home (in, on, at) Christmas.
15. Felipa looked to be (in, on, at) her early twenties and had a
sunshine smile that made Carmen feel welcome.

- 53 -
INTO, ONTO, UNTO
INTO (sa loob, sa loob ng)

• Expressing movement or action with the result that someone or
something becomes enclosed or surrounded by something else.
ONTO (papunta sa)

• Moving to a location on the surface of.
UNTO (sa)
• Archaic term for to / Archaic term for until.
Example of INTO in a sentence:

1. She was only a month into two years old, but she was big for her
age.
2. Well, as I was hurrying along, I heard a great splash, as though
something had fallen into the pool by the fountain.
3. The radio had shifted into Christmas mode with one song after
another.
4. She went upstairs and changed into Jeans and a fitted blouse.
5. Then he led her into the cave.
Example of ONTO in a sentence:

1. She lay back down, hoping they hadn't noticed, then rolled onto
her other side.
2. Betsy was seated at the table, forking sausage onto her plate and
smothering pancakes in maple syrup.
3. He staggered to the sofa on which Pierre was sitting and dropped
onto it, covering his face with his hand.
4. She rolled onto her back, unaware of how exposed she was.
5. He nudged her onto her back.
Example of UNTO in a sentence:

1. Be thou faithful unto death, and I will give thee a crown of life.
2. Therefore, it may please you who are inclined to these studies,
to receive it from me and the Translator, with as much good will
as we recommend it unto you."
3. His disciples say unto him, when wilt thou be manifest unto us
and when shall we see thee?
4. In an earlier passage, again in reference to the manna, Jesus is
called " the bread of God, which cometh down out of heaven, and
giveth life unto the world."
5. Thou didst choose David as king over Israel, and sparest unto him
concerning his seed for ever that his kingship should never fail
before Thee.

- 54 -
EXERCISES:
1. hey were published in 1862 as (into, onto, unto) this Last.
2. If my mother happened to be near, I crept (into, onto, unto) her

arms, too miserable even to remember the cause of the tempest.
3. Damian rolled (into, onto, unto) his side and puked blood into
the sand.
4. Alex walked (into, onto, unto) the room, smiling when he saw what
she had done.
5. Wherefore he saith, when he ascended up on high, he led captivity

captive, and gave gifts (into, onto, unto) men.
6. With effort, Deidre hauled herself up (into, onto, unto) a branch,

wrapped her legs around it in a careful balancing act then
stretched upward for the next
7. A shadow fell across her, and she rolled (into, onto, unto) her
back, unsettled to see Darian gone and another Guardian standing
over her.
8. The fire leaped (into, onto, unto) life; the flames encircled me
so that in a moment my clothes were blazing.
9. And I give and bequeath (into, onto, unto) every of my said

executors for their pains to be taken on that behalf 40s.
10. I'm the one who should be apologizing - for dragging you (into,
onto, unto) this.
11. He walked quickly, but very quietly, down the pathway (into,
onto, unto) the darker woods.
12. Humans don't come here unless they're dead, and even then, only
a couple make it (into, onto, unto) our supermax zoo.
13. They let you fall (into, onto, unto) the water, and you would ha
been drowned, if it hadn't been for me.
14. Peter was grieved because he said (into, onto, unto) him the
third time, Lovest thou me?

- 55 -
FILL UP, FILL IN, FILL OUT
FILL UP (punuin)
• The act of filling something completely
• Cause a space or container to become full.
FILL IN (punan)
• A person or thing that fills in, as a substitute,
replacement, or insertion.
FILL OUT (punuan)

• To make or become fuller, thicker, or rounder
• To make more substantial / to complete (a form, application,
etc.)
Examples of FILL UP in a sentence:

1. She gazed at Ruth, and her face seemed to fill up with horror.
2. There's a new batch in, about fifty, they say, to fill up the
last posting.
3. Computers used to fill up entire rooms.
4. The theatre began to fill up just before the performance.
5. Fill up on potatoes, bread and pasta, which are high in
carbohydrate and low in fat.
Examples of FILL IN in a sentence:

1. Don't use pencil or colored pens to fill in the form.
2. The next step in writing a letter or a memo is to fill in the
body of the communication.
3. A child in fosterage was reared and educated suitably for the
position it was destined to fill in life.
4. The identification of the author of the second Gospel with Mark,
which we owe to tradition, enables us to fill in our picture of
him a little further.
5. Just fill in the on-line form, your request for used parts is
instantly sent to the UK's leading breakers.
Examples of FILL OUT in a sentence:

1. What did you do, use the address on the postcard he'd filled out
for her before you killed him?
2. The card should be filled out and sent back to the manufacturer
as soon as possible.
3. His features were no longer soft and his body had filled out.
4. Even after you've filled out a preliminary survey, you may still
need to answer qualifying surveys to see if you fit a particular
profile.

- 56 -
EXERCISES:
1. Have you (fill up, fill in, filled out) your FAFSA to learn if
you're eligible for any federal grants?
2. The van was capacious and he decided to (fill up, fill in, fill
out) the space with a couple of sacks of fuel
3. During our meal the restaurant had begun to (fill up, fill in,
fill out) with the pre-theatre crowd, Brighton burghers and their
wives.
4. You can quickly (fill up, fill in, fill out) windows and doors.
5. Should I (fill up, fill in, fill out) with petrol just in case?
6. We spent a lot of time doing (fill up, fill in, fill out) the
blank exercises on Simple Present tense conjugation.
7. The page promises more reviews in the near future, so hopefully

it will be (fill up, fill in, filled out) with tons of information
sooner rather than later.
8. Well, if you stop to (fill up, fill in, fill out) at a motorway
service station your dreams could come true.
9. The rear channels are often quiet or merely provide some (fill
up, fill in, fill out) underwater ambiance.
10. This allows the user to list a number of programs which will (fill
up, fill in, fill out) a complete disk, or more than one disk.
11. The calculator can be (fill up, fill in, filled out) online or
over the phone.
12. About half an hour before the performance, the theatre starts to
(fill up, fill in, fill out).
13. Choose the correct homophone to (fill up, fill in, fill out) the
gap in each sentence.
14. I think you might relish the opportunity to (fill up, fill in,
fill out) your education on salmon.
15. He hadn't yet completely (fill up, fill in, filled out).

- 57 -
LOSS, LOST, LOSE, LOOSE
LOSS (pagkawala)
• The fact or process of losing something or someone.
• An amount of money lost by a business or organization.
• The state or feeling of grief when deprived of someone or
something of value.
LOST (nawala)
• Past and past participle of lose
• Denoting something that has been taken away or cannot be
recovered.
LOSE (matalo)
• Be deprived of or cease to have or retain (something).
• Become unable to find (something or someone.
LOOSE (maluwag)
• Not firmly or tightly fixed in place; detached or able to be
detached.
Example of LOSS in a sentence:

1. A loss too great for me to bear.
2. She withdrew, and he felt the loss of her presence like the sun
going behind a cloud.
3. The sense of loss from her dream returned, and she was embarrassed
to feel her throat tightening.
4. That he was an unlucky jerk and his loss of memory was probably
a good thing in the long pull?
5. Furious at the loss, the fox made a snarling lunge at Carmen.
Example of LOST in a sentence:

1. You've lost almost all of your self-esteem.
2. Without you, or when something comes between us like this, I seem
lost and can't do anything.
3. The four men followed them for some distance, and then lost them
on the hillside.
4. He had lost more than he could pay.
5. Infantry regiments, we are told, advanced to the attack with music
and with drums beating, and killed and lost thousands of men.
Example of LOSE in a sentence:

1. They must understand that we can only lose by taking the
offensive.
2. If you have everything you have ever wanted, you have less to
gain and more to lose by invading your neighbor.

- 58 -
3. The pain caused by his removal into the hut had made him groan
aloud and again lose consciousness.
4. Hence the second clock will gain or lose on the other.
5. He won't lose his mate, even if he chooses to kill her rather
than give her up.
Example of LOOSE in a sentence:

1. Lydia Larkin let loose a sigh of relief.
2. Sometimes they had to climb over heaps of loose rock, where Jim
could scarcely drag the buggy.
3. Her hair was free, the long, loose curls cascading down her
shoulders and back.
4. Maybe the rope didn't bust loose until he was part way.
5. Carmen let loose of his waist, moving away from the unclean
thought.
EXERCISES:
1. He led her down a floor to a large gym where a group of men stood
in a (loss, lost, lose, loose) cluster on a mat.
2. He picked at a thread on the couch, his mind obviously (loss,

lost, lose, loose) in deep thought.
3. But above all harvest as early as possible, if you would escape

frosts and have a fair and salable crop; you may save much (loss,
lost, lose, loose) by this means.
4. If my work slowed down, that was a (loss, lost, lose, loose) of

dollars for him.
5. Watching his retreating back, it occurred to her once again that

she might (loss, lost, lose, loose) him over moral issues.
6. They exchanged knowing glances, and treated her like a (loss,

lost, lose, loose) dog.
7. If my work slowed down, that was a (loss, lost, lose, loose) of

dollars for him.
8. At least we didn't (loss, lost, lose, loose) electricity.
9. She'd felt the same (loss, lost, lose, loose) of control and fear
when first diagnosed as terminal.

- 59 -
10. In the years when she was growing out of childhood, her style
(loss, lost, lose, loose) its early simplicity and became stiff
and, as she says, "periwigged."
11. Their (loss, lost, lose, loose) organization makes it impossible

to obtain accurate statistics, but the number of their adherents
is small.
12. But you must understand my people are not like you, are not as
accepting of your (loss, lost, lose, loose) tongue.
13. Lana watched him, at a (loss, lost, lose, loose) at what to think
of his reaction.
14. His kind, honest eyes, with the tears rising in them when she
herself had begun to cry as she spoke of her (loss, lost, lose,
loose), did not leave her memory.
15. She made it to the sand before being forced to slow to a walk by
the ankle-deep, (loss, lost, lose, loose) sand.
16. She had the air of one who has suddenly (loss, lost, lose, loose)
faith in the whole human race.
17. While you were masterminding this manipulative plot, did you
(loss, lost, lose, loose) sight of your promise to protect me -
or was that something else you planned on ditching?
18. When the Emperor's health was drunk, Pierre, (loss, lost, lose,
loose) in thought, did not rise or lift his glass.
19. It's not as if there's some crazed killer running around (loss,
lost, lose, loose).
20. Using perspective projection, the spherical panorama would (loss,

lost, lose, loose) much of its phenomenal reality.
21. The dealers (loss, lost, lose, loose) their souls when they come
work for me.
22. Do you think you could shake (loss, lost, lose, loose) a good-bye
kiss?
23. She yanked her weapons (loss, lost, lose, loose).

- 60 -
VIII. VOCABULRAY WORDS

• A list of words and often phrases, usually arranged alphabetically
and defined or translated; a lexicon or glossary.
Example of Vocabulary Words:

1. Agile - Able to move quickly and easily, agility.
Example: It is a clever, agile and powerful dog, extremely
pugnacious in disposition.
2. Buffoon - A ridiculous but amusing person.

Example: They pictured their manager as a buffoon.
3. Catharsis - The release of pent up emotions.

Example: Crying is a great catharsis for releasing pain and anger.
4. Dubious - Hesitating or doubting.

Example: The little priest rose with a distinctly dubious
grimace.
5. Enunciate - Pronounce clearly.

Example: Be sure to enunciate when you speak into the
microphone.
6. Facet - One side of something with many sides.

Example: Middle school lab safety activities are only one facet
of a safe and efficient classroom.
7. Genre - A style of art.

Example: They invented a new genre called The Beta band.
8. Heinous - Very wicked, outrageously evil.

Example: They are capable of the most heinous acts.
9. Impudent - Not showing proper respect.

Example: Some of them were impudent and insulting.
10. Jamboree - A lavish or noisy party.

- 61 -
Example: There will be a daylong jamboree, treasure hunt and
barbecue on the Saturday.
11. Knell - The sound of a bell rung slowly.

Example: The revolution tolled the death knell for the Russian
monarchy.
12. Lapel - A flap folded back on each side of a coat.

Example: Each one of the 100 singers on stage wore black with a
red lapel rose.
13. Menace - A dangerous or troublesome person or thing.

Example: In the case of wealthy bishoprics or abbacies this
involved a serious menace to the secular authority.
14. Nostalgia - Longing for the happy times of the past.

Example: Some 3,000 exhibitors gather for one of the biggest
trips back in time at a weekend of motoring nostalgia.
15. Odium - Widespread hatred or disgust.

Example: Her manner acquired her universal odium.
16. Panache - A confident stylish manner

Example: The modified plot seems too tired and generic, while
the dialog lacks panache and imagination.
17. Quandary - A state of uncertainty.

Example: This offers itself as precisely the sort of PC quandary
that Anthony Browne highlights in his slim volume.
18. Rapport - A close and harmonious relationship.

Example: A teacher trying to establish close rapport with
Students.
19. Trundle - Move or roll slowly.

Example: Equipment is trundled from one ward to another and the
beds are placed in any ward where the patient happens
to be.
20. Unnerve - Cause to feel nervous or frightened
Example: What makes it worthwhile is what it does with those
stock elements to unnerve the audience.

- 62 -
EXERCISES:
1. Choose the word below that best describes algorithm.
a. A process or set of rules c. Program model
b. Mathematical Computation d. Function
2. Collection of bawdy epigrams to the Roman god Priapus; the

illustration of the first page may not be suitable for work.
a. defensively polite c. classy

b. sophisticated d. indecent
3. Choleric is a word or phrase that describes emotions, which

among the choices expresses the feeling.
a. affable c. easily angered

b. sorrowful d. cheerful
4. The word defunct means.
a. in existence c. extant
b. no longer existing or functioning d. enduring
5. None the less, we were elated at the detail he'd gathered.
a. very happy and excited c. uncomfortable

b. miserable d. contented
6. When the guns began, their fire was fitful, uncertain, blind, and
they were too late.
a. Continuous c. permanent
b. Steady d. intermittent
7. I also love how it's covered in artwork and graffiti, which makes
it extremely beautiful.
a. conserve c. protects
b. scribbling d. saves
8. A deeper shade of hauteur overspread his features, but he said not

a word.
a. disdainful pride c. timidity

b. meekness d. humility

- 63 -
9. Dating also provides an opportunity to discover if the

idiosyncrasies of the other person are a turn off or a turn on.
a. usualness c. normality
b. distinctiveness d. accustomed
10. She even had some junket for pudding which she avowed she had not
tasted for " nigh on thirty years ".
a. tasteless c. celebration
b. unmelodious d. sour
11. It lost speed and pulled up outside the kiosk with a squeal of
brakes.
a. huge store c. castle
b. booth d. boutique
12. Former All Black internationals lambasted the error-prone display,

and radio shows were filled with criticism.
a. compliment c. flatter
b. approve d. criticize
13. Agents seek to adapt so as to exploit the local niche to which

they have access.
a. closure c. solid
b. entertainment d. ideal position
14. The rear sight should not obtrude any more than necessary above
the weapon itself.
a. impose c. eschew
b. ignore d. neglect
15. With a penchant for medicine and science and my magic, I can cure
what others could not.
a. antipathy c. impartiality
b. strong liking d. fairness
16. He made some quip about the plastic surgery being good.
a. conformity c. witty remark
b. seriousness d. flattery

- 64 -
17. Not with close to a billion rabid fans tracking your every move.
a. liberal c. fanatical
b. moderate d. halfhearted
18. Once finished the fighters may then taunt each other, but no
blows may be struck in anger.
a. jeer c. approval
b. respect d. compliment
19. Old age was held in high honor, but it was sacrilege to speak, or
even to think, of the dead.
a. Disrespect to something sacred c. devotion
b. respectfulness d. holiness
20. In a short scuffle the hero knocks out the baddie with a single
punch.
a. tranquility c. agreement
b. harmony d. struggle
21. She is the great unsung heroine of British feminism.
a. famous c. unacknowledged
b. celebrated d. praised
22. For us politics is not about gimmicky pledge cards with vacuous
statements.
a. meaningful c. intelligent
b. inexpressive d. thinking
23. The waddle fan, represented in fig.
a. toddle c. cat walk

b. big step d. rock
24. Napoleon offered to make Joseph king of Lombardy if he would waive

all claim of succession to the French throne, but met with a firm
refusal.
a. claim c. relinquish
b. pursue d. affirm

- 65 -
IX. KASINGKAHULUGAN
• Ang kasingkahulugan (synonyms) ay salita o mga salitang may

kapareho ng kahulugan. Maraming mga salita ang may
magkakapareho ang kahulugan.
Halimbawa:
Hindi na nakapagpigil ang kaawa-awang katulong kaya isiniwalat ang

sama ng loob sa mapang-aping amo.
a. isinabi c. isinigaw
b. Inilahad d. kinalat
Iminungkahi ang pagbabawal magtapon ng basura sa di-wasong lugar.
a. ipinanukala c. isiniwalat
b. inilahad d. ibinulgar
PAGSASANAY:
1. Maalwan lamang ang nararapat na dalahin ng isang bata.
a. magaan c. malaki
b. maganda d. maliit
2. Laganap ang krisis kaya tayo ay dapat magtipid.

a. kalat c. limitado
b. kapos d. pantay
3. Madalas silang mapaaway dahil sa kanilang kapalaluan.

a. kalabisan c. kagandahan
b. kayabangan d. kasinungalingan
4. Ang anumang alitan ay di dapat hayaang magtagal.

a. proyekto c. hiniram
b. pagkakaibigan d. bangayan
5. Ilan taong din siniil ng mga dayuhan ang mga Pilipino.

a. tinago c. tinimpi
b. inapi d. pinalaya

- 66 -
6. Tigib na ng pasahero ang dyip nang ito ay umalis.
a. punong-puno c. kaunting-kaunti
b. kulang-kulang d. maraming-maami
7. Sa palihan nagagawa ang mga itak, espada at iba pang yari sa

bakal.
a. palikuran c. palengke
b. pamilihang-bayan d. pandayan
8. Hindi ka dapat magmaktol kung ika’y napagsasabihan.
a. umiyak c. magdabog
b. magtampo d. lumayas
9. Huwag mong pukawin ang batang nahihimlay.
a. libangin c. pigilin
b. palayain d. gisingin
10. Kumipot ang Maynila sa dami ng taong naninirahan dito.
a. lumuwag c. sumikip
b. lumaki d. lumiit
11. Walang minimithi ang iyong magulang kung ‘di ang mabigyan ka ng
magandang kinabukasan.
a. dinadalangin c. ikinatutuwa
b. ninanais d. pinapangarap
12. Maraming himutok ang mga mangagawa laban sa kanilang kumpanya

gaya ng ‘di pagtaas nang kanilang sahod.
a. ipon c. sama ng loob

b. masasakit na salita d. reklamo
13. Nauulinigan ang pag-uusap ng grupo dahil sa lakas ng tinig

nila.
a. naririndi c. nasasaksihan
b. napakikinggan d. nakikita

- 67 -
14. Pakiramdam niya ay labis-labis ang kanyang suliranin kung siya

ay naliligalig.
a. masayahin c. magulo ang isip

b. malungkutin d. maraming iniisip
15. Nagugulumihan si Rochelle kung anong kurso ang kanyang kukunin

sa kolehiyo.
a. Natutuwa c. nagtataka
b. Nagdadalawang isip d. nalilito
16. Karapatan ng bawat batang Pilipino ang magkaroon ng pamilyang

mag-aaruga sa kanya.
a. a-alalay c. mag-aalaga
b. gagabay d. kukup-kop
17. Hindi mo dapat gawing katuwaan ang pagkutya sa kapwa.
a. pagkantyaw c. paglibak
b. pagkwentuhan d. pagsumbong
18. Ang pag-eensayo ng banda ay nakabubulahaw.
a. nakalilito c. nakababagot
b. nakagugulo d. nakatutuwa
19. Dapat kang magkamal ng salapi sa mabuting paraan.
a. magtamasa c. magtrabaho
b. manguha d. maghanda
20. Patang-pata siya ng marating ang tuktok ng bundok Apo.
a. pagod na pagod c. hinang-hina

b. hingal na hingal d. uhaw na uhaw

- 68 -
X. KASALUNGAT
• Ang kasalungat (antonyms) ay salita o mga salitang kabaligtaran

ang kahulugan sa salitang ginamit.
Halimbawa:
Si Pilandok ay kinagigiliwan ng taga-Maranao.
a. kinaiinisan c. kinaaaliwan
b. kinatutuwaan d. ikinagagalak
Gusto kung lampasan lahat ang basang sisiw sa aming pamumuhay kaya
ako ay nagsisikap.
a. mahirap c. mayaman
b. dukkha d. mapera
PAGSASANAY
1. Umiiral nanaman ang taingang kawali ni anna nang tawagin siya ng
kaniyang ina para maghugas ng pinggan.
a. walang galang c. walang marinig

b. nagdadabog d. pinakikinggan
2. Ilang buwan naring nagbibilang poste si Rose mula nang matapos

ang kaniyang kontrata sa bentahan ng sapatos.
a. walang trabaho c. naghahanap ng trabaho

b. may trabaho d. hindi nagtatrabaho
3. Kahit na katangap pa lamang ni Linny ang kaniyang sweldo ay nabutas

na ang bulsa dahil sa bayarin sa koryente at tubig.
a. maraming pera c. naghahanap ng pera

b. nagbibilang ng pera d. nawalan ng pera
4. Nagbunga na rin ang kaniyang mahabang taon na pagsusunog ng kilay

sa kolehiyo.
a. maraming inaaral c. tamad mag-aral

b. masipag mag-aral d. walang pang-aral

- 69 -
5. Kumukulo ang tiyan ni Lisa ng pumasok sa paaralan kaya hindi siya
makaunawa sa klase.
a. maraming kinain c. walang makain

b. busog d. hindi kumakain
6. Ang sweldo ni Lita ay isang kisap mata lamang ng ito ay ubusin

ng kanyang asawang manginginom.
a. maganda c. mabilis
b. mabagal d. kumukurap
7. Ang mga anak na babae ni Lorna ay di makabasag pinggan kaya

iginagalang ng mga kalalakihan.
a. mahiyain c. mabilis
b. mahinhin d. magaslaw
8. Sinasabing kabiyak ng puso ang isang minamahal dahil magkasama na

sila sa mga desisyon sa buhay at iisa na ang tinitibok ng kanilang
puso.
a. magkasintahan c. iniirog
b. magkaibigan d. hindi mag asawa
9. Sinasabing ilaw ng tahanan ang isang ina dahil ito ang gumagabay
sa lahat ng miyembro ng pamilya.
a. anak c. ama
b. ina d. pamangkin
10.Ngayong nakumpuni na ang silya, tuwid na ang sandalan at hindi na

mahirap upuan.
a. unat c. liko-liko
b. baliko d. deretso
11.Tinulak ko ang karton at tinulungan mo ako habang ikaw ay nasa

harap para hilain ito.
a. hinila c. tinangay
b. kinuha d. dinukot
12.Ang bitbit na karton ni aling Nena na galing sa pamilihan ay

mabigat kung kayat nagpatulong ito sa kanyang anak sa pagbubuhat.
a. magaan c. hindi mabuhat

b. pabigat d. maraming laman

- 70 -
13.Ang aking ama ay makapal ang palad sa pagkakayod araw araw upang
may makain kami sa hapag.
a. walang pagod c. tamad

b. makalinga d. masipag
14.Nagsusumikap sap ag-aaral si Annie sa kabila ng pagiging anak

dalita.
a. mahirap c. mayabang
b. mapera d. mayaman
15.Pawang balitang kutsero pala ang pagkakapanalo ni Theresa sa

paligsahan sa pagsayaw.
a. walang basehang kwento c. maraming kwento

b. mapanirang kwento d. totoong kwento
16.Tila lumulutang sa ulap si Trina nang nakatanggap ng bulaklak

galing sa kanyang manliligaw.
a. natulala c. malungkot
b. hindi makapaniwala d. masaya
17.Palaging tinutukso ng mga kalaro niya ang bunso ni aling Tinay

dahil siya ay putok sa buho.
a. ampon c. kakaiba manamit

b. kadugo d. hindi tunay na kadugo
18.Bumili ng masarap na ulam si inay ngayon dahil naibenta niya lahat

ang hitik na hitik na huling isda ni itay.
a. kakaunti c. malalaki
b. maraming-marami d. maliliit
19.Nanalo sa palakasan ang pambato ng aming eskwelahan dahil mabilis

tumakbo at matigas ang buto.
a. mahina c. masigasig
b. malakas d. matapang
20.Naaksidente ang isang motorsiklong dumaan dahil sa kidlat sa bilis

niyang takbo.
a. napakahina c. napakabagal
b. napakatulin d. napakayabang

- 71 -
XI. WASTONG GAMIT NG MGA SALITA
• Ang bawat salita ay may tiyak na kahulugan. Maaaring magbago

ang kahulugan ng isang pahayag kung mali ang gamit na salita.
Maraming salita sa Filipino ang nagkakapalitan ng gamit.
NG AT NANG
NG - Sumasagot sa tanong na Ano at Kalian.

- Kapag ang pangungusap ay tungkol sa araw o petsa.
- Nagsasaad ng pagmamay-ari.
- Ginagamit sa mga pangalan.
- Bilang pananda sa pandiwa
- Kasunod ng mga pang-uring pamilang
Halimbawa:
1. Umuwi ng tanghali si Grace.

2. Nakabibingi ang tahol ng aso.
3. Bumili ng sasakyan ang ama ni Anthony para maihatid sila sa
paaralan tuwing umaga.
4. Binilhan ni Timothy ng labindalawang-oras ang kanyang
nakababatang kapatid sa kaarawan nito.
5. Kumain ng mansanas ang batang may sakit dahil sinabihan siya ng
nanay niya.
NANG - Sumasagot sa tanong na Paano.

- Kapag umuulit ang kilos.
- Ito ay pampalit sa salitang NOONG (when)
- Ito ay pampalit sa salitang PARA at UPANG
- Ginagamit ito kung ang sumusunod na salita ay pandiwa (verb)
- Ginagamit ito kung ang sumusunod na salita ay pang-uri (adj.)
- Ito ay ginagamit sa unahan ng pangungusap.
- Pampalit sa salitang na at ang.
Halimbawa:
1. Iyak nang iyak ang bata pagkatapos na tumanggi ang kanyang ama
na bilhan siya ng bagong laruan.
2. Sobra nang pagpapahiya ng pamilya nina Joaquin sa pamilya natin
kaya dapat matigil na ito.
3. Pumasok nang dahan-dahan si Simeon upang hindi na magising pa ang
mga kapatid niya.
4. Ginastos ni Paulo ang pera nang walang paalam mula sa kanyang
ina.
5. Nilagay niya nang paunti-unti ang mantika upang hindi ito
tumalsik.

- 72 -
PAGSASANAY
1. Nagsigawan ang lahat (ng, nang) may sunog.
2. Ang palad (ng, nang) mayayaman ay tila napakanipis
3. Nagtatanim (ng, nang) palay ang mga magsasaka.
4. (Ng, Nang) maluto ang sinaing, agad na hinarap ni Maria ang

pagpiprito ng isda.
5. Tumigil ang iyak ng sanggol (ng, nang) bumalik ang nanay.
6. Nagmamadaling umalis si Patrick (ng, nang) may tumawag.
7. Tumigil ang iyak ng sanggol (ng, nang) bumalik ang nanay.
8. Ang bahay na ito ay pagmamay-ari (ng, nang) mga Hernandez.
9. Gawin mo (ng, nang) hindi nagrereklamo.
10. Si Benedict ang kumuha (ng, nang) halabas kanina.
11. Ang uniporme ay itiniklop (ng, nang) hindi pa pinaplantsa.
12. Lumusong sam tubig si Anna (ng, nang) makaramdam ng init.
13. Napakagara ang bahay (ng, nang) mga Dela Cruz.
14. Ang mga batang-kalye ay tulak nang tulak sa karetong puno (ng,
nang) gamit.
15. Gawin mo (ng, nang) hindi nagrereklamo.
16. Si Ate Dianne ay nagluluto (ng, nang) pang meryenda.
17. (Ng, Nang) tumikom ang dilim ako ay nagmamadaling umalis.
18. Aalis ka (ng, nang) hindi nagpapaalam?
19. Ang Tagalog ang basehan (ng, nang) wika natin.
20. Basag ang salamin (ng, nang) bintana.
21. Tulungan mo ako sa mga gawain (ng, nang) makaalis tayo kaagad.
22. Kausapin mo si Lorna (ng, nang) malaman mo ang buong katotohanan.

- 73 -
DOON AT ROON
DOON - Ang salitang doon ay ginagamit kapag ang nauunang salita ay

nagtatapos sa mga letrang katinig maliban sa W at Y dahil
ang mga ito ay itinuturing na malapatinig.
Halimbawa:
1. Matatagpuan mo ang iyong hinahanap doon sa malaking kahon sa gilid

ng pinto.
2. Pumunta ka lang doon kay Aling Carmela kung gusto mong magpatahi
ng iyong susuotin.
3. Makikita mo lang iyon doon sa tabi ng mga gamit ko.
4. Siya ba ang nakasalubong ni Albert doon sa simbahan?
5. Ang mga manliligaw ng aking pamangkin ay napatigil doon sa may puno
ng manga nang makita nila ang kanyang amang paparating.
ROON - Ang salitang roon naman ay ginagamit kapag ang nauunang salita
ay nagtatapos sa mga letrang patinig (a, e, i, o, u). Gayundin
kapag ang naunang salita ay nagtatapos sa mga letrang W at Y,
dahil ang mga ito ay itinuturing na malapatinig.
Halimbawa:
1. Ang mga kumakandidato sa darating na eleksyon ay pumunta roon

sa ginaganap na debate sa Silang, Cavite.
2. Ang magkapatid ay nakatanggap ng imbitasyon sa kasal kayat
nagkikita-kita kami roon sa simbahan.
3. Si Gina at Gigi ay dumalo roon sa kaarawan ng aking pamangkin.
4. May mga magagandang paysan kami roon sa probinsya.
5. Si Jimmy ay nakatira roon sa malaking bahay na may pinturang
puti at asul.
PAGSASANAY
1. Hindi sinama ni Emma ang kanyang anak (doon, roon) sa palengke

dahil sa marami itong ipinapabili kapag may mga nakikitang laruan.
2. Ang nagpost ng mapanirang larawan (doon, roon) sa internet ay

umani ng kaliwa’t kanang batikos mula sa publiko.
3. Ang pagiging mapangutya ni Donya Elena (doon, roon) sa mga taong

humihingi ng tulong ay sumisimbolo ng pagiging mapagmataas sa
kapwa.
4. Sina Bernard ay pumunta (doon, roon) sa dagat para maligo kasama

ang kanyang mga kaibigan, upang ipagdiwang ang kanyan kaarawan.

- 74 -
5. Siya ay kinausap ng kanyang ama (doon, roon) sa kumakalat na
balitang may kalaguyo siyang iba.
6. Dahil sa kakapusan ng pera napag-isip isip niya pumasok bilang

katulong (doon, roon) sa dating pinasukan ng kanyang kapatid.
7. Maganda (doon, roon) kaya tayo mamasyal.
8. Si Tina ay bigong matangap (doon, roon) sa ina-aplayang trabaho.
9. Malalim na ang gabi nang matapos ang kasiyahan kaya (doon, roon)
nalang kami nagpalipas ng gabi.
10.Mas maigi ng manirahan tayo dito sa probinsya dahil (doon, roon)

sa Maynila wala tayong permanenteng tirahan.
11.Sa gitna ng kanyang mapait na sinapit (doon, roon) sa kanyang

trabaho sa ibang bansa gusto parin niyang makipagsapalaran ulit.
12. Nanginginig ang kaniyang tuhod nang makarating siya (doon, roon).
13.Maganda ang naging bunga ng kanyang pagsusumikap (doon, roon) sa

paaralang pinasukan niya.
14.Masasanay rin tayo (doon, roon) sa kanyang istilo ng pakikisama,

kaysa makipagtalo tayo, payuhan nalang natin siyan kung paano
makibagay sa kapwa.
15.Nang biglang bumuhos ang malakas na ulan (doon, roon) muna kami
nanatili sa may canteen.
16.Napag-isipan naming bumili na lamang ng lutong ulam (doon, roon)

sa mga tinda ni Aling Brenda.
17.Marami ring nakapila (doon, roon) sa kabilang kainan kaya magtiyga

nalang tayo rito sa ating puwesto.
18.Ang paligsahan ng mga manlalaro sa basketball (doon, roon) sa

plaza ay dinaluhan ng mga kabataan mula sa iba’t ibang bayan.
19.Kapag nakasama mona siya (doon, roon) mo lamang makikita ang

kanyang tunay na ugali kung paano siya umasta.
20.Si Aling Dona at ang kanyang bunsong anak na babae ay naglalaba

(doon, roon) sa ilog.
21.Napatunayan na isa siyang masama at mapanlinlang na tao (doon,

roon) sa kanilang lugar.

- 75 -
Din at Rin
DIN - Ang “din” ay ginagamit kasunod ng mga salitang nagtatapos sa

katinig maliban lamang sa w at y.
Halimbawa:
1. Si Hector ay malakas din katulad ng kanyang kapatid na si Peter.

2. Sa kabila ng lahat ng sakripisyo naming natupad din ang aming
minimithing magkabahay.
3. Kinabit niya iyong kadena ng kanyang bisekleta pero tinganggal
din niya kaagad dahil sa kinakalawang.
4. Bingyan din ni Susan ng pagkain ang mga manok sa likod ng kanilang
bahay kahit hindi sakanila.
5. Kailangan din naming ng tulong pinansyal na galling sa gobyerno
sapagkat nawalan kami ng hanapbuhay dulot ng pandemya.
RIN - Ginagamit ang salitang “rin” kapag ang sinusundang ga salita ay

nagtatapos sa mga patinig (a, e, i, o, u) o ang mga mala-patinig
ng katinig kagaya ng w at y.
Halimbawa:
1. Kaya ko rin gumawa ng sariling tula patungkol sa pagkasira ng

ating kalikasan.
2. Nasasaktan na rin si Peter kaya huwag ka nang manggulo pa sa
kanilang relasyon.
3. Si Sisa ang pinakatalento sa aming magkakapatid, siya rin ay
maganda.
4. Hindi ko lubos maisip na siya rin ang sisira sa kanyang magandang
reputasyon.
5. Ikinagagalak kong makita na ikaw ay dumalo rin sa aking
pagdiriwang ng kaarawan.
PAGSASANAY
1. Ang aking kuya ay nagtitinda ng kakanin, siya (din, rin) ay

nagkukumpuni ng mga sirang kagamitang elektikal.
2. Nahulog (din, rin) ako sa kanyang mga magagandang ngiti.
3. Maliligo (din, rin) kami sa ilog kapag hindi na malakas ang agos
nito.
4. Ayaw ko (din, rin) gumala ngayon, bukod sa mainit na kapos din

ako sa pera.

- 76 -
5. Hindi mo lang (din, rin) naman ako kayang ipagtanggol sa mga

magulang mo, mas maigi ng maghiwalay na tayo.
6. Hindi mo ako masisisi dahil hindi naman ako palaging mabait at

maunawain, nagagalit (din, rin) naman ako kung minsan.
7. Sila ang nagsabing ikaw (din, rin) ay magaling umawit, kayat

lumahok kana sa aming pangkat at magsanay tayo.
8. Iba-iba man tayo ng pananaw sa politika, ang mahalaga tayo ay

nagkakaisa (din, rin) pagdating sa pagtulong sa kapwa.
9. Kung umusta ka para kang walang pinag-aralan, nanggaling ka (din,

rin) naman sa hirap bago ka yumaman.
10. Malaki ang naitulong pinansyal ng aking tiyuhin sa aking pag-

aaral, kayat nagsusumikap ako para masuklihan (din, rin) siya
pagdating ng panahon.
11. Mayroon (din, rin) sana akong nais sabihin at itanong sayo kung
nanaisin mo.
12. Inay, ibili mo (din, rin) ako ng sapatos kagaya nung kay Alvin,
bukod kasi sa maganda ang kulay, bagay iyon sa akin.
13. Hindi ba’t ikaw (din, rin) naman ang may kasalanan?
14. Bawal ang magtapon ng basura rito sa parke, bawal (din, rin) ang
pumitas ng mga bulaklak.
15. Magbabakasyon kami sa aming probinsya, marami kaming dalang

kagamitan na iuuwi at bumili (din, rin) kami ng mga pampasalubong.
16. Natutuwa (din, rin) akong malaman na magtatapos kana sa hayskul.
17. Huwag mo ng itanggi, kasama ka (din, rin) sa mga kumuha ng mga

prutas sa aming taniman.
18. Kung ikaw ay gumawa ng masama, ikaw (din, rin) ang babalikan ng
karma.
19. Dadalhin (din, rin) namin ang alaga kong aso sa parke.
20. Kami ay nagtatanim ng mga halamang herbal sa aming bukid, kami

(din, rin) ay nagtatanim ng iba’t ibang klase ng gulay.

- 77 -
DAW AT RAW
DAW - Ginagamit ang salitang “daw” kung ang sinusundang salita ay

nagtatapos sa katinig (consonant).
Halimbawa:
1. Hindi totoo yung sinasabi nilang mahal daw kita. Dahil ang totoo,
mahal na mahal kita.
2. Bakit daw ikaw ang minahal ko. Sabi ko lang, minahal kita dahil
sa taglay mong pambihira.
3. Bumulong daw ang tadhana sa iyo. Sinabi niya ang pangalan ko. Kaya
pala pangalan ko ang ipinagsisigawan ng puso mo.
4. Sinaniban daw ng masamang element ang kaptid ni Aida sa paaralan.
5. Ito lang daw ang kayang ibigay na tulong pinansyal ni Mang Beloy,
kayat tanggapin niyo, makatutulong ito sa mga gastusin sa
hospital.
RAW - Ginagamit kung ang sinusundang salita ay nagtatapos sa patinig

(vowel) gaya ng a, e, i, o at u.
- Ginagamit din ito kung ang sinusundang salita ay malapatinig
(semi-vowel) tulad ng “w” at “y”.
Halimbawa:
1. Ikakasal na raw si Marc sa isang buwan. Mahigit dalawang taon na

din noong nagkahiwalay kayo. Mukhang nakapag-move on na siya.
Ikaw na lamang ang hindi pa.]
2. Ibang babae raw ang dahilan kung bakit ka iniwan ng boyfriend mo.
Matapos mong ibigay ang lahat, iyon pa ang igaganti niya sa iyo?
3. Mananatili raw na tapat siyang kaibigan dahil ang tunay na
kaibigan hanggang sa huli laging nariyan.
4. Maginoo raw siya pero medyo bastos. Hindi siya ang tipo mong
lalaki. Dahil ang tunay na lalaki ay maginoo na, hindi pa bastos.
5. Sampu raw ang naging kasintahan niya dati. Dati siyang playboy.
Pero ikaw lamang ang babaeng nagpabago sa kanya.
PAGSASANAY
1. Sumuko na (daw, raw) ang mga lalakig kumidnap sa mga bata.
2. Lumikha (daw, raw) ng malaking isyu sa ginanap na patimpalak sa

kabilang baryo dahil sa niluto ng mga hurado ang laban.
3. Ayaw (daw, raw) makipagbalikan ni Maria kay Jose. Wala nang

mangyayaring balikan dahil sapat na ang ilang ulit na panloloko
ni Jose.

- 78 -
4. Bakit (daw, raw) tumigil siya sap ag-aaral?
5. Umuwi na naman (daw, raw) ng lasing si Mang Pedro dahil natalo

siya sa sugal.
6. Bagay (daw, raw) tayo para sa isa’t isa. Sa tingin mo, bagay ba
talaga tayo?
7. Nanalo (daw, raw) si Mang pepot sa nilakukang kompetisyon kayat

nag-uwi ng malaking papremyo.
8. Maghanda na kayo ng gamit niyo kasi magbabakasyon (daw, raw) tayo

sa probinsiya.
9. Mahal (daw, raw) mag-aral ng medesina sa mga unibersidad sa

Maynila kaya hindi ko na tinuloy, dahil saw ala akong mahanap na
programang iskolar.
10. Komunsulta (daw, raw) sa doctor si Mang Juan dahil sa nararamdaman

niyang pananakit sa kanyang tiyan.
11. Sabi ng lolo ko ako (daw, raw) ang paborito niyang apo.
12. Sa dinami-rami ng lumahok sa awdisyun tanging si Rose lamang

(daw, raw) ang may magandang tinig.
13. Ako na lamang (daw, raw) ang inaasahan ng aking mga kapatid
dahil sa nawalan na ng trabaho ang aking mga magulang dahil sa
pandemya.
14. Maraming magsasaka (daw, raw) ang nalugi dahil sa bagyong Ronnie,
sinira nito lahat ng mga pananim.
15. Kami (daw, raw) ay naka-iskedyul na magpabakuna para sa COVID-19

na bakuna bukas ng umaga sa sentrong pangkalusugan ng lungsod.
16. Magdala ka (daw, raw) ng ekstrang facemask sa pupuntahan mo para

may reserba ka kung sakaling masira o mapigtas ito.
17. Bilang lang (daw, raw) ang mga bisitang dadalo kaya huwag kayong
maghanda ng marami.
18. Huwag (daw, raw) basta-basta maniwala sa mga sabi-sabi.
19. Ang pag-aasawa ay hindi (daw, raw) parang kanin, na kapag napaso
ay iluluwa.
20. Sinisi (daw, raw) ni Risa ang knyang sarili sa pagkawala ng

kanyang inang may sakit.

- 79 -
DITO AT RITO
DITO - Ginagamit ang ang salitang "dito" kung ang sinusundang salita
ay nagtatapos sa katinig maliban sa w at y.
Halimbawa:
1. Tinapon dito ang mga sira nilang gamit kahapon.

2. Hindi ko alam na may iniwan dito si Marco kahapon.
3. Wala akong makitang anumang basag na pinggan dito sa kusina.
4. Tahol dito at tahol doon ang ginawa ng aso ni Melay kaninang
umaga.
5. Napadpad dito ang mga dayuhang naghanap ng mga pampalasa.
RITO - Ginagamit naman ang ang salitang "rito" kung ang sinusundang
salita ay nagtatapos sa patinig kasali na ang malapatinig na
w at y.
Halimbawa:
1. Ilagay mo rito ang bag sa ibabaw ng mesa.

2. Hinintay kita rito kagabi.
3. Wala rito ang taong hinahanap ninyo.
4. Bukod pa rito ay marami pang ibang pagkain ngayon.
5. Sinabi mo ba rito kay Jane na nakausap ko na ang tatay niya?
PAGSASANAY
1. Ipasa mo ang mga akda mong naisulat (dito, rito) sa amin.
2. Taga (dito, rito) ang mga kukumpuni ng mga sirang kable ng

kuryenten, kaya’t mapapadali ang paggawa nila
3. Pagdating niya (dito, rito) sa bahay pumasok siya agad sa kanyang

kwarto at nagdabog.
4. Marami raw residente (dito, rito) sa amin ang lumalabag sa

protocol na tinalaga ng aming local na pamahalaan.
5. Hanggang (dito, rito) nalang ang aking kayang itulong, sapagkat

ako’y kapos din.
6. Maraming bata ang hindi pa nababakunahan (dito, rito) sa amin

dahil sa pangamba sa magiging epekto nito sa katawan ng mga bata.
7. Magpasalamat nalang siya (dito, rito) siya napadpad.

- 80 -
8. Ang mga residente (dito, rito) ay napakagigiliw.
9. Maraming tao ang lumahok (dito, rito) sa ginaganap na presidential

rally na dinaluhan ng mga kandidato ng ibat ibang partido.
10. Sa pagpunta namin (dito, rito) sa Boracay, napatunayan kong

dinarayo talaga ng mga turista ang pinong puting buhangin at
napaka gandang isla.
11. Sinasabi nila na masasarap (dito, rito) ang mga pagkain kaya’t
pinuntahan naming.
12. Saking pananaw (dito, rito) sa katimugan ng ating bansa

matatagpuan ang mga magagandang tanawin at isla.
13. Kinagigiliwan (dito, rito) ang iba’t ibang uri ng hayop.
14. Sa aking pagsasaliksik (dito, rito) sa aking ulat sa klase, napag-

alaman ko na ang Pilipinas ay punong-puno ng likas na yaman.
15. Ang mga mangagawa (dito, rito) sa aming kumpanyan ay nasasahuran

ng maayos at may magandang benepisyo
16. Tignan natin (dito, rito) sa aklat kung may makukuha pa tayong
impormasyon.
17. Maraming talentado at magagaling umawit (dito, rito) sa ating

bans ana tinitingala sa ibang bansa, kaya’t ipinagmamalaki ko na
ako ay isang Pilipino.
18. Umabot hanggang (dito, rito) sa amin ang usok ng nasusunog na

bahay, dahil sa laki at lawak ng sunog milyon-milyong ari-arian
ang tinatayang halaga ng napinsala.
19. Pumalo na ng mahigit dalawang milyong kaso ang nagpopositibo sa

COVID-19 (dito, rito) sa ating bansa ayon sa tala ng Department
of Health.
20. Nagpunta (dito, rito) sa aming bayan ang mga politikong

kumakandidato sa darating na halalan upang ihayag ang kani-
kanilang plataporma tungkol sa pagpapa-unlad ng ating bansa.

- 81 -
KUNG AT KONG
KUNG - Ang “Kung” ay ginagamit na pangatnig sa mga sugnayna di makapag-
isa sa mga pangungusap na hugnayan gaya nang mapapansin sa mga
halimbawang pangungusap.
- Pangatnig ng panubali at ito’y karaniwang ginagamit sa
hugnayang pangungusap.
Halimbawa:
21. Kung siya’y narito, tayo’s magiging masaya.

22. Sumama ka sa kanila kung ibig mo.
23.Kung hindi umulan, marahil ay naparito ako.
24.Magugunaw ang aking mga pangarap sa buhay kung ako ay hindi
makapagtapos ng pag-aaral.
25.Hindi ka makabayan kung hindi mo kayang ialay ang iyong buhay
sa ating bayan.
KONG – Nanggaling sa panghalip na panaong “ko” at inangkupa lamang ng

salitang “ng”
Halimbawa:
1. Ang tangi kong pag-big saiyo ay hindi matutumbasan ng kahit anong

material na bagay.
2. Ang ina kong masarap magluto ay naghahanda ng pagkain para sa
aming salu-salo mamaya.
3. Mahirap man itong gawin, alam kong kakayanan ko ito para sa
pangarap ko.
4. Binilhan ako ng aking ama ng paborito kong laruan.
5. Nais kong kumuha ng kursong arkitekto pagdating ko sa kolehiyo
dahil ditto ako eksperto.
PAGSASANAY
1. Wala kang mararating sa buhay (kung, kong) hindi ka magsusumikap
mag-aral, dahil iyan ang magiging puhunan mo upang magtagumpay sa
buhay.
2. Napagdesisyunan (kung, kong) si Mark ang kakanta sa seremonya ng

aking kasal sa susunod na linggo.
3. Naku! Nakaka-panibago, mukhang tahimik ngayon ang aso (kung, kong)

maharot at mahilig maglaro sa putikan.

- 82 -
4. Ikaw ay magiging matapang (kung, kong) iinom ka ng tubig mula sa

bukal.
5. (Kung, Kong) ang pangungutya sa kapawa ay masama bakit mo pa ito

ginagawa?
6. Mas lalong sumasarap ang ginisang monggo (kung, kong) may sahog
itong bagnet at dahoon ng ampalaya.
7. Maingat na minaman-manan ang lugar (kung, kong) saan may namataang

terorista.
8. Higit (kung, kong) pinagmamalaki ang aking mga magulang dahil sa

sipag nila para sa aming pamilya.
9. (Kung, Kong) mahilig lang akong manood ng sine, sumama sana ako
sa kanila.
10. Alam (kung, kong) maiisip din niya ang mga kamalian niya.
11. Tinanong ako ng aking guro (kung, kong) bakit lumiban ako sa klase
kahapon.
12. Dahil alam (kung, kong) mamahalin din niya ako katulad ng
pagmamahal ko sakanya/
13. Ang mga bata ay nakapag-aaral ng mabuti (kung, kong) hindi

humahawak ng selpon at kompyuter.
14. Ang alam ko magiging kampante siya (kung, kong) malalaman niya
ang tunay mong kalagayan, kaya huwag kang mag-atubiling ipalam
ito sakanya.
15. Sobrang nakatatakot (kung, kong) magkatotoo ang napanaginipan mo.
16. Hindi niya alam (kung, kong) ano ang gusto ko.
17. Alam (kung, kong) makakaya mo iyan, magdasal lang tayo sa

panginoon, hindi niya tayo pababayaan.
18. Pinaghirapan (kung, kong) gawin ito para sa iyo.
19. Tanungin mo si Andy (kung, kong) ano ang gusto niyang regalo.
20. Hindi niya alam (kung, kong) ano ang mangayayari kaya kinakabahan
siya ng sobra.

- 83 -
WALISAN AT WALISIN
WALISAN – Isang pangngalan na may hulaping “an”
- Tumutuloy sa lugar o sa sahig na kinalalagyan ng mga kalat
o ikinalat.
Halimbawa:
1. Natapos ko nang walisan ang bakuran bago siya dumating.

2. Tumulong akong walisan ang aming eskwelahan bilang paghahanda sa
nalalapit na pasukan.
3. Biglang bumuhos ang ulan pagkatapos niyang walisan ang hardin.
4. Walisan ko nga aming aming chapel dahil maraming putik ang pumasok
pagkatapos ng bagyo.
5. Gusto niyang walisan ang mga kalat sa may kalsada, hindi kasi ito
kaaya-ayang tignan.
WALISIN – Isang pandiwa na may hulaping “in”

- Tumutukoy ito sa paglinis o pag-alis sa mga kalat na nasa
sahig o nasa bakuran.
Halimbawa:
1. Bago ka pumasok sa trabaho, walisin mo muna ang kalat sa salas.

2. Anak, walisin mo ang mga dahoon ma pumasok sa ating terasa.
3. Jason, nagkalat ka nanaman ng mga buhangin dito, walisin mo yan.
4. Puno na ng alikabok ang mga pigurin natin, kailangan na nating
linisin at walisin ang kinalalagyan nito.
5. Ang hirap walisin ang mga putik na dumikit sa ating baldosa,
kailangan ibabd muna sa tubig para lumambot.
PAGSASANAY
1. Naggupit siya ng mga plastik para sa kanyang proyekto pero ayaw
niyang (walisan, walisin) ang mga kumalat sa sahig.
2. (Walisan, Walisin) niyo nga ang mga dahon sa ilalim ng manga,

pagkatapos ay ilagay sa sako at gagawin nating pataba sa mga
halaman.
3. Gusto ng mga Sagguniang Kabataan na (walisan, walisin) ang

nasasakupang Barangay bilang paghikayat sa pagtaguyod ng
kalinisan.
4. Kailangan nilang (walisan, walisin) ang chapel bago magsimula

ang misa.

- 84 -
5. Ang gusto ko lang naman ay pulutin at (walisan, walisin) ang mga

kalat sa daan.
6. Kapag pumunta ka roon, tulungan mo ang iyong tiyo Robin na linisin

at (walisan, walisin) ang ating lumang bahay, sapagkay itoy atin
nang napabayaan.
7. Kaya kong (walisan, walisin) ang ating bakuran mag-isa.
8. Tulungan mo naman si Jino (walisan, walisin) ninyo ang ating

panaderya bago natin buksan.
9. Marami akong gagawin ngayon, pero (walisan, walisin) ko muna ang

aming garahe.
10. Hindi ko matiis ang mga buhangin na kinalat ng aking anak

(walisan, walisin) ko nalang muna bago ako magluto.
11. Inutusan ako ng aking inay na (walisan, walisin) ang mga alikabok
sa aking kwarto.
12. Mamang Dyanitor (walisan, walisin) mo nga ang natapon na ulam

ilalim ng lamesa ko, hindi ko sinasadyang mabitawan ito.
13. Kung gusto mong maging malinis ang paligid mo (walisan, walisin)
mo ito nang hindi kalang puro reklamo.
14. Sinabi ko naman sayo (walisan, walisin) mo ang kinalat ng kapatid

mo, pagkatapos maghugas ka na ng pinggan at tayo’y kakain na ng
tanghalian.
15. Alam ko naman na kaya mong (walisan, walisin) ang likod ng ating
bahay.
16. Hind naman sa pagmamayabang, kaya kong (walisan, walisin) ang

buong kalye ng Hacubo.
17. Ang sabi ko (walisan, walisin) mo ang pulbo na kinalat ng

pamangkin mo sa may beranda.
18. Akala ko ba ayaw mong (walisan, walisin) ang mga papel sa sahig.
19. Inay, ayaw kong maglaba, magdidilig na lamang ako ng mga halaman
at (walisan, walisin) ko ang tapat ng ating bahay.

- 85 -
NUMERICAL REASONING
I. DIVISIBILITY RULES
• Is a shorthand and useful way of determining whether a given

integer is divisible by a fixed divisor without performing the
division, usually by examining its digits.
B. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “2”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 2 if the last digit is
even (0, 2, 4, 6, or 8).
Example:
21. 123568 – It is divisible by 2 because the last digit, 8, is an

even number.
22. 276746 - It is divisible by 2 because the last digit, 6, is an
even number.
23. 26780 - It is divisible by 2 because the last digit, 0, is an
Even number.
C. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “3”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 3 if the sum of its
digits is divisible by 3.
Example:
1. 277647 – It is divisible by 3, because 2+7+7+6+4+7 = 33, which

is divisible by 3. (33 ÷ 3 = 11).
2. 60456 – It is divisible by 3, because 6+0+4+5+6 = 21, which
is divisible by 3. (21 ÷ 3 = 7).
3. 1989 - It is divisible by 3, because 1+9+8+9 = 27, which is
divisible by 3. (27 ÷ 3 = 9)
D. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “4”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 4 if the number formed
by the two last digits is divisible by 4.
Example:
1. 12488 – It is divisible by 4, because 88 is divisible by 4.

(88 ÷ 4 = 22).
2. 435856 - It is divisible by 4, because 56 is divisible by 4.
(56 ÷ 4 = 14).
3. 24232 - It is divisible by 4, because 32 is divisible by 4.
(32 ÷ 4 = 8).

- 86 -
E. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “5”
• An integer N is evenly divisible by 5 if ends in 5 or 0.
Example:
1. 20455 – It is divisible by 5, because the last digit is 5.
2. 5650 - It is divisible by 5, because the last digit is 0.
3. 674780 - It is divisible by 5, because the last digit is 0.
F. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “6”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 6 if it is divisible by
both 2 and 3.
Example:
1. 145926 – Divisible by 6, since it is divisible by both 2 and 3.
c. Divisible by 2 – 145,926, the last digit is even number.
d. Divisible by 3 – 1+4+5+9+2+6 = 27, (27 ÷ 3 = 9).
2. 158934 - Divisible by 6, since it is divisible by both 2 and 3.

a. Divisible by 2 – 158,934, the last digit is even number.
b. Divisible by 3 – 1+5+8+9+3+4 = 30, (30 ÷ 3 = 10).
3. 21762 - Divisible by 6, since it is divisible by both 2 and 3.

a. Divisible by 2 – 21,762, the last digit is even number.
b. Divisible by 3 – 2+1+7+6+2 = 18, (18 ÷ 3 = 6).
G. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “7”

after the following two steps is divisible by 7.
Example:
1. 345457 – It is divisible by 7, two steps are satisfied.

STEP 1 – Remove the last digit, then x2 (became 34545); 7x2 = 14
STEP 2 - Then, from the number remaining, subtract two times the
digit we just removed. (34545 – 14 = 34,531 ÷ 7 = 4,933).
2. 12334 - It is divisible by 7, two steps are satisfied.

STEP 1 - Remove the last digit, then x2. (became 1233); 4x2 = 8
digit we just removed. (1233 – 8 = 1225 ÷ 7 = 175).
3. 1225 - It is divisible by 7, two steps are satisfied.

STEP 1 - Remove the last digit, then x2. (became 122); 5x2 = 10
digit we just removed. (122 – 10 = 112 ÷ 7 = 16).

- 87 -
H. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “8”
by the last 3 digits is divisible by 8.
Example:
1. 221672 – It is divisible by 8, because 672 ÷ 8 is 84.

2. 129456 - It is divisible by 8, because 456 ÷ 8 is 57.
3. 327128 - It is divisible by 8, because 128 ÷ 8 is 16.
I. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “9”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 9 if the of its digits
is divisible by 9.
Example:
1. 256788 – It is divisible by 9, because 2+5+6+7+8+8 = 36, then,

(36 ÷ 9 = 4).
2. 785412 - It is divisible by 9, because 7+8+5+4+1+1 = 27, then,
(27 ÷ 9 = 3).
3. 312615 - It is divisible by 9, because 3+1+2+6+1+5 = 18, then,
(18 ÷ 9 = 2).
J. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “10”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 10 if numbers ends in 0.
Example:
1. 120560 - It is divisible by 10, since its last digit is 0.

K. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “11”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 11 if two digits number
are double, and
• For larger numbers, if the number formed after the following
three steps is divisible by 11 as follows:
Step 1: Find the sum of alternate digits,

Step 2: Find the sum of the remaining digits,
Step 3: Find the difference of these two sums

- 88 -
Example:
1. 623381 – It is divisible by 11, three steps are satisfied.
STEP 1 – Find the sum of alternate digits. (623381).
- It became 6+3+8 = 17
STEP 2 - Find the sum of the remaining digits. (623381).
- It became 2+3+1 = 6
STEP 3 - Find the difference of these two sums. (17-6 = 11).
2. 939191 - It is divisible by 11, three steps are satisfied.

- It became 9+9+9 = 27
- It became 3+1+1 = 5
3. 824252 - It is divisible by 11, three steps are satisfied.

- It became 8+4+5 = 17
- It became 2+2+2 = 6
L. DIVISIBLITY RULE OF “12”

• An integer N is evenly divisible by 12 if it is divisible by
both 3 and 4.
Example:
1. 262776 – It is divisible by 12, because divisibility of 3 and 4
are both satisfied.
c. Divisible by 3 – 2+6+2+7+7+6 = 30; (30 ÷ 3 = 10).
d. Divisible by 4 – 262776; (76 ÷ 4 = 19).
2. 245124 - It is divisible by 12, because divisibility of 3 and 4

are both satisfied.
c. Divisible by 3 – 2+4+5+1+2+4 = 18; (18 ÷ 3 = 6).
d. Divisible by 4 – 245124; (24 ÷ 4 = 6).
3. 778212 - It is divisible by 12, because divisibility of 3 and 4

are both satisfied.
e. Divisible by 3 – 7+7+8+2+1+8 = 27; (27 ÷ 3 = 9).
f. Divisible by 4 – 778212; (12 ÷ 4 = 3).

- 89 -
EXERCISES:
1. Does 234 is divisible by 3 or not?
a. Yes c. Undetermined
b. No d. Sometimes
2. Which of the given numbers is/are divisible by 2, 5 and 10?

a. 235 c. 342
b. 352 d. 400
3. If a box has 46 chocolates, can all the chocolates be equally

distributed among 4 children?
b. No d. Sometimes
4. If a number is divisible by both 2 and 3, then only it is

considered as divisible by 6.
a. True c. Maybe
b. False d. None of the above
5. Every number ending with 0 and 5 is divisible by 10.

a. True c. Maybe
6. A farmer wants to plant 815 crops in the field. Can he plant them
in rows having 7 plants each without any plants left?
a. Yes c. Maybe
b. No d. None of the above
7. Check if 220 is divisible by the following numbers.

a. 3 c. 7
b. 6 d. 2
8. Fill the blank with the largest possible digit that makes the
given number divisible by 8?
1__6
a. 2 c. 7
b. 3 d. 9
9. An integer 125150 is divisible by what number from the

divisibility rule?
a. 3 c. 10
b. 5 d. 5 & 10

- 90 -
10. Among the given choices below, which number is divisible by 8?
a. 125762 c. 123426
b. 342584 d. 211254
11. Define the divisibility rule of the integer 26184?
a. 7 c. 11
b. 9 d. 12
12. Which of the following choices satisfied the three steps in

divisibility rule of 11?
a. 125723 c. 724482
b. 679251 d. 205066
13. An integer N is evenly divisible by ____ if it is divisible by

both 2 and 3.
a. 3 c. 4
b. 6 d. 9
14. An integer N is evenly divisible by 12 if it is divisible by

both 3 and 4.
b. No d. Sometimes
15. Check the divisibility of 782 by the following numbers.
a. 4 c. 7
b. 3 d. None of the above
16. Fill the blank with the smallest possible digit that makes the
given number divisible by 9?
4352_64
a. 3 c. 6
b. 4 d. 7
17. Which number is divisible by 5?

a. 23389 c. 23604
b. 23252 d. 23435

- 91 -
18. Find the least possible value of the blank so that the number
becomes divisible by 11.
1234_7
a. 6 c. 8
b. 7 d. 9
a. 2339 c. 2360
b. 2325 d. 2343
a. 2640 c. 2420
b. 2930 d. 2210
21. There are 80 students in a class. Can the teacher make them sit
in rows of having 6 students in each row?
b. No d. Sometimes
22. An integer N is evenly divisible by ______ if its digits is

divisible by 9.
a. 6 c. 8
b. 7 d. 9
23. A number is divisible by 6 if its last digit is an even number

or zero and the sum of the digits is a multiple of 3.
b. No d. Sometimes
24. Which of the following digits is divisible by 6?
a. 19000 c. 43938
b. 58724 d. 846316
25. The number 394683 is divisible by 9.
a. True c. Maybe

- 92 -
II. ORDER OF OPERATION (P.E.M.D.A.S)
• is an acronym used to mention the order of operations to be

followed while solving expressions having multiple operation.
Easy and simple way to remember PEMDAS rule

Step 1: Parenthesis, solve all problems in parenthesis FIRST.
Step 2: Exponents, next solve any numbers that have exponents.
Step 3: Multiply or Divide, then solve any multiplication or division
problems (going from left to right).
Step 4: Add or Subtract, finally solve any addition or subtraction
problems (going from left to right).
Examples:
1. 225 ÷ 15 + 14 × 5 – 128 ÷ 16 + 25 5. 8 × 3 + 70 ÷ 7 – 7
STEP 1: 15 + 70 – 8 + 25 STEP 1: 24 + 70 ÷ 7 - 7
STEP 2: 85 – 8 + 25 STEP 2: 24 + 10 - 7
STEP 3: 102 STEP 3: 27
2. 4 – 3 [4 –2 (6 – 3)] ÷ 2 6. 14 + 6 × 9 ÷ 3 - 8
STEP 1: 4 – 3[4 – 2(3)] ÷ 2 STEP 1: 14 + 54 ÷ 3 - 8

STEP 2: 4 – 3[4 – 6] ÷ 2 STEP 2: 14 + 18 - 8
STEP 3: 4 – 3[–2] ÷ 2 STEP 3: 32 - 8
STEP 4: 4 + 6 ÷ 2 STEP 4: 24
STEP 5: 4 + 3
STEP 6: 7
3. 18 ÷ 6 × (4 - 3) + 6 7. 2 × 4 + 28 ÷ 4 - 6
STEP 1: 18 ÷ 6 × 1 + 6 STEP 1: 8 + 28 ÷ 4 - 6
STEP 2: 3 × 1 + 6 STEP 2: 8 + 7 - 6
STEP 3: 3 + 6 STEP 3: 15 - 6
STEP 4: 9 STEP 4: 9
4. 4 × 5 + (14 + 8) - 36 ÷ 9 8. 6 × 5 + 42 ÷ 6 - 7
STEP 1: 4 × 5 + 22 - 36 ÷ 9 STEP 1: 30 + 42 ÷ 6 - 7
STEP 2: 20 + 22 - 36 ÷ 9 STEP 2: 30 + 7 - 7
STEP 3: 20 + 22 – 4 STEP 3: 37 - 7
STEP 4: 42 – 4 STEP 4: 30
STEP 5: 38

- 93 -
EXERCISES:
1. 21 ÷ 3 + (3 × 9) × 9 + 5 10. 7 × 7 – 5 × 5 + (-10)
a. 255 c. 257 a. 14 c. -14

b. 256 d. 258 b. 64 d. 34
2. 8 + 16 ÷ 4 × 5 – 3 11. 72 – 3 × 3
a. 31 c. 77 a. 37 c. 35
b. 25 d. 27 b. 45 d. 39
3. 3 [(7-5)2 + (20-19)2 ] + 14 12. (12 ÷ 3) + 3 + (16-7) × 4
a. 3 c. 29 a. 43 c. 35
b. 57 d. 1 b. 19 d. 29
4. 3 × {(300-70÷5) - [3×23-(8–2×3)]} 13. (11-8) × 3 + 7 + 27 - 3
a. 2433 c. 607 a. 26 c. 59
b. 657 d. -843 b. 40 d. 68
5. 4 [3 + 7(92)] 14. 5 × 2 + (12 + 6) – 28 ÷ 4
a. 2,280 c. 69,696 a. -16 c. 21

b. 15,888 d. 17,427 b. 27 d. -12
6. [2 ÷ (4-2) + 82 ] - [2-(-1)]2 15. 289 - (3 × 5)2
a. 62 c. 60 a. -64 c. 56
b. 68 d. 64 b. 64 d. -56
7. 80 ÷ (-8) – 18 16. 8 + (2 × 5) × 34 ÷ 9
a. 28 c. -28 a. 78 c. 86
b. 8 d. -8 b. 88 d. 98
8. 8 (-6) - (-3) 17. 15 × 122 + 150
a. -24 c. -51 a. 2,315 c. 2,310

b. -45 d. -72 b. 1,560 d. 2,210
9. -12 + 20 ÷ (-2) 18. 9 × (5 + 3)2 – 144
a. -22 c. -4 a. 432 c. 234

b. 4 d. 22 b. -232 d. -423

- 94 -
19. 12 ÷ (1 + 3) – 9 × 6 28. 4 × (92 ÷ 6 × 5)
a. -27 c. 27 a. 234 c. 250
b. -51 d. 51 b. 245 d. 270
20. 36 + 10 × 0.5 – 18 ÷ 6 29. (22 × 4 × 3)
a. 40 c. 48 a. 34 c. 44
b. 38 d. 36 b. 39 d. 48
21. (1 + 3)2 – 2 (4 − 7) 30. (5 × 82) + 9
a. 16 c. 22 a. 325 c. 334
b. 4 d. 10 b. 329 d. 336
22. 9 × 8 + 4 – 2 ÷ (4 − 2) 31. 5 – (3 – 3) + 63 ÷ 1
a. 75 c. 74 a. 221 c. 223
b. 37 d. 53 b. 217 d. 224
23. 3 - (23 ÷ 1) + 5 32. (12 × 7) × (82 - 8) × 1
a. 5 c. 7 a. 390 c. 392
b. 10 d. 0 b. 391 d. 393
24. (5 + 72) ÷ 7 × 7 33. (32 × 3 + 4 + 2) - 1

a. 50 c. 54 a. 32 c. 34
b. 52 d. 56 b. -32 d. -34
25. (7 + 8 – 42) × 2 + 1 + 14 34. (6 – 52) + 33 × 2 + 19

a. 15 c. 25 a. 54 c. 58
b. 20 d. 30 b. 56 d. 60
26. 6 × (2 ÷ 1) ÷ 1 35. 4 × (5 × 5) + (4 – 3)
a. -12 c. 14 a. 50 c. 150
b. 12 d. -14 b. 101 d. 200
27. (3 × 6) – 5 36. (6 ÷ 6) × (2 + 8) ÷ 1 (4)
a. 11 c. 16 a. 35 c. 38
b. 13 d. 17 b. 37 d. 40

- 95 -
III. FRACTION, PERCENT, & DECIMAL CONVERSION
• FRACTION - Represents a part of a whole or, more generally,

any number of equal parts.
• PERCENT - Is a number or ratio expressed as a fraction of
100.
• DECIMAL - Is the standard system for denoting integer and
non-integer numbers.
EXAMPLE:
A. FRACTION TO PERCENT PERCENT TO FRACTION
* Multiply the numerator *Divide it by 100, then convert

by 100, then divide it. it to lowest term.
5 500 25 1
1. → = 62.5% 1. 25% → or
8 8 100 4
3 300 62 31
2. 9 → = 33.33% 2. 62% → or
9 100 50
11 110 125 1
3. 5 → = 22% 3. 12.5% → or
5 1000 8
B. DECIMAL TO FRACTION
5.2
1. 5.2 → * Rewrite the decimal number as a
1
fraction with 1 in the denominator
5.2 10 52
→ x = * Multiply to remove 1 decimal place
1 10 10
then, multiply them both by 10.
52 ÷ 2 26
→ = * Find the GCF of 52 & 10 reduce the
10 ÷ 2 5
fraction by dividing both numerator
and denominator by GCF = 2.
1 26 1
→ 5 * Simplify to become 5 .
5 5 5

- 96 -
10.50
1
10.50 105
→ x * Multiply to remove 1 decimal place
1 10
105 ÷ 5 21
→ = * Find the GCF of 105 & 10, reduce
10 ÷ 5 2
the fraction by dividing both
numerator and denominator by GCF 5
1 21 1
→ 10 2 * Divide to become 10 .
2 2
12.45
1
12.45 100
→ x * Multiply to remove 2 decimalplaces
1 100
1245 ÷ 5 249
→ = * Find the GCF of 1245 & 100,
100÷ 5 20
reduce the fraction by dividing
both numerator and denominator by
GCF = 5
9 249 9
→ 12 * Divide to become 12 .
20 20 20
FRACTION TO DECIMAL
* Just divide the numerator and denominator.
8
26. → 8 ÷ 12 = 0.667
12
5
27. → 5 ÷ 10 = 0.625
10
12
28. → 12 ÷ 28 = 0.429
28

- 97 -
C. PERCENT TO DECIMAL DECIMAL TO PERCENT
* Just divide the given number * Just multiply the given

in percent by 100. number in decimal by 100.
29
1. 29% → = 0.29 1. 0.567 → 0.567 x 100 = 56.7%
100
58.5
2. 58.5% → = 0.585 2. 0.25 → 0.25 x 100 = 25%
100
74.2
3. 74.2% → = 0.742 3. 0.394 → 0.394 x 100 = 39.4%
100
EXERCISES:
1. Convert 24.78% in decimal form.
2. 0.987 is what percent if you convert?
12
3. What is in percent form?
15
4. 6.35% is what number in fraction?
5. Express 18.5% to fraction.
6. Convert 0.17 to fraction.
6
7. in percent is?
18
25
8. What is the percentage form of ?
33
9. Convert 4.32 in fraction.
2
10. Express 6 4 in decimal form.
11. What decimal form would be if 52.50% is converted?
12. 243.72 is a decimal form of what fraction?
13. 47.20% is a percent form of what fraction?

- 98 -
4
14. The fraction 3 7 is the same as what percent?
15. The decimal 452.40 is the same as what fraction?
16. Express 0.4523 in percent form.
9
17. is a fraction form of what decimal number?
27
18. Convert 29% to fraction.
19. What is 0.358 in percent?
20. 21.78 is a decimal form of what fraction?
21. What is the fraction form of 0.754?
22. 38.90% is ______ in decimal form.
7
23. The fraction is the conversion of what percent?
26
24. Convert 788.90 into fraction.
45
25. Express in decimal form.
10
26. 22.59% is the same as what number in decimal form?
27. What specific number in fraction when we convert 15.20%?
28. What is 0.785 in percent?
29. The number 854.12 is a decimal form of what fraction?
30. Convert the number 0.1278 into percent form.
24
31. is the fraction form of what decimal number?
48
6
32. The fraction is the same as what decimal number?
19
7
33. What number in percent form if we convert ?
18

- 99 -
IV. RULES OF EXPONENT
• A symbol written above and to the right of a mathematical

expression to indicate the operation of raising to a power.
BASE EXPONENT
The number or variable that
is being multiplied repeatedly X2 The value that specifies
how many times the base
in the expanded form. will be multiplied by
itself.
RULE NAME RULE EXAMPLE

1. PRODUCT RULES an. am = an+m 44. 42 = 44+2 = 128
an ⋅ bn = (a⋅ b)n 32 ⋅ 42 = (3⋅4)2 = 144
2. QUOTIENT RULES an / am = a n-m 45 / 43 = 45-3 = 16

an / bn = (a/b)n 94 / 34 = (9/3)4 = 81
3. POWER RULES (bn)m = bn⋅m (32)3 = 32⋅3 = 729

2 2
bnm = b(nm) 23 = 2(3 )= 512
m√(bn) = b n/m 2√(26) = 26/2 = 8
b1/n = n√b 81/3 = 3
√8 = 2
4. NEGATIVE EXPONENTS b-n = 1 / bn 2-3 = 1/23 = 0.125
5. ZERO RULES b0 = 1 50 = 1
0n = 0, for n > 0 05 = 0
6. ONE RULES b1 = b 51 = 5
1n = 1 15 = 1
7. MINUS ONE RULE (-1)5 = -1

- 100 -
EXERCISES:
23. 𝑥 6 . 𝑥 12 . 𝑥 16. 80
24. 𝑥 −3 17. (2𝑓𝑔4 )4 (𝑓𝑔)6
2𝑥 𝑥 −1
25. ( )3 18.
3𝑦 2 𝑥 −8
52𝑥 6
26. −4𝑥 5 𝑦 −2 19.
13𝑥 −7
27. (7𝑎 3 𝑏 −1 )0 20. 𝑦 −7
28. (6𝑥 3 )2 21. (𝑥 2 𝑦)(𝑥 3 𝑦 4 )
2𝑥 4 𝑦 −4
29. 22. (2𝑥 3 𝑦 −3 )-2
8𝑥 7 𝑦3
−2𝑎 3 𝑏 2𝑐 0 -2
4 2
30. (2𝑐𝑑 ) (𝑐𝑑) 5
23. ( )
3𝑎2 𝑏 3 𝑐 7
1
31. 24. 𝑥9 . 𝑥 −7
𝑥 −5
32. (j−13 )(j4 )(j6 ) 25. 5𝑥 2 𝑦(2𝑥 4 𝑦 3 )
𝑥2 𝑦5
33. 26. (4𝑥 4 𝑦 −4 )3
𝑥𝑦 4
34. (8𝑏 4 𝑎−2 )0 27. 𝑥 −6
𝑎 −2 𝑏3 1
35. 28.
𝑐 −4 𝑑−1 2−4
−7𝑎2𝑏 3𝑐 0 -4
36. ( ) 29. (−3)2 .
3𝑎3 𝑏4𝑐 3
37. 4𝑥 3 . 2𝑥 3 30. −32

- 101 -
V. FRACTION OPERATIONS
• In Mathematics, fractions are represented as a numerical value,

can be defined as the parts of a whole. A fraction can be a
portion or section of any quantity out of a whole, where, the
whole can be any number, a specific value, or a thing.
TYPES OF FRACTIONS
PROPER FRACTION
• Proper fractions re the fractions in which the numerator is
less than its denominator. It is often smaller than the whole.
5 6 15 17
Example: , . ,
9 10 16 19
IMPROPER FRACTION
• An Improper fraction is the type of fraction in which the
numerator is more than or equal to its denominator. It is
always the same or greater than the whole.
6 10 23 22
Example: , , ,
4 3 11 9
UNIT FRACTION
• Fractions with numerator as 1 are known as unit fractions.
1 1 1 1
Example: , , ,
2 4 5 8
MIXED FRACTION
• A mixed fraction is a mixture of a whole and a proper
fraction.
1 4 7 9
Example: 5 , 33 , 129 , 1612
2
LIKE FRACTION and UNLIKE FRACTION

• Like fractions are the fractions that have the same
denominators.
• Unlike fractions are the fractions which have different
denominators.
3 5 2 6
Example of like: and Example of Unlike: and
15 15 7 8

- 102 -
ADDING FRACTIONS
Example of Adding like fraction (the same denominator).
5 2 5+2 7 2 3 2+3 5
1. + = = 3. + = =
8 8 8 8 6 6 6 6
6 4 6+4 10 9 8 9+8 17
2. + = = 4. + = =
14 14 14 14 19 19 19 19
Step 1: Make sure both denominators given are the same.

Step 2: Just add the numerators, then copy the denominator.
Step 3: Simplify the fraction (if possible).
Example of Adding Unlike fraction (different denominator).
3 4 15+16 31 11 5 6 35+60 95 5
1. + = = or 1 3. + = = or 1 14
4 5 20 20 20 10 7 70 20
8 3 16+9 25 7 6 2 6+6 12 1
2. + = = or 1 4. + = = or 1
9 6 18 18 18 9 3 9 9 3
Step 1: Find the LCD of the given fraction.

Step 2: Multiply both the numerator and denominator of each fraction
by the number that makes its denominator equal the LCD.
Step 3: If the two fractions have like denominators, you can now add
the numerators and copy the LCD.
Example of Adding mixed fraction.

3 3 7 20 14+20 34 1
1. 1 + 2 8 --- improper fraction ---> + = = or 4
4 4 8 8 8 4
4 3 20 9 60+36 96
2. 2 + 1 6 --- improper fraction ---> + = = or 4
8 8 6 24 24
Step 1: First we need to convert the fraction into improper fraction,

multiply the whole number and its denominator, then, add the
result to the numerator.
Step 2: If denominators are the same, just add the numerator and copy
the denominator, but if not the same, get the LCD.
Step 4: If the two fractions now have like denominators, you can add

- 103 -
SUBTRACTING FRACTIONS
Example of Subtracting like fraction (the same denominator).
6 3 6−3 3 6 4 6−4 2
6. - = = 3. - = =
7 7 7 7 9 9 9 9
15 13 15−13 2 1 15 10 15−10 5 1
7. - = = or 4. - = = or
18 18 18 18 9 20 20 20 20 4
Step 1: Make sure both denominators given are the same.

Step 2: Just subtract the numerators, then copy the denominator.
Example of Subtracting Unlike fraction (different denominator).
5 1 35−8 27 13 3 13−9 4 2
1. – = = 3. - = = or
8 7 56 56 6 2 6 6 3
7 3 49−12 37 9 10 6 20−6 14 7
2. - = = or 1 4. - = = or
4 7 28 28 28 12 24 24 24 12
Step 1: Find the LCD of the given fraction.

Step 3: If the two fractions have like denominators, you can now
subtract the numerators and copy the LCD.
Example of Subtracting Mixed fraction.

1 2 25 14 25−14 11 2
1. 8 - 43 improper fraction ---> - = = or 3
3 3 3 3 3 3
8 4 71 19 355−171 184 4
2. 7 - 35 improper fraction --> - = = or 4
9 9 5 45 45 45
Step 1: First we need to convert the fraction into improper fraction,

multiply the whole number and its denominator, then, add the
result to the numerator.
Step 2: If denominators are the same, just add the numerator and copy
the denominator, but if not the same, get the LCD.
Step 4: If the two fractions now have like denominators, you can add

- 104 -
MULTIPLYING FRACTIONS
Example:
2 6 2×6 12 1
1. × = = or
5 7 5×7 35 6
3 1 7 5 7×5 35 3
2. 1 × 22 → × = = or 4
4 4 2 4×2 8 8
4 5 31 5 31 × 5 155 47
3. 3 × → × = = or 2
9 6 9 6 9×6 54 54
2 5 20 5 × 20 100 1
4. 5 × 2 → × = = or 11
9 1 9 1×9 9 9
Step 1: If fractions are in mixed number, convert it to improper

fraction before solving, if not, proceed solving.
Step 2: After converting, first, multiply the numerators from each
fraction by each other.
Step 3: Second, multiply the denominators from each fraction by each
Other, then,
Step 4: Simplify or reduce the answer.
DIVIDING FRACTIONS
Example:
9 1 9 13 9 × 13 117 7
1. ÷ → × = = or 11
10 13 10 1 10 × 1 10 10
5 2 17 24 17 11 17 × 11 187
2. 1
12
÷ 2 11 → 12
÷ 11
→ 12
÷ 24
= 12 × 24
= 288
3 2 27 2 27 8 27 × 8 216
3. 4 ÷ → ÷ → × = = or 18
6 8 6 8 6 2 6 ×2 12
1 3 17 3 8 24 7
4. 3 ÷ 2 → ÷ → ÷ = or 1
8 1 8 1 17 17 17
Step 1: If fractions are in mixed number, convert it to improper
fraction before solving, if not, just proceed solving.
Step 2: Take the reciprocal of the divisor, then,
Step 3: Multiply the numerators from each fraction by each other.
Step 4: Multiply the denominators from each fraction by each
Other, then,
Step 5: Simplify or reduce the answer.

- 105 -
EXERCISES:
6 60 7 9 9 1
1. + + a. 1 b. c. 1 d. 100
10 100 10 10 100 100
4 2 15 8 3 5
2. × a. b. c. d.
5 3 8 15 15 8
9 4 8 7 8 7
3. 3 - 18 a. 2 b. 2 c. 2 d. 2
11 11 11 22 22
1
4. 5 ÷ a. 25 b. 30 c. 35 d. 40
7
1 2 1 2 2 1 4
5. 8 ÷ 2 ÷ 1 a. b. 1 c. 2 d.
5 3 2 20 20 20 20
6 1 7 7 7 7
6. 5 × 2 a. 12 b. c. 1 d. 10
8 8 32 32 32 32
5 4 20 9 20 9
7. + a. b. c. d.
11 11 11 11 22 22
24 16 2 1 6 1 1
8. - - a. b. c. d.
30 30 30 30 30 10 5
3 2 2 5 2 5
9. 8 × 23 a. 22 b. 22 c. 22 d. 22
6 6 6 3 3
7 8 9 3 3 1 1
10. + + a. 1 5 b. 2 5 c. 1 5 d. 2 5
15 15 15
5 9
11. 24 ÷ ÷ a. 54 b. 64 c. 74 d. 84
10 12
16 10 3 3 3 3
12. - a. b. c. d.
20 20 10 20 5 15
3 4 3 4 1 1
13. 10 + 6 + a. 17
4
b. 17
5
c. 17
5
d. 17
4
4 8
2 3 1 2 3 3 5
14. × × a. b. c. d.
5 5 4 20 30 50 20
1 5 6 7 8 5
15. 3 + 38 a. 6 8 b. 6 8 c. 6 d. 6 9
4 9
9 3 3 4 1 1
16. 9 + 2 a. 12
4
b. 14
5
c. 14
4
d. 12
2
10 5

- 106 -
13 4 13 14 17 18
17. × a. b. c. d.
18 18 81 78 18 91
6 5 8
18. 21 9 ÷ ÷ 9 a. 37 b. 38 c. 39 d. 40
8
1 1 1
19. 52 × 53 × 54 a. 148 b. 150 c. 152 d. 154
2 4 3 7 9 8 7
20. 5 + 2 10 + a. 6 9 b. 7 10 c. 6 d. 7 9
8 12 10
9 5 4 6 5 14
21. - a. b. c. d.
15 15 15 30 15 30
6 3 8 9 8 9
22. 8
10
- a. 8
10
b. 8
10
c. 8 d. 8
20
20 20
14 18 17 17 19 19
23. + a. 2 25 b. 1 25 c. 1 d. 2 25
25 25 25
11 5 1 1 2 2
24. ÷ a. 1 b. 2 5 c. 1 d. 2
16 16 5 5 5
2 2 4 13 14 8 9
25. 10 - 33 - 27 a. 3 14 b. 4 15 c. 2 d. 6 12
12 10
1 1 3 2 2 5
26. 12 × 22 a. 3 4 b. 4 4 c. 2 5 d. 1 4
1 8 7 9 6 7
27. 4 + a. 4 10 b. 4 10 c. 5 d. 5 18
2 9 18
3 4 4 3 2 2
28. 7 + 25 a. 12
5
b. 14
4
c. 10
5
d. 11
3
5
5 6 4 3 6 6
29. 9 × 18 × a. 8 5 b. 9 4 c. 9 d. 8 8
9 4
2 1
30. 7 - 43 a. 3 b. 8 c. 5 d. 6
6
3 3 1 2 1 2
31. 3 - 17 a. 2 14 b. 2 13 c. 2 d. 2 14
6 13
3 1 2 5 2 7 8
32. 15 9 ÷ 3 ÷ 1 a. 2 9 b. 4 24 c. 3 d. 5 14
5 4 36
7 4 37 49 45 49
33. 13 - 3 8 - a. 8 49 b. 9 64 c. 7 d. 8 72
9 56

- 107 -
VI. RADICALS → 𝒏√𝒙
• Used to indicate a root is called a radical and is therefore

read "x radical n," or "the nth root of x." In the radical
symbol, the horizontal line is called the vinculum, the
quantity under the vinculum is called the radicand, and the
quantity n written to the left is called the index.
ADDING and SUBTRACTING RADICAL EXPRESSIONS

STEP 1: Simplify the radicals.
STEP 2: Combine like radicals.
Example #1: 2√20𝑥 + 3√5𝑥

STEP 1: SIMPLIFY THE RADICALS
1st radical 2nd radical

2√20𝑥 3√5𝑥 → already in simplest form
2√(4)(5𝑥 )
2√4√5𝑥 STEP 2: COMBINE LIKE RADICALS

2(2)√5𝑥 4√5𝑥+ 3√5𝑥 = 7√5𝑥 Final answer
4√5𝑥
Example #2: 5√13 - 3√13

5√13 → already in 3√13 → already in simplest form

simplest form
STEP 2: COMBINE LIKE RADICALS
5√13 - 3√13 = 2√13 Final answer

- 108 -
3
Example #3: √3𝑏 3 - 3𝑏3 √24 + 23 √81𝑏3
1st radical 2nd radical 3rd radical

3
√3𝑏 3 3𝑏3 √24 23 √81𝑏3
𝑏3 √3 3𝑏3 √(8)(3) 23 √(27𝑏3 )(3)

3
3𝑏3 √83 √3 23 √27𝑏 3 √3
6𝑏3 √3 2(3𝑏)3 √3
𝑏 3 √3
𝑏3 √3 - 6𝑏3 √3 + 6𝑏3 √3 = 𝑏3 √3 Final answer
𝟑
Example #4: 23 √40 + √135

𝟑
23 √40 √135
𝟑
23 √8 . 5 √27 . 5
3
23 √(2)3 . 5 √(3)3 . 5
3 3 3
23 √(2)3 .√5 √(3)3 . √5
3 3
2 . 2 . √5 3 . √5
3 3
4 √5 3 √5

3 3 3
4 √5 + 3 √5 = 7 √5 Final answer

- 109 -
MULTIPLYING RADICAL EXPRESSION
STEP 1: Remember the product raised to a power rule.
STEP 2: Simplify the radical before multiplying.
Example #1: √2 . √6 Example #3: −23 √5𝑥 . 33 √25𝑥 2
√2 . √6 = √2 . 6 −23 √5𝑥 . 33 √25𝑥 2 = −63 √125𝑥 3

= √12 = −63 √53 𝑥 3
= √23 . 3 = −6 . 5𝑥
= 2√3 −30 𝑥
Example #2: 2√3 . 5√2 Example #4: 4√3 (2√3 − 3√6)
2√3 . 5√2 = 2 . 5 . √3 . √2 4√3 (2√3 − 3√6)

= 10 . √6 = 4√3 . 2√3 − 4√3 . 3√6
= 10√6 = 8√9 − 12√18
= 8√9 − 12√9 . 2
= 8 . 3 - 12 . 3√2 = 24 − 36√2
DIVIDING RADICAL EXPRESSION

STEP 1: Ensure that the index of each radical is the same and that
the denominator is not zero.
STEP 2: Convert the expression to one radical.
STEP 3: Simplify where possible.
STEP 4: Rationalize the denominator, if necessary.
3
√𝟑𝟐 √128
Example #1: Example #3: 3
√𝟐 √2
3
√𝟑𝟐 √128 3 128
→ √16 = 4 3 → √
2
3
= √64
√𝟐 √2
3
= √26
𝟑
√𝟓𝟒𝒙𝟓
Example #2: 𝟑 = 3√(22 )3
√𝟐𝒙𝟐
𝟑
√𝟓𝟒𝒙𝟓 𝟑 𝟓
𝟑 → √𝟓𝟒𝒙𝟐 = 22 → 4
√𝟐𝒙𝟐 𝟐𝒙
𝟑 54 𝑥 5 3 3 3
= √ = √27𝑥 5−2 = √27 √𝑥 3
2 𝑥2
= 3𝑥

- 110 -
EXERCISES:
1. −5√3 - 3√3 a. −5√3 b. −3√5 c. −8√3 d. −3√8
2. −3√5 + 2√5 a. √−3 b. √−5 c. √−2 d. √−6
3 3 3 3 3 3
3. √3 . √−20 a. − √40 b. − √50 c. − √60 d. − √70
5√ 8 4 5 5 4
4. a. b. c. d.
4√18 6 6 8 8
5. 2√8 - √8 a. −2√−2 b. −2√2 c. 2√−2 d. 2√2
3 3
6. √3 . √9 a. 3 b. 6 c. 7 d. 9
√6 √2 √3 √4 √8
7. a. b. c. d.
4√ 8 2 8 2 3
8. (7 + √6) (1 + √6) a. 3 + 8√6 b. 1 + 8√6 c. 2 + 8√6 d. 13 + 8√6
9. √6 . √2 a. 3√2 b. 6√3 c. 2√3 d. 2√2
3√ 3 2 3 4 5
10. a. b. c. d.
√12 1 2 2 2
√75
11. a. 1 b. 2 c. 3 d. 4
5√ 3
12. −4√6 - √6 a. −3√−6 b. 5√6 c. 3√6 d. −5√6
13. √5 . √3 a. √2 b. √8 c. √6 d. √15
2√5𝑥𝑧 3 𝑧 2𝑥 2𝑧 3𝑧
14. a. b. c. d.
√80𝑥 3 𝑧 2𝑥 𝑧 2𝑥 2𝑥
3√50𝑥 3𝑦 5
15. a. 10𝑥𝑦 2 b. 15𝑥𝑦 2 c. 20𝑥𝑦 2 d. 25𝑥𝑦 2
√2𝑥𝑦
16. √3 (2√3 + √5) a. 6 + √15 b. 3 + √9 c. 3 + √3 d. 6 + √9
17. 3√4 + 2√4 a. 5 b. 10 c. 15 d. 20

- 111 -
VII. ROUNDING OFF NUMBERS
• Rounding means making a number simpler but keeping its value

close to what it was.
• Rounding Numbers means adjusting the digits of a number in
such a way that it gives an approximate value. This value is
an easier representation of the given number.
Whole Number Decimal
Rounding Whole Numbers

• If the number you are rounding is followed by 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9,
round the number up, but if it’s followed by 0, 1, 2, 3, or 4,
round the number down.
Round to the nearest Ones Round to the nearest Thousands
Example: Example:
1. 41.92 → 42 1. 22,790.60 → 23,000
2. 238.46 → 238 2. 54,123.45 → 54,000
3. 4,564.643 → 4,565 3. 123,115 → 123,000
Round to the nearest Tens Round to the nearest Ten Thousand
Example: Example:
1. 25.76 → 30 1. 333,456.80 → 330,000
2. 756.43 → 760 2. 678,932.43 → 680,000
3. 8,754.234 → 8,750 3. 126,657.90 → 130,000
Round to the nearest Hundreds Round to the nearest Hundred

Thousand
Example: Example:
1. 135.44 → 100 1. 980,423.21 → 1,000,000
2. 3,656.68 → 3,700 2. 378,211.30 → 400,000
3. 45,779.12 → 45,800 3. 821,331.57 → 800,000

- 112 -
Rounding Decimals
• Consists of rounding a decimal number to a certain number of
decimal places
Round to the nearest Tenths Round to the nearest

Ten Thousandths
Example: Example:
1. 21.34 → 21.3 1. 1.67832 → 1.6783
2. 101.45 → 101.5 2. 3.45387 → 3.4539
3. 65.18 → 65.2 3. 2.23698 → 2.2370
Round to the nearest Hundredths Round to the nearest

Hundred Thousandths
Example: Example:
1. 123.458 → 123.46 1. 26.567324 → 26.56732
2. 674.907 → 674.91 2. 12.345620 → 12.34562
3. 564.241 → 564.24 3. 25.345898 → 25.34590
Round to the nearest Thousandths
Example:
1. 45.7864 → 45.786
2. 168.5685 → 168.569
3. 16.5643 → 16.564
EXERCISES:
1. Round 34.90 to the nearest whole number (Ones).
b. 34 c. 30
c. 35 d. 31
2. What number will be when 127.893 is rounded to the nearest Tens?
a. 130 c. 127.9
b. 128 d. 128.8
3. The digits 3,564.295 when rounded to the nearest Hundredths is?
a. 3,564.28 c. 3,565.28
b. 3,564.30 d. 3,565.20

- 113 -
4. What is 4,321.567 rounded to the nearest Thousands.
a. 4,300 c. 4,000
b. 4,320 d. 5,000
5. Convert the number 417,692.65 to the nearest Hundred Thousand.
a. 410,000 c. 418,600
b. 417,600 d. 400,000
6. 786.89 rounded to the nearest tenths is?
a. 787 c. 786
b. 786.90 d. 787.90
7. The number 1,256.4725 rounded to the nearest Thousandths is?
a. 1,256.473 c. 1,256.400
b. 1,256.475 d. 1,256.470
8. Paul has a money amounting to 45,67844, and should be rounded

off preferably to nearest Tens, what is the number?
a. 46 c. 49
b. 48 d. 50
9. When rounded off to the nearest Hundredths,97.361 is equal to

which number?
a. 97.00 c. 97.36
b. 97.30 d. 97.38
10. Find the correct number if 323.21147 is rounded to the nearest

Ten Thousandths.
a. 323.2115 c. 323.2140
b. 323.2148 d. 323.2110
11. Determine the digit 4,112.47 if rounded to the nearest whole

number (ones)
a. 4,100 c. 4,111
b. 4,110 d. 4,112

- 114 -
12. Below number is the rounded number to the nearest Tens of

345.213.
a. 300 c. 345
b. 310 d. 350
13. Round 154.90123 to the nearest Ten Thousandths.
a. 154.9012 c. 154.9010
b. 154.9000 d. 154.9020
14. What number will be when 900.245 is rounded to the nearest

Hundreds?
a. 700 c. 900
b. 800 d. 1,000
15. The digits 157,904.093 when rounded to the nearest Hundred

Thousand is?
a. 158,000 c. 156,000
b. 157,900 d. 200,000
16. What is 0.347892 rounded to the nearest Hundred Thousandths?
a. 0.347990 c. 0.347900
b. 0.347890 d. 0.347800
17. Convert the number 122.65 to the nearest Tenths.
a. 122.70 c. 122.61
b. 122.60 d. 122.66
18. 888.2134 rounded to the nearest Thousandths is?
a. 888.2000 c. 888.2130
b. 888.2100 d. 888.2134
19. The number 82.41 rounded to the nearest Tens is?
a. 82.40 c. 80
b. 82.41 d. 80.41

- 115 -
20. Mang Topacio, an ice cream vendor earned 600.50 for today’s
selling, the amount he earned will be rounded to the nearest whole
number (Ones), How much he earned?
a. 700 c. 600
b. 610 d. 601
21. When rounded off to the nearest Ten Thousand,123,627.361 is

equal to which number?
a. 123,000 c. 100,000
b. 120,000 d. 103,000
22. Find the correct number if 0.223290 is rounded to the nearest

Ten Thousandths.
a.0.2233 c. 0.2200
b.0.2230 d. 0.2231
23. Determine the digit 2.125 if rounded to the nearest Hundredths.
a. 2.13 c. 2.10
b. 2.11 d. 2.00
24. Below number is the rounded number to the nearest Thousands of

1,248.113.
a. 1,200 c. 1,100
b. 1,240 d. 1,000
25. Round 200.70 to the nearest Hundreds.
a. 201 c. 200
b. 200.70 d. 201.70
26. What number will be when 19.610 is rounded to the nearest Tens?
a. 19.70 c. 19.60
b. 20 d. 19
27. The digit 8.4536 when rounded to the nearest Thousandths is?
a. 8.450 c. 8.400
b. 8.454 d.8.460

- 116 -
VIII. SCIENTIFIC NOTATION → Number x 10a
• Scientific notation is a way of expressing numbers that are

too large or too small to be conveniently written in decimal
form. It may be referred to as scientific form or standard
index form.
CONCEPT AND CONVERSION OF SCIENTIFIC NOTATION
1. Move the decimal point in your number until there is only one
non-zero digit to the left of the decimal point. The resulting
decimal number is a.
2. Count how many places you moved the decimal point. This number is
b.
3. If you moved the decimal to the left b is positive.
If you moved the decimal to the right b is negative.
If you did not need to move the decimal b = 0.
4. Write your scientific notation number as a x 10^b and read it as
"a times 10 to the power of b."
5. Remove trailing 0's only if they were originally to the left of
the decimal point.
Converting Scientific Notation to Real number

• Multiply the decimal number by 10 raised to the power indicated.
• If 10 raised to the power is POSITIVE, move the decimal to right
(Example: 21.234 x 102 → 2,123.4).
• If 10 raised to the power is NEGATIVE, move the decimal to left.
(Example: 21.234 x 10-2 → 0.21234).
Scientific Notation to Real number Examples:
SCIENTIFIC NOTATION STANDARD NOTATION
1. 3.456 x 105 345,600

2. 36.456 x 10-6 0.000036456
3. 489.12 x 10-4 0.048912
4. 0.00582 x 107 5,820
5. 723.14 x 103 723,140
6. 1411.19 x 10-3 1.41119
7. 2167.11 x 10-9 0.00000216711

- 117 -
Converting Real number to Scientific Notation
• Move the decimal point in your number until there is only one
non-zero digit to the left of the decimal point.
• Count how many places you moved the decimal point.
• If you moved the decimal to the left b is positive.
• If you moved the decimal to the right b is negative.
Real Number to Scientific Notation Examples:
STANDARD NOTATION SCIENTIFIC NOTATION
1. 0.045226 4.5226 x 10-2

2. 562.43 0.56243 x 103
3. 160.189 0.160189 x 103
4. 0.0000742 7.42 x 10-5
5. 0.0007543 7.543 x 10-4
6. 491981.1508 0.4919811508 x 106
ADDING AND SUBTRACTING SIENTIFIC NOTATION

• Before Adding or Subtracting we need to transform all of the
powers of 10 to be the same.
Example #1: (2 x 103) + (3.6 x 104)

STEP 1: Adjust the power of 10, make sure they have the same index
0.2 x 104 + 3.6 x 104 → Now in the same index of 103
STEP 2: Add or Subtract the numbers

0.2 + 3.6 = 3.8
STEP 3: Rewrite in Scientific Notation

3.8 x 104 → Final answer
Example #2: (7 x 105) - (5.2 x 104)

7 x 105 – 0.52 x 105 → Now in the same index of 105

7 – 0.52 = 6.48


- 118 -
Example #3: (4.8 x 10-6) – (2.2 x 10-9)

4.8 x 10-6 – 0.0022 x 10-6 → Now in the same index of 10-6

4.8 – 0.0022 = 4.7978

4.7978 x 10-6 → Final answer
Example #4: (5.12 x 10-3) + (3.11 x 10-5)

5.12 x 10-3 + 0.0311 x 10-3 → Now in the same index of 10-3

5.12. + 0.0311 = 5.1511

5.1511 x 10-3 → Final answer
Example #5: (2.14 x 10-2) + (8.13 x 102)


0.000214 + 8.13 = 8.130214

Example #6: (9.28 x 102) – (0.4 x 10-3)


9.28. + 0.000004 = 9.279996


- 119 -
MULTIPLYING SCIENTIFIC NOTATIONS
• To multiply two numbers in scientific notation, multiply their
coefficients and add their exponents.
• The answer must be converted to scientific notation.
Example #1: (3 x 108) (6.8 x 10-13)

STEP 1: Regroup using the commutative and associative properties.
(3 x 6.8) (108 x 10-13)
STEP 2: Multiply the coefficients.
(3 x 6.8) (108 x 10-13) = (20.4) (108 x 10-13)
STEP 3: Multiply the powers of 10 using the Product Rule, so add
the exponents.
(20.4) (108 x 10-13) = 20.4 x 10-5
STEP 4: Convert 20.4 into scientific notation by moving the
decimal point one place to the left and multiplying
by 101.
(20.4 x 101) (10-5)
STEP 5: Group the powers of 10 using the associative property of
multiplication.
(20.4) (101 x 10-5) = 2.04 x 10-4 → Final answer
Example #2: (12.31 x 104) (2.30 x 103)

STEP 1: Regroup using the commutative and associative properties.
(12.31 x 2.30) (104 x 103)
STEP 2: Multiply the coefficients.
(12.31 x 2.30) (104 x 103) = (28.313) (104 x 103)
STEP 3: Multiply the powers of 10 using the Product Rule, so add
the exponents.
(28.313) (104 x 103) = 28.313 x 107
STEP 4: Convert 20.4 into scientific notation by moving the
decimal point one place to the left and multiplying
by 101.
(28.313 x 101) (107)
STEP 5: Group the powers of 10 using the associative property of
multiplication.
(28.313) (101 x 107) = 2.8313 x 108 → Final answer

- 120 -
DIVIDING SCIENTIFIC NOTATIONS
• To divide two numbers in scientific notation, divide their
coefficients and subtract their exponents.
• The answer must be converted to scientific notation.
2.829 x 10−9
Example #1:
3.45 x 10−3
STEP 1: Regroup using the associative property.
2.829 10−9
( 3.45 ) (10−3)
STEP 2: Divide the coefficients.
2.829 10−9 10−9
( 3.45 ) (10−3) = (0.82) (10−3)
STEP 3: Divide the powers of 10 using the Quotient Rule, so subtract
the exponents.
0.82 x 10−9 −(−3) = 0.82 x 10−6
STEP 4: Convert 0.82 into scientific notation by moving the decimal
point one place to the right and multiplying by 10−1.
(8.2 x 10−1 ) x 10−6
STEP 5: Group the powers of 10 together using the associative
Property, and convert to scientific notation.
8.2 x (10−1 x 10−6 ) = 8.2 x 10−7 → Final answer
(1.37 x 104) (9.85 x 106)

Example #2:
5.01 x 1012
STEP 1: Regroup the terms in the numerator according to the
associative and commutative properties.
(1.37 x 9.85) ( 106 x 104)
5.0 x 1012
STEP 2: First, multiply (1.37 x 9.85), and add the exponent
6+4=10
13.4945 x 1010
1.37 x 9.85 = 13.4945; 10 →
5.0 x 1012
STEP 3: Regroup using the associative property, then divide the
coefficient and subtract the power of 10.
13.4945 1010
( 5.0 ) (1012) = (2.6869) (1010 − 12)
STEP 4: Convert to scientific notation.
(2.6869) (1010 − 12 ) = 2.6869 x 10−2 → Final answer

- 121 -
EXERCISES:
1. (12 x 106 ) + (13 x 104 ) 23. (11.22 x 105 ) – (4.20 x 104 )
75.50 x 108
2. (15.5 x 104 ) (2.13 x 106 ) 24.
5 x 104
12 x 10−8
3. = 1.5 x 10−2 25. (29 x 108 ) + (12.10 x 103 )
8 x 10−6
4. (8 x 10−3 ) (5 x 10−5 ) 26. (30 x 10−7) – (4.13 x 10−3 )
5. (84.32 x 10−3 ) – (2 x 10−2 ) 27. (24.10 x 10−7) (3 x 10−6 )
6. (4 x 106 ) + (8 x 108 )
14 x 105
7. = 7 x 104
2 x 101
8. (30.13 x 108 ) – (31.05 x 104 )
9. (16.30 x 10−4 ) – (10.33 x 10−2 )
10. (43.50 x 104 ) + (2.50 x 103 )
11. (21.05 x 105 ) (1.08 x 105 )
63.3 x 10−2
12.
3 x 101
18 x 10−9
13.
9 x 103
14. (17.3 x 104 ) + (15 x 102 )
15. (38 x 106 ) – (15 x 102 )
16. (14.15 x 10−6 ) – (11.41 x 10−7 )
17. (44.02 x 103 ) (1.23 x 10−2 )
18. (8 x 102 ) (9 x 10−4 )
19. (15.23 x 10−1 ) + (3.10 x 10−3 )
12 x 107
20.
4 x 105
21. (19.14 x 109 ) (3.11 x 10−8)
22. (45.36 x 10−4 ) + (2.11 x 10−5 )

- 122 -
IX. AREA AND PERIMETER OF A SHAPE

AREA - The total number of square units that can fit into a shape
or an object or a flat surface defines the actual area. The distance
around the outside of a shape.
PERIMETER – Measures the space inside of a shape.
AREA AND PERIMETER OF A SQUARE

FORMULA:
A = s2 → Area of a square square has 4
P = 4s → Perimeter of a Square equal sides
Example: Area of a square

1. Find the area of a square of side 8 cm.
A = s2 → A = 82
A = (8)(8) = 64 cm2
2. Find the area of a square photo frame whose side is 20 cm.

A = s2 → A = 202
A = (20)(20) = 400 cm2
3. Find the area of a square garden with a 36 square meters.

A = s2 → A = 362
A = (36)(36) = 1,296 sq. m
Example: Perimeter of a square

1. Find the perimeter of a square shaped playground who’s each side
length 12 m.
P = 4s → P = 4(12)
P = 48 m
2. Each sides of a paper sheet are 14 ft. Find its perimeter.

P = 4s → P = 4(14)
P = 56 ft.
3. Find the perimeter of the square whose one side is 10.5 m.

P = 4s → P = 4(10.5)
P = 42 m

- 123 -
AREA AND PERIMETER OF A RECTANGLE
FORMULA:
A = L x W → Area of a Rectangle
P = 2L + 2W → Perimeter of a Rectangle
Example: Area of a Rectangle

1. Find the area of a rectangle of length 78 mm and width of 26 mm.
A = L x W → A = (78)(26)
A = 2,028 mm2
2. Finding the area of a rectangle whose length is 12 cm and width

of 9 cm.
A = L x W → A = (12)(9)
A = 108 cm2
3. How many pieces of stone slabs each 26 cm long and 10 cm width

will be required to lay a path 260 m long and 15 m wide.
A = L x W → A = (26)(10)
A = 260 cm2
Example: Perimeter of a Rectangle

1. One side of a rectangle is 9 inches length and another is 7 inches
in width. What is the perimeter of the rectangle in inches?
P = 2L + 2W → P = 2(9) + 2(7)
P = 14 + 18
P = 32 inches
2. Given the rectangle in the diagram, what is the perimeter of the

rectangle?
P = 2L + 2W → P = 2(12) + 2(7)
P = 24 + 14 7cm
P = 38 cm
12 cm
3. A rectangle has a length of 20 inches and a width of 12 inches,
find the perimeter of the rectangle.
P = 2L + 2W → P = 2(20) + 2(12)
P = 40 + 24
P = 64 inches
4. Find the perimeter of the rectangle below.

P = 2L + 2W → P = 2(24) + 2(6) 24cm
P = 48 + 12
P = 60 cm 6cm

- 124 -
AREA AND PERIMETER OF A TRIANGLE
FORMULA:
A = 1/2 (b)(h) → Area of a Triangle
P = a + b + c → Perimeter of Equilateral Triangle, Scalene Triangle,
Acute Triangle, Right Triangle. Obtuse Triangle
P = 2a + b → Perimeter of Isosceles Triangle
Example: Area of a Triangle

1. Find the area of an acute triangle with a base of 13 inches and
a height of 5 inches.
A = 1/2 (b)(h) → A = 1/2 (13)(5)
A = 1/2 (65)
A = 32.5 in2
2. Find the area of a right-angled triangle with a base of 7 cm and

a height of 8 cm.
A = 1/2 (b)(h) → A = 1/2 (7)(8)
A = 1/2 (56)
A = 28 cm2
3. Find the area of an obtuse-angled triangle with a base of 4 cm

and a height 7 cm.
A = 1/2 (b)(h) → A = 1/2 (4)(7)
A = 1/2 (28)
A = 14 cm2

- 125 -
Example: Perimeter of Equilateral Triangle, Scalene Triangle,
Acute Triangle, Right Triangle, Obtuse Triangle
1. Find the perimeter of a triangle whose sides are 24 cm, 32 cm and
40 cm.
P = a + b + c → P = 24 + 32 + 40
P = 96 cm
2. Find the perimeter of an isosceles right-angled triangle of equal

sides 15 cm each.
P = a + b + c → P = 15 + 15 + 15
P = 30 cm
3. The three sides of a triangle are in the ratio 2 : 3 : 4 and the

perimeter 225 m. Find its area.
P = a + b + c → P = 2 + 3 + 4
P = 9 m
Example: Perimeter of Isosceles Triangle

1. Find the perimeter of an isosceles triangle, with a side of 5 cm
and a base of 4 cm.
P = 2a + b → P = 2(5) + 4
P = 10 + 4
P = 14 cm
2. Calculate the perimeter of an isosceles triangle, whose two

sides of 9 cm and a base of 6 cm.
P = 2a + b → P = 2(9) + 6
P = 18 + 6
P = 24 cm
3. Solve for the perimeter of the given isosceles triangle, refer

to the diagram below.
P = 2a + b → P = 2(8) + 6
P = 16 + 6
P = 22 cm
4. Find the perimeter of an isosceles triangle. See below diagram.
P = 2a + b
P = 2(10) + 5
P = 20 + 5 10 cm 10 cm
P = 25 cm
5 cm

- 126 -
RADIUS, DIAMETER AREA OF A CIRCLE
FORMULA
Where:
𝑐
r = → Radius of a circle r = radius C = Circumference
2π
A = πr2 → Area of a Circle A = area π = pi (3.14)
c = 2πr → Circumference of a circle d = diameter
d = 2r → diameter of a circle
Radius - Is a straight line from the center of a

circle to the circumference of a circle.
Diameter - Is a line segment from one end of the
circle to the other end of the circle
passing through the center of the circle.
Circumference - The total length of the boundary
of the circle.
Example: How to solve the Radius of a circle

21. The circumference of a circle is 66 ft. What is the radius of the
circle?
𝑐 66
r = → r =
2π 2(3.14)
66
r = = r = 10.51 ft.
6.28
22. The circumference of a circle is 950 in. What is the radius of
the circle?
𝑐 950
r = → r =
2π 2(3.14)
950
r = = r = 151.27 in.
6.28
23. A circle has a diameter of 82 in. What is the radius of the

circle?
First step Second step
𝑐 257.48 257.48
c = 2πr r = → r = = r =
2π 2(3.14) 6.28
c = 2(3.14(41)
c = 257.48 r = 41 in.

- 127 -
Example: How to solve the Area of a Circle
1. Find the area of a circle with radius 3cm.
A = πr2
A = (3.14)(3)2
A = (3.14)(9)
A = 28.26 cm2
2. Find the area of a circle with diameter 20cm.
A = πr2
A = (3.14(10)2
A = (3.14(100)
A = 314 cm2
3. Find the area of a circle with radius 7cm.
A = πr2
A = (3.14)(7)2
A = (3.14)(49)
A = 153.86 cm2
Example: How to solve the Circumference of a Circle

1. Find the circumference of the circle with a radius of 8 cm.
c = 2πr
c = 2(3.14)(8)
c = 2(25.12)
c = 50.24 cm
2. Calculate the circumference of a circle whose diameter is 70 mm
c = 2πr
c = 2(3.14)(35)
c = 2(109.90)
c = 219.80 mm
3. A piece of a wire in the form of a rectangle of length 100 cm and

width 50 cm is cut and folded to make a circle. Its radius is
47.77 cm. Calculate the circumference the circle formed.
c = 2πr
c = 2 (3.14)(47.77)
c = 2(150)
c = 300 cm

- 128 -
Example: How to solve the Diameter of a Circle
6. The radius of a circle is 15 units. Calculate its diameter.
d = 2r
d = 2(15)
d = 30 units
7. Find the diameter of a circle shown below.
d = 2r
d = 2(14)
d = 28 m
8. The radius of a circle is 12 cm. Calculate its diameter.

d = 2r
d = 2(12)
d = 24 cm
EXERCISES:
1. Dexter bought a new phone. He wants to find the area of the phone.
If the length of the phone is 5.2 in and width of the phone is 3
in. Find the area.
a. 16.5 in2 c. 15.6 in

b. 15.6 in2 d. 16.5 in
2. Turner works at a lab with a huge circular particle accelerator.

It has a diameter of 4 miles. What is the accelerator's radius?
a. 1-mile c. 3 miles
b. 2 miles d. 4 miles
3. Evan has trained his puppy, Snowball, to jump through a ring with
a radius of 2 feet. What is the ring's diameter?
a. 2 ft. c. 4 ft.
b. 3 ft. d. 5 ft.
4. We are told that the length of each side of the square has length
19 cm. Find its perimeter.
a. 70 cm c. 74 cm
b. 72 cm d. 76 cm

- 129 -
5. One of the sides of a square is 5 cm. What will be its perimeter?
a. 20 cm c. 20 cm2
b. 25 cm d. 25 cm2
6. If the perimeter of square tiles is 56 in. Find the area.
a. 250 in2 c. 254 in2

b. 252 in2 d. 256 in2
7. The round base of a copper tea kettle has a diameter of 14

centimeters. What is the base's circumference?
a. 43.96 cm c. 46.38 cm
b. 48.36 cm d. 49.68 cm
8. The first side of a right-angled triangle is 200 m longer the

second side. Its hypotenuse has a length of 1000 m. Find the area
of the triangle.
a. 220,000 m2 c. 250,000 m2
b. 240,000 m2 d. 260,000 m2
9. Find the perimeter of an isosceles right-angled triangle with

hypotenuse of length 50 cm.
a. 102.70 cm c. 120.70 cm
b. 107.20 cm d. 127.20 cm
10. The area of a circle was measured as 12.8 sq. meters. What is the
radius of the circle?
a. 4.02 m c. 2.20 m
b. 4.20 m d. 2.02 m
11. Find the area of a right-angled triangle with sides of lengths 0.4
ft and 0.3 ft.
a. 0.06 ft2 c. 0.07 ft2

b. 0.60 ft2 d. 0.70 ft2
12. A dinner plate has a radius of 3 inches. What is the plate's

circumference?
a. 18.84 inches c. 14.88 inches
b. 18.48 inches d. 14.81 inches

- 130 -
13. If the width of a soccer ground is 40 yards and length of the

ground is 80 yards. Find the area of the ground.
a. 2300 yd2 c. 3020 yd2

b. 3200 yd2 d. 2030 yd2
14. Tanvi's old pot-bellied stove has a long stovepipe. The rim of the
stovepipe has a diameter of 6 inches. What is the rim's radius?
a. 1-inch c. 3 inches
b. 2 inches d. 4 inches
15. Jason is painting a large circle on one wall of his new apartment.
The largest distance across the circle will be 8 feet.
Approximately how many square feet of wall will the circle cover?
a. 45.03 ft2 c. 52.01 ft2

b. 50.20 ft2 d. 54.05 ft2
16. Calculate the given situation in centimeter, the perimeter of a

square with side length 70 mm.
a. 20 mm c. 24 mm
b. 24 mm d. 28 mm
17. Sandra's hoop earring has a radius of 1 centimeter. What is the

earring's diameter?
a. 1 cm c. 2 cm
b. 3 cm d. 4 cm
18. Felicia is keen to know the area of the door in her room. If the
length of the door is 10 ft and width of the door is 4ft. Find the
area.
a. 40 ft2 c. 44 ft2
b. 42 ft2 d. 46 ft2
19. The students in Mrs. Coleman's first-grade class sit down in a

circle for show-and-tell. The circle they form has a radius of 4
feet. What is the circle's diameter? 8 ft.
a. 4 ft. c. 10 ft.
b. 8 ft. d. 12 ft.

- 131 -
X. BASIC STATISTICS
• Statistics is the discipline that concerns the collection,
organization, analysis, interpretation, and presentation of
data.
MEASUES OF CENTRAL TENDENCY

A measure of central tendency is a single value that attempts to
describe a set of data by identifying the central position within that
set of data. As such, measures of central tendency are sometimes called
measures of central location.
Is a single value that attempts to describe a set of data by identifying
the central position within that set of data.
MEAN
The mean is equal to the sum of all the values in the data set divided
by the number of values in the data set. This is the average you are
used to.
How to solve the MEAN

STEP 1: Add all the given numbers
STEP 2: Divide the sum to the total numbers of a given data set.
MEDIAN
The median is the middle score for a set of data that has been arranged
in order of magnitude, or this is the “middle value” in the list of
numbers.
How to solve the MEDIAN

STEP 1: Arrange the given numbers from smallest to biggest.
STEP 2: After arranging, find the middle of the given set of numbers.
MODE
The mode is the most frequent score in our data set. If no number in
the list is repeated, then there is no mode for the list.
How to solve the MODE

STEP 1: Just look on the numbers on the data set that are frequently
repeated, because the mode is the number that is repeated most
often.

- 132 -
Example of MEAN
1. 3, 9, 16, 2, 56, 18 STEP 1: 3 + 9 + 16 + 6 + 56 + 18 = 108
STEP 2: 108 ÷ 6 = 18 → MEAN
2. 16, 25, 12, 35, 26 STEP 1: 16 + 25 + 13 + 35 + 26 =115

STEP 2: 115 ÷ 5 = 23 → MEAN
3. 14, 12, 20, 30, 37 STEP 1: 14 + 12 + 27 + 30 + 37 = 120

STEP 2: 120 ÷ 5 = 24 → MEAN
EXAMPLE OF MEDIAN
1. 3, 8, 12, 45, 29, 20, 34, 44, 53, 69, 33, 70, 64

➔ 3, 8, 12, 20, 29, 33, 34, 44, 45, 53, 64, 69, 70
STEP 2: After arranging the data set, find the middle value of
the arranged set of numbers, that is the median of the
given data set.
➔ 3, 8, 12, 20, 29, 33, 34, 44, 45, 53, 64, 69, 70
➔ 34, is the median of the given data set.
2. 6, 14, 5, 18, 49, 28, 1, 40, 2, 65, 55, 31, 88, 21, 17

➔ 1, 2, 5, 6, 14, 17, 18, 21, 28, 31, 40, 49, 55, 65, 88
given data set.
➔ 1, 2, 5, 6, 14, 17, 18, 21, 28, 31, 40, 49, 55, 65, 88
3. 65, 35, 80, 13, 5, 7, 24

➔ 5, 7, 13, 24, 35, 65, 80
given data set.
➔ 5, 7, 13, 24, 35, 65, 80

- 133 -
EXAMPLE OF MODE
1. 4, 6, 5, 9, 3, 2, 7, 7, 6, 5, 4, 9, 10, 10, 3, 4, 7, 6, 9, 9
➔ The mode of the given data set is 9, because it has

the most repeated numbers on the data set with 4
repetition.
2. 41, 39, 48, 52, 46, 62, 54, 40, 96, 52, 98, 40, 42, 52, 60

repetition.
3. 18, 24, 19, 56, 18, 33, 87, 56, 18, 19, 24, 18, 90, 12, 18

repetition.
EXERCISES:
1. 2.2, 10.2, 14.7, 5.9, 4.9, 11.1, 10.5. Find the mean of the
following data.
a. 7.5 c. 9.5
b. 8.5 d. 10.5
2. Find the mean of first ten whole numbers.
a. 4.5 c. 6.5
b. 5.5 d. 7.5
3. The following observations are arranged in ascending order. The

median of the data is 25 find the value of x.
17, x, 24, x + 7, 35, 36, 46
a. 18 c. 24
b. 26 d. 16
4. The mean of 8, 11, 6, 14, x and 13 is 66. Find the value of the
observation x.
a. 234 c. 424
b. 354 d. 344

- 134 -
5. Find the mean of first 5 prime numbers.
a. 3.6 c. 5.6
b. 4.3 d. 2.4
6. Find the mode of the following data. 12, 8, 4, 8, 1, 8, 9, 11,

9, 10, 12, 8
a. 10 c. 14
b. 6 d. 8
7. The runs scored in a cricket match by 11 players is as follows:

7, 16, 121, 51, 101, 81, 1, 16, 9, 11, 16. Find the mean, mode,
median of this data.
a. 36 1/11, 14, 16 c. 39 1/11, 14, 16

b. 39 2/11, 16, 16 d. 36 2/11, 16, 16
8. The weights in kg of 10 students are: 39, 43, 36, 38, 46, 51,
33, 44, 44, 43 Find the mode of this data.
a. 33 and 43 c. 43 only
b. 43 and 44 d. 44 only
The table below shows the distribution of ACT Math scores for a sample
of students enrolled in MGF1106, Fall 1999. The data is authentic.
Refer to the table for exercises 9 – 12.
9. Select the statement that is true.

a. 17 students had scores of 10
b. 42 students had scores 0f 13
c. A and B are both true
d. A, B, and C are all false
10. Find the mean ACT score. Answer may be rounded.

a. 21 c. 22
b. 23 d. 24
11. Find the median ACT score. Answer may be rounded.

a. 21 c. 22
b. 23 d. 24
12. Find the mode.
a. 19 c. 13
b. 23 d. The mode is not unique

- 135 -
The table below shows the relative frequency (R.F.) distribution of a
population of retail store employees according to hourly wage.
13. Find the mean wage.
a. $8.75 c. $8.42
b. $8.16 d. $7.92
14. Find the median wage.
a. $7.50 c. $8.50
b. $8.00 d. $7.75
15. Find the mean of the following data. 12, 10, 15, 10, 16, 12, 10,
15, 15, 13.
a. 13 c. 15
b. 12.50 d. 12.80
16. Find the mode of the following data. 20, 14, 12, 14, 26, 16, 18,
19, 14.
a. 14 c. 26
b. 17 d. 16
17. Find the mean of the following data. 0, 5, 2, 4, 0, 5, 0, 3, 0,

5, 0, 3.
a. 0 c. 2.50
b. 2.25 d. 3.86
The table below shows the distribution of scores on Quiz #6 in MGF1106

for sections 01-08, Spring 1999. Refer to the details in the table for
exercises 18 – 20.
18. Find the mean quiz score. Answers may have

been rounded.
a. 12 c. 13
b. 12.20 d. 13.40
19. Find the median quiz score.

a. 13.50 c. 31.50
b. 12 d. 13
20. Find the mode.

a. 31 c. 12
b. 7 d. 13

- 136 -
XII. WORD PROBLEMS
• A word problem is a mathematical exercise which is in the form

of a hypothetical question that needs mathematical analysis and
equations to be solved.
CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS
The numbers that is continuously follow each other in the order from
smallest to largest. It is also an integer that represents n1 and n2.
TYPES OF CONSECUTIVE NUMBERS
1. NORMAL CONSECUTIVE INTEGERS

➔ Are integers that follow each other in order. It is a
combination of odd and even numbers. They have
difference of 1 between every two numbers.
➔ (E.g. 10, 11, 12 and 24, 25, 26, 27, 28)
Example:
A. The sum of three consecutive integers is 84. Find the three

consecutive integers.
STEP 1: Divide the given sum of three consecutive integers to 3.

84 ÷ 3 = 28
STEP 2: The result will always be at the center. Therefore, it
must be = 27, 28, 29
STEP 3: The three consecutive integers are 27 + 28 + 29 = 84.
B. Find the five consecutive integers whose sum is 240. Find the
largest number.
STEP 1: Divide the given sum of four consecutive integers to 5.

240 ÷ 5 = 48

must be = 46 + 47 + 48 + 49 + 50 = 240
STEP 3: The largest number is 50.

- 137 -
2. CONSECUTIVE ODD INTEGERS

➔ Are the set of integers such that each integer in the
set differs from the previous integer by a difference
of 2 and each integer is an odd number.
➔ (E.g. 15, 17, 19 and 21, 23, 25, 27, 29)
Example:
A. The sum of 7 consecutive odd numbers is 49. Find the second
smallest number.
STEP 1: Divide the given sum of the 7 consecutive odd numbers
to 7 → 49 ÷ 7 = 7

must be = 1 + 3 + 5 + 7 + 9 + 11 + 13 = 49
STEP 3: The second smallest number is 3.
B. The sum of 5 odd consecutive number is 75. Third second odd

number is 13, what are the largest number?

to 5 → 75 ÷ 5 = 15

must be = 11 + 13 + 15 + 17 + 19 = 75
STEP 3: The largest number is 19.
C. 159 is the sum of 3 consecutive odd numbers. Find the smallest

number.

to 3 → 159 ÷ 3 = 53

must be = 51 + 53 + 55 = 159
STEP 3: The smallest number is 51.

- 138 -
3. CONSECUTIVE EVEN INTEGERS
➔ Consecutive even integers are the set of integers such
that each integer in the set differs from the previous
integer by a difference of 2 and each integer is
divisible by 2.
➔ Consecutive even integers are even integers that follow
each other by a difference of 2.
Example:
A. Find the three consecutive even integers who’s some is 30?
STEP 1: Divide the given sum of 3 consecutive even number to 5.

30 ÷ 3 = 10

must be = 8 + 10 + 12 = 30
STEP 3: The three consecutive even numbers are 8, 10, 12.
B. The sum of 4 consecutive even integers is 60. Find the third

largest number.

60 ÷ 4 = 15

must be = 12 + 14 + 16 + 18 = 60
15 → being in the center
STEP 3: The third largest number is 16.
C. The sum of 6 consecutive even integers is 42. Find the second

largest number.

42 ÷ 6 = 7

must be = 2 + 4 + 6 + 8 + 10 + 12 = 42
7 → being in the center
STEP 3: The second largest number is 10.

- 139 -
EXERCISES:
1. Find two consecutive integers whose sum is 45.
a. 20, 21 c. 22, 23
b. 21, 22 d. 23, 24
2. Find two consecutive integers whose sum is 35.

a. 17, 18 c. 26, 27
b. 19, 20 d. 28, 29
3. Three consecutive numbers added together give the answer of 21.

What is the smallest of those numbers?
a. 5 c. 7
b. 6 d. 8
4. The sum of ten consecutive even number is 290. What is the fifth
largest number?
a. 28 c. 32
b. 30 d. 34
5. Find the third odd number if the smallest number is 5 and the
sum of 5 consecutive odd number is 45.
a. 5 c. 13
b. 11 d. 9
6. Five consecutive numbers added together give the answer of 285.

a. 54 c. 56
b. 55 d. 57
7. The sum of six consecutive even number is 90. Find the largest
number, if the second largest number is 12.
a. 10 c. 18
b. 14 d. 20
8. Find the other two consecutive odd number if the sum of the
integers is 75 and the smallest number is 23.
a. 21, 23 c. 25, 27
b. 19, 21 d. 23, 25
9. Five consecutive numbers have a sum of 195. Find the fourth largest
number.
a. 34 c. 32
b. 33 d. 31

- 140 -
10. The sum of three odd number is 9, what is the smallest number?
a. 0 c. 3
b. 1 d. 5
11. The product of three consecutive even numbers is 480. Find the
numbers.
a. 2, 4, 6 c. 0, 2, 4
b. 4, 6, 8 d. 6, 8, 10
12. The product of two consecutive number is 110. Find the largest
number.
a. 10 c. 12
b. 11 d. 13
13. If 162 is the product of three consecutive odd numbers. What is

the second largest number?
a. 6 c. 12
b. 3 d. 10
14. Five consecutive numbers added together give the answer of 200.
a. 33 c. 37
b. 35 d. 39
15. The sum of four consecutive number is 54. Find the smallest
number.
a. 16 c. 15
b. 9 d. 12
16. The sum of four odd number is 16. Find the third largest number.
a. 5 c. 9
b. 7 d. 3
17. The consecutive numbers added together give the answer of 45.
What is the smallest number?
a. 13 c. 15
b. 14 d. 16
18. Find the largest number if the sum of three consecutive even
number is 12.
a. 6 c. 9
b. 8 d. 7

- 141 -
AGE PROBLEM
Age problems are algebra word problems that deal with the ages of
people currently, in the past, or in the future.
Example:
1. Phil is Tom's father. Phil is 35 years old. Three years ago, Phil
was four times as old as his son was then. How old is Tom now?
PAST PRESENT FUTURE
(3 years ago)
Phil – Tom’s father 32 35 -
Tom 8 11 -
STEP 1: You need to determine what is ask. You need to find Tom’s age
now, means Tom’s age at present is missing.
STEP 2: You need to find Tom’s father 3 years ago. If Phil is 35
years old now (present), then his age 3 years ago (past) was
(35 - 3 = 32).
STEP 3: You need to find Tom’s age 3 years ago. If the age of his
father was 32 years old 3 years ago, then his age was 4x older
than his son Tom, you can assume (32 ÷ 4 = 8). Therefore, Tom’s
age 3 years ago was 8 years old.
STEP 4: Find Tom’s age at present. You can assume (8 + 3 = 11). Tom’s
age now is 11 years old.
2. Jack is 30 years old and 3 times as old as Annie. Three years ago,
Jack was four times as old as Annie. The sum of their age?
PAST PRESENT FUTURE
(3 years ago)
Jack - 30 33
Annie - 10 13
SUM OF THEIR AGE: 46
STEP 1: You need to determine what is ask. You need to find the sum of
their age.
STEP 2: You need to find Annie’s present age. Since Jack is 30 years
old and he is 3 times older than Annie, you can assume that
(30 ÷ 3 = 10). Annie is 10 years old at present.
STEP 3: You need to find Jack and Annie’s age in the future, three
Years from the present. Since Jack is 30 years old at present,
you can assume (30 + 3 = 33). Jack is 33 years old after 3
years. Since Annie is 10 years old at present, you can assume
(10 + 3 = 13). Annie is 13 years old after 3 years.
STEP 4: Therefore, the total sum of their age is 46.

- 142 -
3. Lisa is 16 years younger than Kathy. Kathy is 23 years old now.

If the sum of their ages is 30, how old is Lisa?
PAST PRESENT FUTURE
Lisa - 7 -
Kathy - 23 -
STEP 1: You need to determine what is ask. You need to find Lisa’s
age at present.
STEP 2: You need to find Kathy’s age at present. Since Kathy is 23
years old at present and the total of their age is 30, you
can assume (30 – 23 = 7).
STEP 3: Therefore, Lisa’s age at present is 7 years old.
4. An uncle is happily married with three kids at 40. He’s four times
as old as his youngest. In 10 years, the total sum of their age
is 70. How old is his youngest now?
PAST PRESENT FUTURE

(10 years from
present)
Uncle - 40 50
Youngest - 10 20
STEP 1: You need to determine what is ask. You need to find Uncle’s
youngest present age.
STEP 2: You need to find Uncle’s age in 10 years. Since Uncle’s age at
present is 40 years old, you can assume (40 + 10 = 50). Uncle’s
age in 10 years is 50 years old.
STEP 3: You need to find Youngest age at present. Since Uncle’s age at
present is 40 years old ang he is four times older that his
youngest, you can assume (40 ÷ 4 = 10). Youngest age is 10
years old at present.
STEP 4: You need to check the sum of their age to check if the youngest
age at present is correct. Since youngest age at present is 10
years old, you can assume (10 + 10 = 20) that he is 20 years
old in 10 years. Therefore, if you try to calculate the sum of
their age in 10 years (50 + 20 = 70).

- 143 -
EXERCISES:
1. John is twice as old as his friend Peter. Peter is 5 years older
than Alice. In 5 years, John will be three times as old as Alice.
How old is Peter now?
a. 3 c. 5
b. 4 d. 6
2. Joe’s father is 5 times older than Joe. Joe is twice as old as

his sister Mae. In two years, the sum of their ages will be 58.
How old is John now?
a. 7 c. 9
b. 8 d. 10
3. Five years ago, John’s age was half of the age he will be in 8
years. How old is he now?
a. 18 c. 20
b. 19 d. 21
4. Ten years from now, Orlando will be three times older than he is
today. What is his current age?
a. 5 c. 2
b. 9 d. 7
5. Jona is 3 times as old as Jaob. 8 years from now, Jona will be

twice as old as Jacob. How old is Jacob?
a. 12 c. 16
b. 6 d. 8
6. Fe is 6 years more than twice Kevin’s age. 2 years ago, Fe was

three times as old as Kevin. How old was Fe 2 years ago?
a. 11 c. 19
b. 15 d. 24
7. Rimma is 2 less than 3 times Fely’s age. 3 years from now, Rimma
will be 7 more than twice Fely’s age. How old will Fely be in 3
years from now?
a. 21 c. 25
b. 15 d. 18

- 144 -
8. Danica is 28 years older than Danny. In 6 years, Danica will be

three times as old as Danny. How old is Danica now?
a. 36 c. 29
b. 44 d. 26
9. A is now 34 years old, and B is 4 years old. In how many years

will A be twice as old as B?
a. 27 c. 30
b. 20 d. 26
10. Dino’s age is 36 and that of his daughter is 3 years. In how many
years will Dino be 4 times as old as his daughter?
a. 7 c. 8
b. 12 d. 15
11. An Oriental rug is 52 years old and a Persian rug is 16 years

old. How many years ago was the Oriental rug four times as old
as the Persian Rug?
a. 3 c. 4
b. 6 d. 8
12. A log cabin quilt is 24 years old and a friendship quilt is 6

years old. In how many years will the log cabin quilt be three
times as old as the friendship quilt?
a. 5 c. 9
b. 3 d. 7
13. A volleyball spiker is 30 years old, and a libero is 22 years

old. How many years ago was the spiker twice as old as the libero?
a. 14 c. 13
b. 19 d. 15
14. A cabinet is 12 years old and a table is 36 years old. In how

many years will the table be twice as old as the cabinet?
a. 12 c. 8
b. 17 d. 21

- 145 -
15. A pewter bowl is 8 years old, and a silver bowl is 22 years old.
In how many years will the silver bowl be twice the age of the
pewter bowl?
a. 10 c. 12
b. 2 d. 6
16. An antique lamp is 95 years old, and an electric lamp is 55 years

old. How many years ago was the antique lamp twice the age of the
electric lamp?
a. 11 c. 8
b. 6 d. 14
17. A Japanese man is three times as old as his son, and his daughter
is 3 years younger than the son. If the sum of their ages 3 years
ago was 63 years, find the present age of the Japanese man.
a. 35 c. 45
b. 40 d. 50
18. Glenda is 26 years old. Judith is 2 years old. In how many

years will Glenda be triple Judith’s age?
a. 17 c. 10
b. 20 d. 14
19. A marble bust is 25 years old, and a terra-cotta bust is 85

years old. In how many years will the terra-cotta bust be three
times as old as the marble bust?
a. 5 c. 9
b. 8 d. 6
20. A Mother is 4 times as old as her daughter. In 20 years, the

Mother will be twice as old as her daughter. Find the present
age of each.
a. 11, 42 c. 9, 38
b. 14, 45 d. 10, 40

- 146 -
WORK PROBLEM
Work problems have direct real-life applications. We often need to
determine how many people are needed to complete a task within a given
time. Alternatively, given a limited number of workers, we often need
to determine how long it takes to finish a project. Here we deal with
the basic math concepts of how to handle these types of problems.
QUICK TRICK TO BASIC WORK PROBLEM:

STEP 1: Multiply the working hours of Person A and Person B.
STEP 2: Add the working hours of Person A to Person B
STEP 3: Divide the results. Result of step 1 divided by the result of
step 2.
BASIC WORK PROBLEM

Example #1: Applicable on basic quick trick
Suppose one painter can paint the entire house in 12 hours, and the
second painter takes 8 hours to paint a similarly-sized house. How
long would it take the two painters together to paint the house?
STEP 1: Multiply the working hours of Person A to Person B.
12 x 8 = 96
STEP 2: Add the working hours of Person A to Person B.

12 + 8 = 20
STEP 3: Divide the result. Result of step 1 divided by result of

step 2. → 96 ÷ 20 = 4.8 (60 seconds x .8 = 48 minutes)
STEP 4: Therefore, it takes them 4 hour and 48 minutes to paint

the house together.
Example # 2: Applicable on basic quick trick

Peter can mow the lawn in 40 minutes and John can mow the lawn in 60
minutes. How long will it take for them to mow the lawn together?
STEP 1: Multiply the working hours of Person A to Person B.
40 x 60 = 2400
STEP 2: Add the working hours of Person A to Person B.

40 + 60 = 100
STEP 3: Divide the result. Result of step 1 divided by result of

step 2. → 2400 ÷ 100 = 24
STEP 4: Therefore, it takes them 24 minutes to mown the lawn
together

- 147 -
MULTIPLE JOBS WORK PROBLEM
FORMULA:
First person Second person
1 1
( + ) = # of work
# of hours to work together

Example:
1. It takes Junior 4 hours to wash their passenger Jeepney. Joker

takes 12 hours to complete the same job. If they wash the
passenger Jeepney together, how long would they take to do this?
1 1 3+1
( + )𝑥 = 2 → ( )𝑥 = 2
4 12 12
4
→ ( ) 𝑥=2
12
4x
→ [
12
= 2] 12
4x 24
→ =
4 4
→ x = 6
** Therefore, they took 6 hours to do the job together.
2. Junior takes 6 hours to plant peanut in a farm. Joker takes 12

hours to complete the same job. If they plant three farms, how
long wound they take to do the job?
1 1 2+1
(6 + ) 𝑥 = 2 → ( 12 ) 𝑥 = 3
12
3
→ ( ) 𝑥=3
12
3x
→ [12 = 3] 12
3x 36
→ =
3 3
→ x = 12
** Therefore, they took 6 hours to do the job together.

- 148 -
PIPES AND TANKS WORK PROBLEM
FORMULA:
Pipe A Pipe B
1 1
( + ) = # of work

Example:
1. Pipe A can fill 1000L water container for 6 hours. Pipe B can
fill the water container for 8 hours. How long would Pipe A and
Pipe B fill the container if they work together?
1 1 4+3
(6 + 8) 𝑥 = 1 → ( 24 ) 𝑥 = 1
7
→ (24) 𝑥 = 1
7 7 24
→ Get the reciprocal of , it became [( ) 𝑥 = 1]
24 24 7
7 24
→( 𝑥 = 1)
24 7
24
→x = or 3.43 or 3 hours and 26 minutes
7
2. A ball valve faucet can fill the tank in 10hours. A twin elbow
valve faucet fills in 5 hours. How long would it take if the ball
valve faucet and twin elbow valve faucet work together?
1 1 1+2
(10 + 5) 𝑥 = 1 → ( 10 ) 𝑥 = 1
3
→ (10) 𝑥 = 1
3 3 10
→ Get the reciprocal of , it became [(10) 𝑥 = 1]
10 3
3 10
→( 𝑥 = 1)
10 3
10
3

- 149 -
PIPES AND DRAINS WORK PROBLEM
FORMULA:
Pipe Drain
1 1
( − ) = # of work
Example:
1. Flexi pipe fills the container in 5 hours. With the pipe turned
off, the drain empties the container in 8 hours. How long does
the Flexi pipe fill the container with the drain open?
1 1 8−5
(5 − 8) 𝑥 = 1 → ( 40 ) 𝑥 = 1
3
→( ) 𝑥 =1
40
3 3 40
→ Get the reciprocal of , it became [( ) 𝑥 = 1]
40 40 3
3 40
→( 𝑥 = 1)
40 3
10
3
2. A single handled faucet can fill a drum container in 4 hours,

after filling up, unfortunately the drum container hit by a hard
metal and suffered a leak and empties the drum container in 8
hours. How long a single handled faucet can fill the drum
container with a leak?
1 1 6−3
(4 − 8) 𝑥 = 1 → ( 24 ) 𝑥 = 1
3
→ (24) 𝑥 = 1
3 3 24
→ Get the reciprocal of , it became [(24) 𝑥 = 1]
24 3
3 24
→( 𝑥 = 1)
24 3
24
→x = or 8 hours
3

- 150 -
EXERCISES:
1. One pipe can fill a pool 1.25 times as fast as a second pipe.
When both pipes are opened, they fill the pool in five hours. How
long would it take to fill the pool if only the slower pipe is
used?
a. 11 hours & 15 minutes c. 11 hours & 10 minutes

b. 11 hours & 20 minutes d. 11 hours & 5 minutes
2. It takes Andy 40 minutes to do a particular job alone. It takes

Brenda 50 minutes to do the same job alone. How long would it
take them if they worked together?

3. Lalaine and Rudy work for a computer software company. Together

they can write a particular computer program in 19 hours. Lalaine
can write the program by herself in 32 hours. How long will it
take Rudy to write the program alone?

4. Anton can dig a 15t. by 15ft. hole in 7 hours. Macario can dig
the same hole in 10 hours. If they worked together how long
would it take them to dig a hole?
a. 4.12 hrs. c. 4.06 hrs.

b. 4.24 hrs. d. 4.22 hrs.
5. It takes Hero 13 hours to tar a roof. Johnny can tar the same
roof in 9 hours. How long would it take them if they worked
together?
a. 5.15 hrs. c. 5.20 hrs.

b. 5.32 hrs. d. 5.44 hrs.
6. Julito, Patrick and Pedro can finish painting the fence in 2

hours. If Julito does the job alone, he can finish it in 5 hours.
If Patrick does the job alone, he can finish it in 6 hours. How
long will it take for Pedro to finish the job alone?
a. 6 hrs. c. 7 hrs.
b. 6 1/2 hrs. d. 7 1/2 hrs.

- 151 -
7. Jimboy can dig a hole by himself in 12 hours. John Carlo can do
it in 8 hours. Jackson can do it in 6. How long will it take them
if they all work together?
a. 2 3/4 hrs. c. 2 1/4 hrs.

b. 2 1/5 hrs. d. 2 2/3 hrs.
8. Jimmy can complete his homework twice as fast as his classmate

Jacob. When working together, both children can complete the
homework in 45 minutes. If they work by themselves, how long will
Jmmy take the homework?
a. 122 minutes c. 67.5 minutes

b. 76 minutes d. 135 minutes
9. A lion can eat a sheep in 2 hours, a wolf can eat a sheep in 3

hours, and a dog can eat the sheep in 6 hours.
How long would it take a lion, a wolf, and a dog all together to
eat the poor sheep?
a. 2 hrs. c. 4 hrs.
b. 1 hr. d. 3 hrs.
10. The pool has 3 pipes, A, B and C. Pipes A and B can fill
the pool in 10 hours, pipes A and C can fill it in 12 hours,
and pipes B and C can fill it in 15 hours. How long will it
take to fill the pool if all 3 pipes are turned on?
a. 4 hrs. c. 8 hrs.
b. 5 hrs. d. 6 hrs.
11. Three machines are filling water bottles. The machines can
fill the daily quota of water bottles in 90 hours, 99 hours,
and 110 hours, separately. How long would it take to fill
the daily quota of water battles with all three machines
working together?
a. 54 hrs. c. 46 hrs.
b. 33 hrs. d. 38 hrs.
12. Jack and Jill can mow the park together in 10 hours. Jack
and Joe can mow the same park together in 15 hours. Jill and
Joe can mow the same park together in 18 hours. Determine
the number of hours it would take Jill alone to mow the park.
a. 24.20 hrs. c. 23.40 hrs.

b. 22.15 hrs. d. 22.50 hrs.

- 152 -
13. Each of valves A, B and C when open release water into a
tank at its own constant rate. With all three valves
open, the tank fills in 1 hr. With only valves A and
C open, it takes 1.5 hr. to fill the tank and with only
valves B and C open, it takes 2 hr. How long does it take
to fill the tank with valves A and B open?
a. 1 hr. & 12 minutes c. 1 hr. & 30 minutes

b. 1 hr. & 20 minutes d. 1 hr. & 26 minutes
14. If 4 workers can build a barn in 6 hours, how long would it

have taken for 3 workers?
a. 10 hrs. c. 12 hrs.
b. 8 hrs. d. 6 hrs.
15. One pipe can fill a tank 1.5 times faster than another pipe
can drain the tank. Starting with an empty tank, if both
pipes are turned on; it takes 4.5 hours to fill the tank.
How long does it take the slower pipe working alone to drain
a full tank?
a. 2.30 hrs. c. 2.25 hrs.

b. 2.10 hrs. d. 2.15 hrs.
16. First worker can do the job in 5 days and the second worker
takes 4 days. How long would it take the two workers together
to finish the job?
a. 2 2/9 days c. 2 4/9 days

b. 2 1/9 days d. 2 5/9 days
17. If 12 men can do the job in 15 days, how many men would it
take to do the job in 10 days?
a. 16 men c. 14 men
b. 10 men d. 18 men

- 153 -
MIXTURE PROBLEM
Mixture Problems
• Involve creating a mixture from two or more things, and then

determining some quantity (percentage, price, etc.) of the
resulting mixture.
• Involve combining two or more things and determining some

characteristic of either the ingredients or the resulting mixture.
HELPFUL TIPS:
1. The concentration of pure acid is %100.

2. The concentration of pure water is 0%.
FORMULA: BASIC CONCEPT
Solution 1 Solution 2
Example:
A 5Liter solution that was 10% was mixed with a 3Liter that was 40%
vinegar. Find the new concentration of vinegar?
Solution 1 Solution 2
10% 40%
5L + 3L = 8x
→(10% x 5L) + (40% x 3L) x = 5 + 3

→(10% x 5L) + (40% x 3L) 8x
→ 50 + 120 = 8x
→ 170 = 8x
𝟏𝟕𝟎 𝟖𝒙
= x = 21.25%
𝟖 𝟖
** The new concentration of vinegar is 21.25%

- 154 -
Jerome mixed 4 kilos of soil containing 15% sand with 10 kilos of soil
with 32% sand. What is the sand content in the resulting mixture?
Mixture 1 Mixture 2
15% 32%
4k + 10k = 14x
→(15% x 4k) + (32% x 10k) x = 4 + 10

→(15% x 4k) + (32% x 10k) 14x
→ 60 + 320 = 14x
→ 380 = 14x
𝟑𝟖𝟎 𝟏𝟒𝒙
= x = 27.14%
𝟏𝟒 𝟏𝟒
** The sand content in the mixture is 27.14%
DEALING WITH PURE COMPONENTS
Example: ** The concentration of pure vinegar is always 100%
A 20Liter solution that was 70% vinegar was mixed with 14Liter of
pure vinegar. Find the new concentration of the vinegar.
Mixed vinegar Pure vinegar
70% 100%
20L + 14L = 34x
→(70% x 20L) + (100% x 14L) x = 20 + 14

→(70% x 20L) + (100% x 14L) 34x
→ 1400 + 1400 = 34x
→ 2800 = 34x
𝟐𝟖𝟎𝟎 𝟑𝟒𝒙
= x = 82.35%
𝟑𝟒 𝟑𝟒
** The new concentration of vinegar is 82.35%

- 155 -
A 18Liter solution that was 90% vinegar was mixed with 12Liters of
pure water. Find the new concentration of vinegar.
** The concentration of pure water is always 0%
Mixed vinegar Pure water
90% 0%
18L + 12L = 30x
→(90% x 18L) + (0% x 12L) x = 18 + 12

→(90% x 18L) + (0% x 12L) 30x
→ 1620 + 0 = 30x
→ 1620 = 30x
𝟏𝟔𝟐𝟎 𝟑𝟎𝒙
𝟑𝟎
= 𝟑𝟎
x = 54%
** The new concentration of vinegar is 54%
EXERCISES:
1. How many gallons of 3% acid solution must be mixed with 60 gallons

of 10% acid solution to obtain an acid solution that is 8%?
a. 24 gallons c. 26 gallons
b. 22 gallons d. 20 gallons
2. How much water should we add to 20 gallons of 15% acid solution

to dilute it to a concentration of 12%?
3. 9 lbs. of mixed nuts containing 55% peanuts were mixed with 6lbs.
of another kind of mixed nuts that contain 40% peanuts. What
percent of the new mixture is peanut?
a. 38% b. 34% c. 44% d. 49%
4. A metallurgist needs to make 12.4 lbs. of an alloy containing 50%

gold. He is going to melt and combine one metal that is 60% gold
with another metal that is 40% gold. How much (in lbs.) should
he use for 60% gold?
a. 5.4 lbs. b. 6.2 lbs. c. 4.5 lbs. d. 5.6 lbs.

- 156 -
5. Brand X sells 21 oz. bags of mixed green peas that contain 29%
field pea. To make their product they combine Brand Y mixed green
peas which contain 35% field pea and Brand Z mixed green peas
which contain 25% field pea. How much (in oz.) Brand Y will use
in making a new mixture?
a. 8.4 oz. b. 5.2 oz. c. 6.5 oz. d. 9.3 oz.
6. How much liters of 15% acid solution should be mixed with 10Liters
of a 36% acid solution to obtain a mixture that is 20%?
a. 25Liters b. 28Liters c. 32Liters d. 34Liters
7. 9 gallon of sugar solution was mixed with 6 gallons of a 90%

sugar solution to make 84% sugar solution. Find the percent
concentration of the first solution.
a. 85% b. 70% c. 95% d. 80%
8. How many of the mg. of the metal containing 45% nickel must be
combined with 6mg. of pure nickel to form an alloy containing 78%
nickel?
a. 3.5mg. b. 4mg. c. 2.5mg. d. 5mg
9. Jovit is making a new concentration, to obtain a solution that

is 55%, how much pure alcohol should he will add to 18 gallons
of 35% acid solution?
10. Imagine you have two equally-sized containers. One is pure

water, and the other is 50% water and 50% juice. If you
combined them, what percent of juice would be the result?
a. 25% b. 30% c. 35% d. 40%
11. 5-gallon container of trail mix is 20% nuts. Another trail

mix is added to it, resulting in a 12-gallon container of
trail mix that is 40% nuts. What percent of the second trail
mix is nuts?
a. 46% c. 54%
b. 58% d. 62%

- 157 -
12. If a 2-gallon container of pure juice is added to 3 gallons

of water, what percent of the mixture is pure juice?
a. 5% b. 15% c. 10% d. 0%
13. A 6-pint mixture that is 25% oil is added to a 3-pint mixture

that is 40% oil. What percent of the resulting mixture is
oil?
a. 25% b. 30% c. 35% d. 40%
14. An 11-ounce gold chain of 24% gold was made from a melted
down 4-ounce charm of 50% gold and a golden locket. What
percent of the locket was pure gold?
a. 5% b. 9% c. 6% d. 3%
15. How many liters of a 17% acid solution should be mixed with
8 liters of an 11% acid solution to obtain a mixture that is
15%?
a. 15Liters b. 19Liters c. 16Liters d. 14Liters
16. How much water should we add to 10 gallons of 30% acid

solution to dilute it to a concentration of 25%?
17. In a science lab, two containers are filled with mixtures.

The first container is filled with a mixture that is 30%
acid. The second container is filled with a mixture that is
50% acid, and the second container is 50% larger than the
first. The first and second containers are then emptied into
a third container. What percent of acid is in the third
container?
a. 53% b. 42% c. 34% d. 60%
18. Soil that contains 30% clay is added to soil that contains
70% clay to create 10 gallons of soil containing 50% clay.
How much of each of the soils was combined?

- 158 -
MONEY PROBLEM
Word problems are a way of showing a scenario where math is used in a

real-world example. This can include all of the four operations:
addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division, among others. The
most common time that people continue to use math in their day-to-day
lives is when shopping, paying bills, or budgeting expenses.
Money word problems can provide real-life examples to make sense of

the math involved. This will aid in a long-term understanding of how
to think through word problems.
TIPS IN SOLVING MONEY WORD PROBLEM
A. Identify what the word problem is asking. What will the

numbers be doing?
B. Take note of keywords in the question. Circle or underline the
keywords and numbers involved using specific strategies.
C. Write the equation using the information given in the problem.
D. Solve the equation to find the solution, using the correct
operation.
E. Check your work and make sense of the answer.
KEY WORDS USED FOR EACH OPERATION
Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division

how much minus product cut into/ cut up
both how many left double half, third, *fraction words
combined less than triple parts
how many change by quotient of
total difference each group percent
add reduce multiplied by (how many) in each
in all decreased by of each group (has)
together fewer than times ratio
increased by subtract increased by share
plus remain dimensions average
altogether take away every separated
Example:
Melody has ₱5,493.50 in his savings account. Daisy has ₱9,354.50 in

her savings account. How much more money does Daisy have than Melody
if Daisy bought a set of make up for ₱2,300.99 and Melody bought paint
and painting materials for her project amounting to ₱3,250.45?
STEP 1: Determine the amount of money Daisy and Melody has.

- 159 -
➔ Daisy has ₱9,354.50, and Melody has ₱5,493.50.

STEP 2: After determining, deduct both of their expenses.
➔ Daisy = ₱9,354.50 - ₱2,300.99 = ₱7,053.51
➔ Melody = ₱5,493.50 - ₱3,250.45 = ₱2,243.05
STEP 3: After deducting both of their expenses, now, deduct the
money Daisy has, and the money Melody has.
➔ ₱7,053.51 - ₱2,243.05 = ₱4,810.46
STEP 4: Therefor, Daisy has ₱4,810.46 more than Melody.
Daryll just had a birthday celebration in their family Rest house and
received a money as a gift from his parents, uncle and aunt. He received
₱4,500.67 from her Uncle Diether, ₱5,233.40 from her Aunt Belinda, and
₱10,488.90 from his parents. How much money will Daryll be left if he
plans to buy a bicycle for ₱8,999.99 and a disc for his video game for
₱1,600.99?
STEP 1: Add the money he received from his uncle, aunt, and
Parents.
➔ ₱4,500.67 + ₱5,233.40 + ₱10,488.90 = ₱20,222.97
STEP 2: The total money he received will be ducted to the amount
of bicycle and disc he plans to buy.
➔ ₱20,222.97 - ₱8,999.99 - ₱1,600.99 = ₱9,621.99
➔ STEP 3: Therefor, Daryll will have a left money of
₱9,621.99 after buying bicycle and disc.
EXERCISES:
1. Mathew went to a movie theatre with his girlfriend with

₱3,455.50 in his pocket. The one thousand peso-bill was used to
pay. He bought a two-movie ticket for ₱250.00 each. He also
bought snacks for C129.50, and two bottled water for ₱20.00
each. How much tip did he gave to the seller if 50% of the
change was given to the seller?
a. ₱165.25 c. ₱145.45
b. ₱125.50 d. ₱150.20
3. Emilio sells some of his video games to his four friends. He was
paid a total of ₱7,020, if one of his friends paid 25% only, and
the other three paid the same amount to complete the amount, what
exact amount of money did his one friend paid?
a. ₱1,560 c. ₱1,645
b. ₱1,675 d. ₱1,755

- 160 -
4. DJ receives ₱2,400 monthly allowance. He puts ₱350.00 of his
allowance into a piggy bank out of the amount he receives monthly,
until his piggy bank reached ₱7,000.00. How many months DJ has
been saving part of his allowance?
a. ₱5,500 c. ₱8,450
b. ₱7,000 d. ₱6,350
5. Alejandro is trying to save ₱50,000.00. He currently has

₱37,350.00 in his bank account. He just earned another ₱1,250.00
by helping his dad do chores around the house and got ₱1,750.00
for his birthday. How much more does Alejandro need to save to
meet his goal if he bought a new shoe for ₱5,599.99?
a. ₱14,378.57 c. ₱15,249.99
b. ₱16,243.21 d. ₱17,348.88
6. An ordinary bicycle costs ₱4,242.50. A skateboard costs ₱1,820.00

less than the bicycle. Jason buys two skateboards. How much does
he need to pay the cashier?
a. ₱4,548 c. ₱4,485
b. ₱4,845 d. ₱4,884
7. Mark earned ₱78.25 an hour mowing lawn. If he worked 8 hours, a

day, how much money did he make mowing lawns if he worked for
2weeks?
a. ₱8,764 c. ₱7,894.20
b. ₱9,455.25 d. ₱6,565
8. Lea made ₱60.00 an hour babysitting. If she worked for 5 hours a

day, how much money did she make for a month if she didn’t babysit
for 5 days?
a. ₱6,700 c. ₱5,000
b. ₱5,900 d. ₱7,500
9. Jose has ₱462.50 at first. Then he saves another ₱322.50. He

wants to buy a school bag that costs ₱897.50. How much more must
he save to buy the school bag if he would buy 2?
a. ₱1,100 c. ₱1,001
b. ₱1,010 d. ₱1,110

- 161 -
10. Benjie spent ₱1,351.90 at the book fair. Each horror book
costs ₱300.00, each hero book costs ₱375.95. How much horror
books did Benjie buy?
a. 4 b. 3 c. 2 d. 1
11. Mr. Brown collected ₱300.00 each from his students for their
upcoming field trip. If two of his students didn’t go, how
much did Mr. Brown collected if he has 30 students?
a. ₱8,400 c. ₱8,600
b. ₱9,000 d. ₱9,200
12. Alfred went to a stationery shop and bought a marker and a

stapler. He gave the cashier ₱500.00 and received ₱117.50
change. The marker cost ₱172.50. How much did the stapler
cost?
a. ₱200 b. ₱215 c. ₱205 d. ₱210
13. Amelia has ₱1,675.00. Each Hawaiian pizza cost ₱350.00, each,
Cheese pizza cost ₱325.00 How many Cheese pizzas can Amelia
buy if he bought 2 Hawaiian pizza?
a. 4 b. 3 c. 2 d. 1
14. Yvonne is selling a raffle ticket for ₱200.00. She collects

a total of ₱14,200.00 in the morning and collects ₱4,000.00
in the afternoon. How many tickets did she sell in all?
a. 75 b. 87 c. 91 d. 96
15. I have three meals in a day. My meal costs ₱250.00 each. How
much my meals costs in a week?
a. ₱5,250 c. ₱3,430
b. ₱4,520 d. ₱5,120
16. The twins Abby and Annie had the same amount of money at
first. Abby spent ₱1,740.00 on clothes and had ₱635.00 left.
Annie spent ₱1,082.50 on a book. How much money did Annie
have left?
a. ₱1,420.15 c. ₱1,345.25
b. ₱1,165.30 d. ₱1,292.50

- 162 -
INVESTMENT AND INTEREST RATE
Interest – is the cost of borrowing money, where the borrower pays a

fee to the lender for the loan. The interest, typically expressed as
a percentage, can be either simple or compounded.
Simple interest - Is based on the principal amount of a loan or deposit.

It is a quick and easy method of calculating the interest charge on a
loan. Simple interest is determined by multiplying the daily interest
rate by the principal by the number of days that elapse between
payments.
Compound interest - Is based on the principal amount and the interest

that accumulates on it in every period. It is the interest on a loan
or deposit calculated based on both the initial principal and the
accumulated interest from previous periods.
Acronyms:
A = Accrued Amount/Total amount → Puhunan + Kita = Accrued Amount
P = Principal amount → Investment or Pinuhunan
r = rate – Rate of interest (%)
t = Time period
n = Number of times the interest is compounded in a year
I - Interest
FORMULA OF SIMPLE INTEREST: A = P (1 + rt)

FORMULA OF INTEREST: I = Prt
𝑟
FORMULA OF COMPOUND INTEREST: A = P (1 + 𝑛)nt
Example of Simple Interest:
James invested ₱600,000.00 into a simple savings account that earned

6% per year. How much did he have in total after 5 years?
A = P (1 + rt)
= 600,000 (1 + 0.06 * 5)
= 600,000 (1 + 0.3)
= 600,000 (1.3)
A = 780,000
** In 5 years, he will have a total savings of ₱780,000.00
Joseph invested ₱1,0000,000.00 in simple account with an annual

interest rate of 3%, How long would Joseph would take to earn
₱600,000.00?

- 163 -
I = Prt
600,000 = (1,000,000) (0.03) (x)
600,000 = 30,000x
600,000 = 30,000𝑥
30,000
I = 20 years
** Joseph would take 20 years to earn ₱600,000.00.
Example of Compound Interest:
3. Jade made an initial deposit into his savings with the amount of
₱350,000 that compounds 3% interest annually. How much money will
he have in 3 years?
𝑟 nt
A = P (1 + )
𝑛
0.03
= 350,000(1 + 1 )(1)(3)
= 350,000 (1 + 0.03)3
= 350,000 (1.03)3
= 350,000 (1.09)
A = 381,500
** Jade will have a savings of ₱381,500 in 3 years.
4. After 4 years of 3% interest compounded quarterly, Mario’s

account has ₱835,450.00. What was the original amount of Mario’s
money being deposited four years ago?
𝑟 nt
A = P (1 + 𝑛
)
0.03
835,450 = x (1 + )(4)(3)
4
835,450 = x (1 + 0.0075)12
835,450 = x (1.0075)12
835,450 = x (1.09)
835,450 = 𝑥 (1.09)
1.09
x = 766,467.89
** The original amount that Mario’s deposited to his account

after 4 years of 3% compounded interest was ₱766,467.89.

- 164 -
EXERCISES:
1. Jonalyn deposits ₱150,000.00 in XYZ Bank for 3 year which earn
her an interest of 8%. What is the amount she gets after 2
years?
a. ₱174,000 c. ₱184,000
b. ₱164,000 d. ₱154,000
2. Roderick deposits ₱270,000.00 and got back an amount of

₱300,000.00 after a year. Find the simple interest he got.
a. ₱3,000 c. ₱13,000
b. ₱30,000 d. ₱33,000
3. Ruby Rose obtained a loan of ₱1,250,000.00 from the ABC Bank to

renovate her house. If the rate of interest is 8% per annum, what
amount will she have to pay to the bank after 2 years to discharge
her debt?
a. ₱1,584,000 c. ₱1,458,000
b. ₱1,485,000 d. ₱1,854,000
4. Mr. Dela Cruz invested a certain amount of money and got back an
amount of ₱420,000.00. If the bank paid an interest of ₱35,000.00,
find the amount Mr. Dela Cruz invested.
a. ₱365,000 c. ₱270,000
b. ₱285,000 d. ₱385,000
5. Mrs. Abundo borrowed ₱1,000,000.00 from her friend Nathalie at

12% per annum simple Interest. She lent it to Andres at the same
rate but compounded annually. Find Mrs. Abundo gain after 2 years.
a. ₱12,500 c. ₱14,240
b. ₱14,400 d. ₱13,320
6. Jheric deposited ₱500,000.00 for 4 years at a rate of 6% per

annum. Find the interest and amount Jheric got.
a. ₱640,000 c. ₱730,000
b. ₱540,000 d. ₱620,000
7. Missy deposited a sum of ₱3,000,000.00 in EFG Bank for 3 years,

compounded annually at 7.5% per annum. What amount will he get
on maturity?

- 165 -
a. ₱2,450,500 c. ₱3,975,350
b. ₱4,225,420 d. ₱2,670,580
8. Douglas Mc Arthur deposits ₱250,000 in a bank account which pays

6% simple interest per year. Find the value of his deposit after
4 years.
a. ₱310,000 c. ₱300,000
b. ₱301,000 d. ₱300,100
9. Mr. Ruiz received ₱112,500.00 loan from bank. After six months,
he paid back ₱114,750 and closed the loan. Find the rate of
interest.
a. 4% b. 3% c. 2% d. 5%
10. Jack deposited a sum of ₱312,500.00 in the North-West Bank

for 1 year, compounded half-yearly at 8% per annum. Find the
compound interest he gets.
a. ₱19,500 c. ₱22,500
b. ₱25,500 d. ₱28,550
11. Mrs. Singco borrowed ₱800,000.00 from a finance company at

10% per annum, compounded half-yearly. What amount of money
Will discharge his debt after 1¹/₂ years?
a. ₱924,450 c. ₱868,800
b. ₱840,620 d. ₱926,100
12. A man invests ₱825,000.00 in two kinds treasury notes,

which yield 7.5% and 6% annually. After two years year, he
earns ₱122,100.00 in interest. How much does he invest at
the 6 % rate?
a. ₱40,000 c. ₱55,000
b. ₱35,000 d. ₱45,000
13. Three years ago, Bernard purchased two horses from his friend
Elmer for $ ₱550,000. What payment will discharge his debt
now, the rate of interest being 10% per annum, compounded
annually?
a. ₱634,620 c. ₱568,400
b. ₱732,050 d. ₱826,260

- 166 -
14. A person invested $25,200 in two accounts, which pay 5 % and
10% interest annually. The amount invested at 10% rate is
110% of the amount invested at 5% rate. After three years
year, he earns $2,442 in interest. How much did he invest at
the 5% rate?
a. ₱500,000 c. ₱400,000
b. ₱700,000 d. ₱600,000
15. Shantal took a loan of ₱900,000.00 from a bank to purchase

a living room set and other decorations. If the company
charges compound interest at 12% per annum during the first
year and 12¹/₂% per annum during the second year, how much
will she have to pay after 2 years?
a. ₱1,250,200 c. ₱1,134,000
b. ₱1,134,400 d. ₱1,210,000
16. A woman borrowed ₱800,000.00 at 7¹/₂ % per annum simple

interest. On the same day, she lent it to Georgina at the
same rate but compounded annually. How much does she gain at
the end of 2 years?
a. ₱2,600 c. ₱3,800
b. ₱4,500 d. ₱5,200
17. In simple interest, a sum of money doubles itself in 10

years. Find the number of years it will take to triple
itself.
a. 20 years b. 15 years c. 24 years d. 18 years
18. In simple interest, a sum of money amounts to ₱310,000.00 in

2 years and ₱370,000.00 in 3 years. Find the principal.
a. ₱192,000 c. ₱190,000
b. ₱186,000 d. ₱184,000
19. The simple interest on a sum of money for 2 years at 6% per

annum is ₱45,000.00. What will be the compound interest on
that sum at the same rate and for the same period?
a. ₱48,220 c. ₱40,240
b. ₱44,380 d. ₱46,350

- 167 -
SPEED – DISTANCE - TIME
Speed - This tells us how slow or fast an object moves. It describes
the distance travelled divided by the time taken to cover the
distance. Speed refers to the measure of how quickly an object moves
from one point to another. The speed of any particular object refers
to the magnitude of its velocity. It is certainly a scalar quantity.
Distance – Refers to the amount of space which exists between any two
points. It can also be explained as the amount something has moved.
Furthermore, the measurement of distance takes place in units like
miles, kilometers, meters, centimeters, millimeters, yards, and
inches. Moreover, the distance in which something travels has a
relation with the change in position.
Time - Refers to the progression of events. This progression is in
such a manner that it goes from the past to the present and into the
future. Therefore, if there is a system which is unchanging in nature,
then it is timeless. Furthermore, time is not something that one can
see, touch, or taste. One can only measure its passage.
TIPS ON HOW TO ANSWER

b. Understand the problem carefully.
c. Determine what is missing or what is ask.
d. Use the formula that corresponds to the given problem.
Speed, Time & Distance Conversions
• To convert from km / hour to m / sec, we multiply by 5 / 18. So,

1 km / hour = 5 / 18 m / sec
• To convert from m / sec to km / hour, we multiply by 18 / 5. So,
1 m / sec = 18 / 5 km / hour = 3.6 km / hour
• Similarly, 1 km/hr = 5/8 miles/hour
• 1 yard = 3 feet
• 1 kilometer= 1000 meters = 0.6214 mile
• 1 mile= 1.609 kilometer
• 1 hour= 60 minutes= 60*60 seconds= 3600 seconds
• 1 mile = 1760 yards
• 1 yard = 3 feet
• 1 mile = 5280 feet
• 1 mph = (1 x 1760) / (1 x 3600) = 22/45 yards/sec
• 1 mph = (1 x 5280) / (1 x 3600) = 22/15 ft/sec
• For a certain distance, if the ratio of speeds is a : b, then
the ratio of times taken to cover the distance would be b : a
and vice versa.

- 168 -
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒
FORMULA OF SPEED → Speed =
𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒
Example:
1. If it takes 3 hours to drive a distance of 192km on a motorway,

what would be your average speed in km/h?
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 192 𝑘𝑚
Speed = = = 64 km/h
𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 3 ℎ𝑟𝑠.
2. What is your average speed in mph if you travel 15 miles in 2

hours and 30 minutes?
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 15 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠 15 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠 1

Speed = = = = miles/minute
𝑇𝑖𝑚𝑒 2.5 ℎ𝑟𝑠. 150 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑢𝑡𝑒𝑠. 10
Explanation: The conversion of 2 hrs. and 30 minutes = 150

1
minutes. We need to simplify the numbers and come up with
10
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒
FORMULA OF TIME → Time =
𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑
Example:
I. If you were travelling at 30 miles per hour, how long would

it take to travel a distance of 70 miles?
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 70 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠
Time = =
𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 30 𝑚𝑖𝑙𝑒𝑠/ℎ𝑟.
= 2.33 x 60 = 140 minutes or 2 hrs. & 20 minutes
II. A bus travels at 54km/h while moving but after accounting

for stopping time, to let passengers on and off the coach,
it averages a speed of 45km/h. How many minutes does the bus
stop for each hour?
𝐷𝑖𝑠𝑡𝑎𝑛𝑐𝑒 9 𝑘𝑚
Time = = = = 0.16 hours = 0.16 x 60 = 10 minutes
𝑆𝑝𝑒𝑒𝑑 54𝑘𝑚/ℎ
FORMULA OF DISTANCE → Distance = Speed x Time
Example:
3. John decided to cycle to his friend’s house at a speed of 5km/h

and the journey took 2 hours. How far did John cycle?

- 169 -
Distance = Speed x Time
Distance = 5km/hr. x 2hrs. = 10 km/h
4. Sally runs at a pace of 8km/h. If she ran for a period of four

hours, how far has she travelled?
Distance = Speed x Time
Distance = 8km/h x 4hrs. = 32km/h
EXERCISES:
1. Arvin drives his lorry for 400 miles, which takes him 8 hours.
Hernan drives 200 miles, which takes him 4.5 hours. Who is
travelling faster?
a. Arvin with 44.44 mph c. Arvin with 50 mph
b. Hernan with 50 mph d. Hernan with 44.44 mph
2. Jennylyn runs a 5km race with her running club every Saturday.
She runs this in 40 minutes. If she maintains the same speed, how
long would it take her to run the 8km race?
a. 1 hr. and 4 minutes c. 1 hr. and 20 minutes
b. 1 hr. and 10 minutes d. 1 hr. and 40 minutes
3. Rowena goes on a cycling trip. In the first half of the journey,

she travels at 10mph for 2 hours. In the second half, she travels
at 20mph for 90 minutes. How far does she travel in total?
a. 38 miles b. 45 miles c. 48 miles d. 50 miles
4. Jimboy travels from his home to office at 4km/hr. and reaches his
office 20 min late. If the Speed had been 6 km/hr. he would have
reached 10 min early. Find the distance from his home to office.
a. 12km b. 10km c. 6km d. 4km
5. Lance can row a boat in still water at 10 kmph. He decides to go
boating in a river. To row upstream he takes 2 hours and to row
downstream he takes 1 ½ hours. Find the Speed of the river.
a. 5/10 km/h b. 10/7 km/h c. 9.7 km/h d. 11/5 km/h
6. Reagan and Thom are standing at two ends of a room with a width
of 30 m. They start walking towards each other along the width of
the room with a Speed of 2 m/s and 1 m/s, respectively. Find the
total distance travelled by Reagan when he meets Thom for the
third time.
a. 100m b. 110m c. 114m d. 116m

- 170 -
7. A man decided to cover a distance of 6 km in 84 minutes. He

decided to cover two thirds of the distance at 4 km / hr. and the
remaining at some different speed. Find the speed after the two
third distance has been covered.
a. 8km/h b. 10km/h c. 15km/h d. 5km/h
8. While going to office, Jay travels at a speed of 30 kmph and on

his way back, he travels at a speed of 45 kmph. What is his
average speed of the whole journey?
9. A dog runs from one side of a park to the other side. Furthermore,
the park happens to be 80.0 meters across. The dog takes exactly
16.0 seconds to cross the park. Find out the speed of the dog?
a. 9m/s b. 3m/s c. 8m/s d. 5m/s
10. If Jomar drives his car in the speed 50 miles per hour,
how far can he cover in 2.5 hours?
a. 125miles b. 120miles c. 140miles d. 135miles
11. If a person travels at a speed of 40 miles per hour. At the

same rate, how long will he take to cover 160 miles distance?
a. 2hrs. b. 4hrs. c. 8hrs. d. 6hrs.
12. Johnrey travels at a speed of 60 miles per hour. How far

will he travel in 4.5 hours?
a. 270miles b. 170miles c. 370miles d. 470miles
13. Xander travels at a speed of 60 kms per hour. Then how

many meters can he travel in 5 minutes?
a. 300m b. 420m c. 500m d. 520m
14. Jeff covers 108 kms in 3 hours. What is his speed in

meter per second?
a. 2m/s b. 15m/s c. 5m/s d. 10m/s

15. Rezilda covers 90 kms in 2 hours 30 minutes. Find the speed
in meter per second.
a. 10m/s b. 9m/s c. 8m/s d. 7m/s

- 171 -
16. Marvin travels at the rate of 60 miles per hour and covers
300 miles in 5 hours. If he reduces his speed by 10 miles
per hour, how long will he take to cover the same distance?
a. 10 hrs. b. 6hrs. c. 7hrs. d. 8hrs.
17. Sonny travels 50 kms per hour. If he increases his speed by

10 kms per hour, how many minutes will he take to cover 8000
meters?
a. 5minutes b. 8minutes c. 4minutes d. 10minutes
18. Anna can travel at the speed of 40 miles per hour. If the
speed is increased by 50%, how long will it take to cover
330 miles?
a. 3hrs. and 50 minutes c. 6hrs. and 30 minutes

b. 4hrs. and 20 minutes d. 5 hrs. and 30 minutes
19. Josh speed at a rate of 40 kms per hour. If he increases his

speed by 20%, what is his new speed in meter per minute?
a. 800m/minutes c. 500m/minutes
b. 700m/minutes d. 400m/minutes
20. An aircraft carrier made a trip to Guam and back. The trip
there took three hours and the trip back took four hours. It
averaged 6 km/h on the return trip. Find the average speed
of the trip there.
21. Andy left the science museum and drove south. Thalia left
three hours later driving 42 km/h faster in an effort to
catch up to him. After two hours Thalia finally caught
up. Find Andy's average speed.
22. Kali left school and traveled toward her friend's house at
an average speed of 40 km/h. Matt left one hour later and
traveled in the opposite direction with an average speed of
50 km/h. Find the number of hours Matt needs to travel before
they are 400 km apart.
a. 8hrs. b. 3hrs. c. 9hrs. d. 4 hrs.

- 172 -
LOGICAL AND ANALYTICAL REASONING
I. ALPHA NUMERIC SERIES
• Is a sequence which consists of both alphabets and numbers, or

a combination of numbers, alphabets and symbol-based series.
These series can be of following topics:

F. Numerical series
G. Alphanumeric series
H. Alphanumeric Symbol Sequence series
NUMERICAL SERIES
- It consists of some set of numbers only and you have to perform
the operations on it as per the requirement of the question.
Example #1: If in each number, the first and the last digits are
interchanged, then how many numbers are odd?
352, 575, 669, 339, 883
a. One b. Three c. Four d. Two
STEP 1: Interchange the numbers → 253 575 966 933 388

STEP 2: Identify what are the odd number/s formed. → 253 575 933
STEP 3: Answer: The correct answer is choice B. There are 3 odd
numbers formed in a new sequence namely, 253 575 933
Example #2: If all the four digits of the number sequence are arranged
in ascending order, which of the following will be the biggest number?
4122, 5672, 2111, 1368, 2903, 1395,
a. 5672 b. 6725 c. 7256 d. 2567
STEP 1: Arrange the numbers in ascending order, the new sequence

order would be: 1224 2567 1112 1368 0239 1359.
STEP 2: Identify the biggest number on the new sequence.
STEP 3: Answer: The correct answer is choice D. Because, the biggest
number in the new sequence is 2567.

- 173 -
ALPHANUMERIC SERIES
- This series will be consisting of alphabets and numbers only.
Example #1: How many such consonants are there in a sequence which are
both immediately preceded by and immediately followed by a number.
F 6 H 8 W I 9 Y 4 K 3 L 3 T J E 9 1 0 M 1
a. 4 b. 2 c. 5 d. 3
STEP 1: study the sequence. Look for the consonants that are both
immediately preceded by and immediately followed by a number.
STEP 2: The consonants are H, K, L, M.
STEP 3: Answer: The correct answer is choice A.
Example #2: After dropping all the numbers, which letter will be second
to the left of the fifth letter from the right end?
F 6 H 8 W I 9 Y 4 K 3 L 3 T J E 9 1 0 M 1
a. F b. H c. Y d. W
STEP 1: Drop all the numbers in the sequence. The new sequence is
F H W I Y K L T J E M.
STEP 2: Find the fifth letter from the right end.
F H W I Y K L T J E M. The fifth letter from right end is L.
STEP 3: Find the letter which is second to the left.
F H W I Y K L T J E M. The second letter to the left is Y.
STEP 4: The correct answer is choice C.
ALPHANUMERIC SYMBOL SEQUENCE SERIES

- It will contain alphabets, numbers, and symbols arranged in a
sequence.
Example #1: How many symbols are preceded by a digit and succeeded by
a vowel?
A ? I 4 > 7 C 6 = U K 8 3 # O 5 Z 1 & E 2 < *
a. 2 b. 3 c. 1 d. 4
STEP 1: Find the symbols in the sequence. ?, >, =, #, &

STEP 2: Determine whether the symbols were preceded by digits.
STEP 3: Determine whether the symbols were succeeded by a vowel.
STEP 4: Answer: The correct answer is choice B.

- 174 -
EXERCISES
1. Among the certain codes below, which of the following digits

stands for “Pens” in that code.
I. 453 means Pens are new

II. 362 means Boys are young
III. 598 means Purchase new clothes.
a. 4 b. 8 c. 3 d. 6
2. Find the term which does not fit in the series 1CV, 5FU, 9IT,
15LS, 17OR
a. 17OR b. 9IT c. 15LS d. 5FU
3. Choose the correct alternative from the given ones that will
complete the series. 24, 29, 39, __, 74
a. 49 b. 54 c. 44 d. 50
4. Complete the following number series. 480, ___, 24, 8, 4
a. 88 b. 94 c.96 d. 98
For item 5 – 8, Refer to the sequence below.
1 ! ) G 3 * ! & B @ ) 5 & E & ^ I % # O 7 & ! $ # &
5. How many symbols do the alpha-numeric series have?
a. 17 b. 18 c. 19 d. 20
6. How many numbers are followed by an alphabet if the second half

of the series is reversed?
a. 1 b. 3 c. 2 d. 0
7. Which of the following are related, in some way or the other?
a. G, B b. B, E c. E, % d. G, O
8. The sum of the numbers that represent the position of all the
alphabets is?
a. 60 b.64 c. 63 d. 61

- 175 -
6 7 # U V E ? 5 * L H 8 S A 9 T 4 $ F 3 % ( G D 8 M 2 X Z W
9. How many symbols are there in the series which are immediately
preceded by a number and immediately followed by a letter?
a. Four b. One c. Three d. Two
10. If all the symbols are dropped from the series, which
letter/number will be eleventh to the left of fifteenth
letter/number from you left?
a. 2 b. V c. 6 d. Z
11. If the position of the first and the sixteenth elements, the
second and the seventeenth elements, and so on up to the
eleventh and the twenty-sixth elements, are interchanged,
which letter/number/ symbol will be seventh to the right of
nineteenth letter/number/symbol from the right?
a. E b. # c. 5 d. U
12. If the positions of the letters in the sequence are re-

occupied by the letters themselves though after getting
rearranged alphabetically from the left, which of the
following will indicate the position of L in the new
arrangement?
a. Both A and C c. L is between * and M

b. L is 17th from the right d. L is 14th from the left
13. What is the total number of ‘the numbers immediately followed

by a letter’ and ‘the symbols immediately following the
letters’ together in the above sequence?
a. Three b. Five c. Two d. Six
D 5 4 I H * $ K E 3 L B @ A R M 1 6 F % J £ 2 7 C G 9
14. If the position of ten elements from the right end is

reversed then which of the following will be the fifth to
the right of the thirteenth from the right end?
a. C b. @ c. £ d. H

- 176 -
15. Four of the following five are alike in a certain way on the
basis of their positions in the above arrangement and so
form a group. Which is the one that does not belong to the
group?
a. 3LB b. $FE c. @MA D. RJ%
16. How many such consonants are there in the above arrangements
each of which is immediately preceded by a vowel and also
immediately followed by another consonant?
a. Three b. Five c. Two d. One
17. If all the digits are dropped from the above arrangement,
which of the following will be the fourth to the left of the
seventh from the right end.
a. * b. D c. $ d. B
18. How many such symbols are there in the above arrangement
each of which is either immediately followed or immediately
preceded by a consonant but not both?
a. One b. Two c. Three d. None of these
527, 647, 581, 495, 251, 384
19. If ‘2’ is added to first digit of each of the number, then

all the digits are arranged in descending order within the
number, which would be the smallest number in the given set
after the above arrangement?
a. 251 b. 647 c. 495 d. 527
20. Which of the following is the second digit of the second

lowest number if all the digits of the all the numbers are
arranged in ascending order within the number?
a. 7 b. 5 c. 3 d. 1
21. Which of the following is the sum of first and last digit of
the third highest number?
a. 9 b. 16 c. 12 d. 7

- 177 -
II. DIRECTION AND DISTANCE
• Is the information contained in the relative position of one

point with respect to another point without the distance
information. Directions may be either relative to some
indicated reference or absolute according to some previously
agreed upon frame of reference.
Topics:
1. The right and left directional movement

2. The directions of sun rays and shadow
3. Directions in Clocks
THE RIGHT AND LEFT DIRECTIONAL MOVEMENT

- The right and left movement of a person is always with reference
to the body moving in the scenario. It is not with respect to
the person who is solving the questions.
Example:
1. A person is walking towards you, and after walking for a few

meters, he takes a right turn. Which direction is he moving?
SOLOTION: The direction we are facing is always assumed as North.

Hence, if a person is walking towards us, he is walking
facing (towards) South.
ANSWER: He is moving towards South.
2. Danilo walks 5 km towards the south and then turns to the right.
After walking 3 km he turns to the left and walks 5 km. What
direction is he facing right now?
SOLUTION: Point A
Point C
Point B
5 km 3 km
Point D ANSWER: Danilo is facing South

- 178 -
THE DIRECTIONS OF SUN RAYS AND SHADOW
- The shadow of a person or any object always appears in the

opposite direction from the light source. Shadow during the
time of Sunrise: During the sunrise, the shadow of an object
will always be towards the west.
The table below summarizes the relation of shadow with respect to the
direction and time:
DIRECTION VS. TIME MORNING EVENING
When facing North The shadow is at left The shadow is at left
When facing South The shadow is at right The shadow is at left
Example:
1. One morning after sunrise, Nancy and Raphael were sitting in a

lawn with their backs towards each other. Nancy’s shadow fell
exactly towards her left-hand side. Which direction was Raphael
facing?
SOLUTION: Since it was morning and Nancy’s shadow fell exactly

to her left-hand side, Nancy was facing North, hence, Raphael
should be facing South.
Answer: Raphael was facing South.
2. June is walking on the street early in the morning facing North,

he turned left after reaching street crossing, if his shadow was
at the South, which direction was June facing?
SOLUTION: We can say that June shadow is at left when he was

walking on the street facing North early in the morning, the same
as his shadow was at the West part. When he turned left his shadow
was at the South, therefore he must be facing West.
ANSWER: June was facing West.

- 179 -
DIRECTIONS IN CLOCK
- In directions in clocks, the direction in which the number ‘12’

exists was considered as the North for the reference. And all
the remaining directions were marked accordingly. Hence, the
numbers ‘3’, ‘6’ and ‘9’ were considered to be at East, South,
and West, respectively.
The table below summarizes the directions using the clock.
CLOCK TIME DIRECTION

12:00 North
6:00 South
3:00 East
9:00 West
Example:
A clock is so placed that at 2:00 p.m. the minute hand points towards
North-west. In which direction does the hour hand point at 6:00 p.m.?
SOLUTION: If the Minute hand is at 12 which is North-West, then

at 6.00 p.m. the hour hand will be pointing at the
number 6. Since the numbers 12 and 6 are exactly the
opposite. The opposite of North-West should be
South-East.
ANSWER: Therefore, 6:00 pm must be at South-East direction.
At 9 PM, the hour-hand of a clock is pointing to North-West direction.

To what direction will the minute hand point at 9:30 PM?
SOLUTION: The hour hand of the clock is points 9, meaning it is

in the West direction. The minute hand of the clock points at 6,
which is at the South direction. Hence, 9:30 pm is at South-West
direction.
ANSWER: Therefore, 9:30 pm must be at South-West direction.
At 3:30, the minute hand of a clock is towards West. At 12 oclock, the

minute hand of the clock will be towards which direction?
ANSWER: The minute hand will be towards East.

- 180 -
EXERCISES
1. A boy is walking 8m point O to point P in north side. He takes
he takes right turn an after walking 2m he reaches point B. He
then takes left and again walks 2m. Finally, he left turn and
walk 8m and reach point C. Find the distance between point O to
point C.
a. 5 m b. 10 m c. 8 m d. 4 m
2. Reynaldo moves 20 Km North, then he turns right and moves 25 Km.

Again, he turns right and moves 15 Km. Finally, he turns right
and reaches 25 Km. How far is he from his starting point?
a. 5 km b. 10 km c. 15 km d. 20 km
3. Jack walks point A to north direction. He takes right turn then

he take left turn he takes again left turn. Which direction is
he facing now?
a. South b. North c. West d. East

4. One morning after sunrise, Suresh was standing facing a pole. The
shadow of the pole fell exactly to his right. To which direction
was he facing?
a. North b. East c. West d. South
5. Lando is facing East. Turning to the right he go 20 m, then

turning to the left he go 20 m and turning to the right he go 20
m, then again turning to the right he go 40 m and then again he
go 40 m to the right. In which direction does he is facing from
his original position?
a. North b. East c. West d. South
6. John Paul is facing West. He turns 45 degrees in the clockwise

direction and then another 180 degrees in the same direction and
then 270 degrees in the anticlockwise direction.Find which
direction he is facing now?
a. South-West b. South c. North-East d. East
7. One morning Paulino and Benidicto were talking to each other face
to face at a crossing. Benidicto shadow was exactly to the left
of Paulino, which direction was Paulino facing?
a. South b. East c. West d. North

- 181 -
8. Airplanes A, B, C and D started flight towards east. After flying
125 kms planes A and D flew towards right while planes B and C
flew towards left. After 115 km, planes B and C flew towards
their left while planes A and D also turned towards their left.
In which directions are the airplanes A, B, D, C respectively
flying now?
a. North, South, East, West c. East, West, East, West
b. East, West, West, East d. South, North, North, South
9. Jerome is in the East of Cedrick which is in the North of Mark.

If Benjamin is in the South of Mark, then in which direction of
Jerome is Benjamin?
a. Mark is in the South-West of Benjamin.

b. Cedrick is in the North-East of Mark.
c. Jerome is in the South-East of Cedrick.
d. Benjamin is in the South-West of Jerome.
10. If South-East becomes North, North-East becomes West and so

on. What will West become?
a. North-East b. North-West c. South-East d. South-West
11. Kennedy walks 5 km toward south and then turns to the right.
After walking 3 km he turns to the left and walks 5 km. Now
in which direction is he from the starting place?
a. West b. South-West c. North d. North-West
12. Mathew put his timepiece on the table in such a way that at
6 P.M. hour hand points to North. In which direction the
minute hand will point at 9.15 P.M.?
a. 45m, East b. 15m, West c. 25m, West d. 35m, East
13. Alvin is facing towards West, and turns through 45 degree

clockwise again 180 degree clockwise then turns 270-degree
anti-clockwise. In which direction is he facing now?
a. North-East c. South-East
b. North-West d. South-West
14. Dennis go North, he turns right and pause, he turns right

again then go left. In which direction Dennis is facing now?
a. North b. East c. South d. West

- 182 -
15. A dog run 20m towards East and turns to right and runs 10m,
he turns right and runs 9m, he turns to left and run 5m,
then turns to left and run 12m, finally, turns to left and
runs 6m Which direction a dog is facing now?
a. North b. South c. East d. West
16. Eric walks 10m in front, and 10 m to the right. Every time
turning to his left, he walks 5m, 15m and 15m. How far is he
now from his starting point?
a. 20m b. 15m c. 10m d. 5m
17. Peter walked 30m towards East, took a right turn and walked
40m. he took a left turn and walked 30m. In which direction
is he now from the starting point?
a. North-East b. South-East c. North-West d. South-West
18. A water flows in a tube from West to East, it turns left and
goes in a semi-circle round hillock then turn left at right
angles. In which direction does water is flowing now?
a. North b. West c. East d. South
19. Of the 5 friends Arthur, Alex, Anthony, Arvin, and Adam

situated close to each other, Arthur is to the West of Alex,
Anthony is to the South of Arthur, Adam is to the North of
Alex, and Arvin is to the East of Adam. Then Anthony is in
which direction with respect to Arvin?
a. North-East b. South-East c. North-West d. South-West
20. Juliet is performing yoga with her head down and legs up.
Her face is towards the West. In which direction his left
hand will be?
21. A clock is placed at 12 noon, its minute hand points towards

North-East. In which direction does its hour hand point at
1:30pm?

- 183 -
III. ALPHABET TEST
• It is a logical reasoning which focus to find the place of an

alphabet or a word based on the different types of arrangement.
Basic Concept and Tricks to Alphabet Test

1. Place a letter in forward order.
2. Place of letter in completely backward order.
3. Place of a letter when first half is in backward order.
4. Place of a letter when second half is in backward order.
5. Multiple letter segment in backward order.
6. Number of letters in the middle of two letters.
7. Middle letters between two letters.
8. Same position of Alphabet after arranging alphabetically.
Example:
1. Find the 11th letter to the left of the 20th letter from the
left in the English alphabet.
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a. K b. H c. I d. L
STEP 1: Find the 20th letter of the alphabet. → Letter “T”

STEP 2: Find the 11th letter from the left of “T” → I
STEP 3: Answer: The correct answer is choice C.
2. If the English alphabet is written in backward order, then what

will be the 13th letter to the left of the 3rd letter from
right?
Z Y X W V U T S R Q P O N M L K J I H G F E D C B A
a. P b. Q c. O d. N
STEP 1: Write the English alphabet in backward order.

STEP 2: Find the 3rd letter from the right. → Letter “c”
STEP 3: Find the 13th letter to the left, starting from “C”
STEP 4: Answer: The correct answer is choice A.

- 184 -
EXERCISES:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P R S T U V W X Y Z
1. If the above series is written in reverse order than what is

the eleventh letter of the fifteenth letter from your left?
a. V b. W c. E d. C
2. Based on the above series of English alphabets, if every alternate

alphabet starting from C is deleted than which of the following
alphabet will seventh from the left side of the series?
a. F b. S c. U d. G
3. In this series, find the letter which is fifth to the left from
the thirteenth letter from your right.
a. N b. Y c. H d. I
4. When you reverse the first half of alphabetical series, then

which letter will be the ninth to the left of ninth which is from
the right?
a. I b. G c. J d. H
5. In the alphabetical series which letter will be the ninth to the

left of the fifth letter which is from the right side?
a. L b. N c. O d. P
6. In the alphabetical series which letter will be the seventh to

the left of the twelfth letter from the right end?
a. J b. F c. H d. N
7. Which letter is fifth to the right of the eighteenth letter from

your right?
a. W b. L c. R d. N
8. If all the vowels are removed from the alphabet, which letter
will be the seventh to the right of the fifth letter from the
left?
a. T b. U c. V d. None of these

- 185 -
9. If the 1st half of the English alphabet is written in backward
order, what will be the 7th letter to the left of the 10th
letter to the right?
a. F b. D c. B d. G
10. If the 2nd half of the English alphabet is written backward,

what will be the 7th letter to the right of the 13th letter
from the left?
a. T b. S c. Y d. W
11. If the firs four letter of the English alphabet are written
in reverse order, then, the next 5 letters are written n
reverse order, then the next 6 letters are written in reverse
order, then the next 7 letters are written in reverse order,
and finally, the remaining letters are also written in
reverse order, what will be the 7th letter to the left of the
8th letter from the right?
a. J b. K c. L d. M
12. How many letters are there between the 8th letter from the
left and 7th letter from the right?
a. 14 b. 11 c. 16 d. 12
13. Which letter is in the middle of the 7th letter from the left
and the 10th letter from the right in the English alphabet?
a. O b. H c. L d. T
14. How many such letters are there in the word “CADMP” which
remain the same in their position if they are arranged in
alphabetical order.
a. Three b. One c. Four d. Two
15. From the English alphabet, what is the 5th letter from the
left of the 10th letter of the first half of the alphabet.
a. B b. A c. D d. E

- 186 -
IV. BLOOD RELATION
• Problems mainly deal with the hierarchical structure of a

family i.e., grand-parents, parents and children etc.
Different relationships between the family members of
different generations are given. To solve such questions, the
entire family tree is to be constructed by plotting out the
various relationships.
Here is the list of different types of relations you should know.
RELATIONSHIP TERM USED

Father's son or mother's son Brother
Father's daughter or mother's daughter Sister
Mother's brother (younger or elder) Maternal Uncle
Father's brother (younger or elder) Uncle (Paternal)
Father's sister (younger or elder) Aunt
Mother's sister (younger or elder) Aunt
Son's wife Daughter-in-law
Daughter's husband Son-in-law
Sister's husband Brother-in-law
Husband's brother or wife's brother Brother-in-law
Brother's wife Sister-in-law
Husband's sister or wife's sister Sister-in-law
Husband's father or wife's father Father-in-law
Husband's mother or wife's mother Mother-in-law
Brother's son or sister's son Nephew
Brother's daughter or sister's daughter Niece
Uncle's daughter or aunt's daughter Cousin
Uncle's son or aunt's son Cousin
Father's father or mother's father Grandfather
Father's mother or mother's mother Grandmother
Father of grandfather or father of grandmother Great grandfather
Mother of grandfather or Mother of grandmother Great grandmother
Tips on finding a relationship between two members of a family:
STEP 1: The first and foremost step is to choose the two persons
among whom the relationship is to be established.
STEP 2: Now once you have chosen the two persons, pin-point the
intermediate relationship between two persons, i.e. such
relationship through which long drawn relationship can be
established between the required persons.
STEP 3: Conclude the relationship between two required persons.

- 187 -
Example:
Pointing to a man on the stage, Jenny said, "He is the brother of the
daughter of the wife of my husband." How is the man on the stage
related to Jenny?
a. Son b. Nephew c. Husband d. Brother-in-law
Explanation: Wife of husband — Herself; Brother of daughter — Son. So,

the man is Jenny's son.
How is my father's mother's only daughter-in-law's daughter's father

related to me?
a. Son-in-law b. Son c. Nephew d. Father
Explanation: My father's mother's only daughter-in-law is my father's

wife i.e. my mother. My mother's daughter is my sister. My sister's
father is my father.
Ernesto is the son of Alma. Dominic is the son of Bernadeth. Ernesto

is married to Charmaine. Charmaine is Bernadeth's daughter. How is
Dominic related to Ernesto?
a. Father-in-law c. Uncle
b. Brother-in-law d. Brother
Explanation: Charmaine is Dominic’s daughter and Dominic is Bernadeth's

son. So, Dominic is the brother of Charmaine. Ernesto is a male married
to Charmaine. So, Ernesto is the husband of Charmaine, whose brother
is Dominic. So, Dominic is the brother-in-law of Ernesto.
EXERCISES:
1. Pointing to a man in a photograph, a woman said, "His brother's

father is the only son of my grandfather." How is the woman
related to the man in the photograph?
a. Aunt b. Mother c. Daughter d. Sister
2. A introduces B saying, "He is the husband of the granddaughter of

the father of my father ". How is A related to B?
a. Brother-in-law b. Son c. Grandson d. Father

- 188 -
3. Reynan is brother of Roger. Sissy is sister of Shaina. Roger is
son of Sissy.How is Reynan related to Sissy?
a. Father b. Nephew c. Son d. Uncle
4. Pointing to a man in a photograph. Ashley said. "His mother's

only daughter is my mother." How is Ashley related to that man?
a. Aunt b. Daughter c. Sister d. Niece
5. Rahul told Anand, 'Yesterday I defeated the only brother of the

daughter of my grandmother.' Whom did Rahul defeat?
a. Father b. Brother c. Uncle d. Son
6. Pointing to a gentleman, Dingdong said, "His only brother is the

father of my daughter's father." How the gentleman related to
Dingdong?
a. Nephew b. Uncle c. Son d. Grandfather
7. Lino introduces Elmer saying, "He is the husband of the

granddaughter of the father of my father ". How is Elmer related
to Lino?
a. Father-in-law c. Brother-in-law
b. Son-in-law d. Grandson
8. Ian is brother of Jeff. Kevin is father of Ian. Lance is brother

of Mary. Mary is daughter of Jeff. How Ian related to Lance? =
Uncle
a. Brother b. Son-in-law c. Father d. Uncle
9. Diego's mother is the only daughter of Manily’s father. How is

Manilyn's husband related to Diego?
a. Father b. Brother c. Grandson d. Son
10. Pointing to a photograph, a person tells his friend, "She is

the granddaughter of the elder brother of my father." How is
the girl in the photograph related to his Man?
a. Sister b. Niece c. Aunt d. Mother
11. Showing the man receiving the prize, Raymond said, "He is
the brother of my uncle's daughter." Who is the man to
Raymond?
a. Nephew b. Cousin c. Grandfather d. Son

- 189 -
12. Angelo is the son of Belinda and Caloy. Belinda's sister

has a son Danny and a daughter Eunice. Felipe is the maternal
uncle of Danny. How many nephews does Felipe have?
a. Four b. One c. Two d. Three
13. Pointing to a photograph, Vipul said, "She is the daughter

of my grandfather's only son." How is Vipul related to the
girl in the photograph?
a. Nephew b. Cousin c. Uncle d. Brother
14. Pointing to a vendor, a woman says, "This man's son's

sister is my mother-in-law." How is the woman's husband
related to the vendor?
a. Grandson b. Brother c. Father d. Uncle
15. If Nelsie says, "Aleli's father Romeo is the only son of my

father-in-law Mario, how is Belle, sister of Aleli, related
to Maario?
a. Wife b. Daughter c. Son d. None of these
16. Introducing a man, a woman said. "His wife is the only

daughter of my father." How is that man related to the woman?
a. Grandson b. Husband c. Grandfather d. Son
17. Lando said, "This girl is the wife of the grandson of my

mother." Who is Lando to the girl?
a. Father b. Father-in-law c. Son d. Husband
18. There are six children playing football, namely A, B, C, D,

E and F. A and E are brothers. F is the Sister of E. C is
the only son of A's Uncle. B and D are the daughters of the
brother of C's father. How is D related to A?
a. Nephew b. Niece c. Cousin d. Daughter
19. How is my father's brother's only sibling's mother related

to my sister's only brother?
a. Wife b. Niece c. Mother d. Grandmother
20. Q's mother is sister of P and daughter of M. S is daughter

of P and sister of T. How is M related to T?
a. Uncle b. Grandparent c. Husband d. Nephew

- 190 -
V. ORDER AND RANKING ARRANGEMENT
• The order and ranking questions mostly deal with the rank or
position of a person or thing either counted from top to bottom
or from left to right and vice-versa.
There are many different types of cases which are asked from order
and ranking. Here, below are the types of these cases:
• Rank of a person from the right or left side

• Total number of people for the data which is given
• Maximum or minimum number of people in one row
• Total number of people between the two people
• After interchanging the position rank of a person
RANK OF A PERSON FROM THE RIGHT OR LEFT SIDE
Here we are required to find the number of people who are in a row.
The rank of two people and the total number of people sitting between
two people is given to us. There are two cases possible in this
scenario.
One is an overlapping case where a number of people > right position

of one person + left position of another person. So, the total people
= Sum of positions of two different people from both the sides + the
no. of people between two people.
Example:
1. There are 52 people in one row. Jonas is the 14th person from the
left side of this row. Jonard is a 10th person from the right
side. How many people are sitting between these two?
Answer: So, the total number of people between Jonas and Jonard
is 52 – (14 + 10) = 18.
TOTAL NUMBER OF PEOPLE FOR THE DATA WHICH IS GIVEN
We have to determine the number of people when the ranks of a person

are given from both the sides of the row.
Thus, Total persons are R1 + R2 – 1.
R represents the ranks of a person from both sides.

- 191 -
Example:
Position of Aldeo in a row is 26th from the right side of the row. He
is sitting 38th from the left side of the row. Find out the total
number of people in the row.
Answer: The total people will be (position of Atul from the left
side + the position of Atul from the right side) – 1. Thus, total
people = (38 + 26) – 1 = 63
MAXIMUM OR MINIMUM NUMBER OF PEOPLE IN ONE ROW
In this scenario, the position of two persons are given and their
positions are interchanged in a row. Here the interchanging the
position for a 1st person is from the same side as that before the
interchange.
So, a new position for the 2nd person from the side is the position of
the 2nd person from the similar side before the interchange + (position
of 1st after the interchange – position of 1st before interchange from
the similar side).
Total people = Sum of the person from both the sides – 1. Total people
between two persons = Difference in the people’s position who position
from the similar side after and before the interchange is provided –
1.
Example:
Philip is 13th from the left side and Kendrick is 20th from the right
side in a row. They decided to interchange their positions, now Philip
becomes 18th from the left side. What will Kendrick’s position from
the right?
Answer: Total boys given in the row = Right side + Left side –
1. This is 18 + 20 – 1 = 37. Kendrick’s position from the right
side = Total number of boys – Left end + 1 = 37 – 13 + 1 = 25
EXERCISES:
1. In a row of delegates, Fernando and Errol occupy the ninth place

from the right end and tenth place from the left end,
respectively. If they interchange their places, Fernando and Errol
occupy seventeenth place from the right and eighteenth place from
the left, respectively. How many delegates are there in the row?
a. 28 b. 26 c. 24 d. 22

- 192 -
2. Jamiaca and Jasmine are ranked seventh and eleventh respectively
from the top in a class of 31 students. What will be their
respective ranks from the bottom in the class?
a. 25th and 21st c. 26th and 22nd

b. 20th and 24th d. 24th and 22nd
3. Shaina ranks seventh from the top and twenty eighth from the
bottom in a class. How many students are there in the class?
a. 32 b. 38 c. 34 d. 40
4. In a row of girls, Donna Mae is eighth from the left, and Michaella
is seventeenth from the right. If they interchange their
positions, Donna Mae becomes fourteenth from the left. How many
girls are there in the row?
a. 29 b. 35 c. 37 d. 30
5. John John ranked ninth from the top and thirty eighth from the
a. 43 b. 49 c. 46 d. 44
6. In a queue, Annie is 10th from the front while Anabelle is 25th

from behind and Jovelyn is just in the middle of the two. If there
be 50 persons in the queue, what position does Jovelyn occupy
from the front?
a. 17th b. 18th c. 19th d. 20th
7. There are 10 boys sitting in a row, when Marlon was shifted by

two places towards the left, he became seventh from the left end.
What was his earlier position from the right end of the row?
a. Third b. First c. Fifth d. Second
8. Daryll is eighth from the right and Willy is twelfth from the
left. When Daryll and Willy interchange positions, Willy becomes
twenty first from the left. Which of the following will be
Daryll's position from the right?
a. 17th b. 16th c. 15th d. 14th
9. Liza ranks 18th in a class of 49 students. What is her rank from

the last?
a. 31st b. 33rd c. 32nd d. 30th

- 193 -
10. Remy is 7 ranks ahead of Judy in a class of 39. If Judy’s
rank is seventeenth from the last, what is Remy’s rank from
the start?
a. 14th b. 18th c. 16th d. 12th
11. In a queue of children, Luke is fifth from the left and

Vincent is sixth from the right. When they interchange their
places among themselves, Luke becomes thirteenth from the
left. Then, what will be Vincent’s position from the right?
a. 17th b. 14th c. 18th d. 15th
12. In a queue, Adrian is 10th from the front while Marvin is

25th from behind and Melvin is just in the middle of the
two. If there be 50 persons in the queue, what position does
Melvin occupy from the front?
a. 15th b. 16th c. 17th d. 18th
13. In a row of boys, if A who is tenth from the left and B who
is ninth from the right interchange their positions. A
becomes fifteenth from the left. How many boys are there in
the row?
a. 23 b. 24 c. 25 d. 26
14. In a row of girls, Romy Rose is fifth from the left and
Princess is sixth from the right. When they exchange their
positions, then Romy Rose becomes thirteenth from the left.
What will be Princess’ position from the right?
a. 12th b. 15th c. 14th d. 16th
15. In a row, Albert is fifteenth from the left and Bernard is

fourth from the right. There are three boys between Albert
and Bernard, Christian is just left of Albert. What is the
Christian’s position from the right?
a. 6th b. 9th c. 7th d. 8th
16. Daniel ranks sixteenth from the top and forty ninth from the
a. 64 b. 52 c. 62 d. 58
17. Rajan ranks eighteenth in a class of 49 students. What is

his rank from the last?
a. 28th b. 32nd c. 26th d. 35th

- 194 -
V. SEATING ARRANGEMENT
• Seating arrangement questions are based on the seating sequence

pattern, direction, facing outside or inside.
• Is a sequential arrangement of objects/persons on the basis of
predefined condition.
TYPES OF SEATING ARRANGMENT

1. Linear/Row Arrangement
2. Circular Arrangement
3. Other Geometrical shape Arrangement
LINEAR / ROW ARANGEMENT

• a proper arrangement is required to be done in a linear format
along a straight line.
Example:
A ,B, C, D and E are five men sitting in a line facing to south - while
M, N, O, P and Q are five ladies sitting in a second line parallel to
the first line and are facing to North. B who is just next to the left
of D, is opposite to Q. C and N are diagonally opposite to each other.
E is opposite to O who is just next right of M. P who is just to the
left of Q, is opposite to D. M is at one end of the line.
1. In the original arrangement, who is sitting just opposite to N?

ANSWER: A is the one who is sitting opposite to N.
2. Which of the following pair is diagonally opposite to each

other?
ANSWER: A and M is diagonally opposite to each other.

- 195 -
CIRCULAR ARRANGEMENT
• In circular arrangement, persons/objects are arranged around a
circle facing towards or outside the center on the basis of
information provided.
Example:
Billy, Bonny, Binnoy, Baki, Beloy , Banny and Basty are seven friends
and are sitting in a circle facing the center of the circle. Basty is
second to the left of Baki and is the neighbor of Beloy and Banny.
Baki is not a neighbor of Binnoy or Beloy. Billy is neighbor of Bonny
and Binnoy.
1. Which of the following is correct?
a. Bonny is between Billy and Baki.
b. Baki is between Banny and Billy.
c. Beloy is to the immediate right of Basty.
d. Banny is to the immediate left of Basty.
2. Which of the following has the pair with the second person sitting
to the immediate right of the first person?
a. Bonny and Banny c. Beloy and Binnoy
b. Basty and Banny d. Billy and Beloy
OTHER GEOMETRICAL SHAPE ARRANGEMENT

• In this type, questions are asked to arrange the persons in
square, rectangle, pentagon, hexagon or any other geometrical
shape.
A. Square/Rectangular Arrangement - In this type of

arrangement, objects/persons are placed around a rectangular
or a square shaped table facing either at the center or the
direction opposite to center. The left and right of each
person in both the cases can be understood with the help of
the following diagrams.
B. Pentagonal arrangement - In this type of arrangement,
objects/persons are placed around a pentagonal plane facing
either at the center or the direction opposite to center.
The left and right of each person in both the cases can be
understood with the help of the following diagrams.
C. Hexagonal arrangement - In this type of arrangement,
objects/persons are placed around a hexagonal plane facing
either at the center or the direction opposite to center.
The left and right of each person in both the cases can be
understood with the help of the following diagrams.

- 196 -
Example:
Six friends Josephine, Joanna, Jenny, Jennifer, Jacky and Judith are
sitting around the hexagonal table each at one corner and are facing
the center of the hexagonal. Josephine is second to the left of Judith.
Joanna is neighbor of Jenny and Jennifer. Jacky is second to the left
of Jennifer.
Which one is sitting opposite to Josephine?
a. Jennifer b. Joanna c. Jacky d. Judith
Who is the fourth person to the left of Joanna?
a. Jacky b.Judith c. Josephine d. Jenny
Which of the following are the neighbors of P ? = t and r
a. Joanna and Jenny c. Josephine and Judith

b. Jacky and Jenny d. Joanna and Judith
EXERCISES:
For item 1 – 5, Refer to the following sequence.
Eight friends Kelly, Timothy, King, Dave, Edna, Charles, Christine and
Harold are sitting around a circle facing the center. Timothy is third
to the right of Kelly who is third to the right of King. Charles is
second to the right of Edna who is not an immediate neighbor of Timothy.
Dave sits second to the left of Harold who sits second to the left of
Christine.
1. Who sits second to the left of Kelly?
a. Christine b. Edna c. Charles d. King
2. Who sits to the immediate left of Timothy?
a. Kelly b. Dave c. Harold d. King
3. What is the position of H with respect of Charles?
a. Third to the right

b. To the immediate right
c. Third to the left
d. Second to the left

- 197 -
4. Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based on
their positions in the given arrangement and so from a group.
Which is the one that does not belong to the group?
a. Harold and Christine c. Timothy and Charles

b. Edna and Charles d. Kelly and King
5. Which of the following pairs has the first person sitting to the
immediate right of the second person?
a. King and Dave c. Charles and Kelly

b. Timothy and Christine d. Dave and Charles
Armando, Delfin, Rolly, Norman, Benjie, Lino and Thomas are sitting in
a row facing North. Lino is to the immediate right of Benjie. Benjie
is 4th to the right of Thomas. Rosalina is the neighbor of Delfin and
Norman. Person who is third to the left of Norman is at one of ends.
6. What is the position of Armando?
a. Extreme right c. Center

b. Between Benjie and Norman d. Extreme left
7. Who are the neighbors of Delfin?
a. Rolly and Armando c. Rolly and Norman

b. Rolly and Lino d. Rolly and Thomas
8. Which of the following statement is not true?
a. Thomas is to the immediate left of Delfin

b. Armando is at one of the ends
c. Benjie is to the immediate left of Norman
d. Lino is second to the right of Norman
9. Who are to the left of Rolly?
a. Only Delfin
b. Norman and Lino
c. Only Benjie
d. Thomas and Delfin

- 198 -
Dante, Larry, Lovely, Sheila, Miko, Mar, Cindy and Rico are sitting
around a circular table facing the center but not necessarily in the
same order. Only three people sit between Rico and Cindy. Miko sits
third to the right of Mar. Mar is neither an immediate neighbor of
Rico nor Cindy. Dante is an immediate neighbor of Cindy. Only three
people sit between Dante and Larry. Only one person sits between Larry
and Sheila. Sheila is not an immediate neighbor of Rico.
10. Who among the following sits second to the left of Mar?
a. Cindy b. Miko c. Sheila d. Larry
11. Who amongst the following represent the immediate neighbors

of Rico?
a. Mar and Miko c. Larry and Miko
b. Lovely and Dante d. Rico and Sheila
12. Which amongst the following is true regarding Lovely, as

per the given arrangement?
a. Only three people sit between Mar and Lovely
b. None of the given statements is true
c. Miko sits second to the left of Lovely
d. Cindy is one of the immediate neighbors of Lovely
13. Four of the following five are alike in a certain way based
on their positions in the given arrangement and so form a
group. Which is the one that does not belong to that group?
a. Lovely, Larry, Miko c. Sheila, Larry, Mar
b. Cindy, Mar, Sheila d. Larry, Miko, Rico
14. How many people are seated between Mar and Dante when
counted from the left of Dante?
a. Two b. Four c. One d. Three
8 persons JJ, AJ, RJ, CJ, EJ, BJ, JB and LJ are seated around a square
table - two on each side. There are 3 boys who are not seated next to
each other. BJ is between LJ and AJ. RJ is between EJ and AJ. CJ, a is
second to the left of BJ. AJ is seated opposite to JJ.

- 199 -
15. Who among the following is to the immediate left of AJ?
a. BJ b. RJ c. LJ d. JJ
16. How many persons are seated between JB and AJ?
a. 4 b. 3 c. 2 d. 1
17. Who among the following is seated between JJ and CJ?
a. EJ b. BJ c. JJ d. JB
A, B, C, D and E are sitting on a bench. A is sitting next to B. C is

sitting next to D. D is not sitting with E who is on the left of the
bench. C is on the second position from the right. A is to the right
of B and E. A and C are sitting together. In which position A is
sitting?
18. In which position A is sitting?
a. Between B and D c. Between B and C

b. Between E and C d. Between D and A
19. Who is sitting to the left of C, who is third from the left
side.
a. D b. E c. B d. A
20. If D is the first from the right, wo is sitting beside of D

who is fourth from the left?
a. C b. A c. D d. B
21. Who is sitting on the right of E, who is fourth from the

right, and second from the left which is in the left of A?
a. D b. B c. A d. C
22. Which amongst the following is true.
a. A is between C and B
b. B is between E and A
c. C is between A and B
d. D is between A and C

- 200 -
VI. ASSUMPTION AND CONCLUSION

Assumptions - Are the unstated information needed to be valid for
the conclusion to hold true.
Conclusions - Are made based on the assumptions given, so conclusion
needs to agree with the given assumptions.
Here are some quick tips in finding assumptions and conclusions:

a. An assumption is an information not stated in the argument that
must be true for the argument’s conclusion to hold true. Look for
the missing or unstated premise to that that makes the conclusion
valid.
b. The conclusion must be based on the given premise/s. Check if the
answer has a connection with the given assumption.
c. Eliminate off-topic arguments. If the given choices are not in
any way connected with the given statement, eliminate these
unrelated answers.
d. Eliminate too broad answers. Check for answers which are opposite
with the given statement.
e. The correct assumption must connect the evidence to the
conclusion. Try to come up with one or several assumptions that
underpin the argument. Show that the evidence given is relevant
to the conclusion offered.
f. Try to analyze the cause and effect relationship and see if the
conclusion resulted.
Example:
1. The advisable age for a child to join a school is 5 years
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. At this age, the child is familiar to adaptability
II. After this age, kids do not like to go to school
III. Schools do not take admission of children who are more than
5 years old.
a. Only Assumption I follows
b. Both Assumptions I & III follow
c. Assumption I, II & III follow
d. Only Assumption II follows
Explanation: In the given statement it is mentioned that 5 years

is an advisable age for kids to join the school. The only sensible
assumption which proves the statement to be true is that chances
of kids getting more adaptable to the school at this young age
are very high

- 201 -
2. Food poisoning due to the consumption of liquor is very common
in rural areas.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. There are more illegal and unauthorized shops selling liquor

in villages and rural areas.
II. The ratio of people drinking liquor in villages is much more
than that in towns.
a. Both Assumption I and II follow

b. Neither Assumption I nor Assumption II follows
c. Only Assumption I follows
d. Assumption II follows but Assumption I does not follow
Explanation: The statement is talking about food poisoning due to

liquor so the number of people consuming liquor in towns or
villages is not the main concern here. Which is why the only
assumption I follow.
EXERCISES:
1. Artists are never ham-handed. All artists are inquisitive. Peter

is not ham-handed. Florence is not inquisitive.
CONCLUSION:
a. Inquisitive people are not ham-handed.

b. Peter is an artist.
c. Florence is not an artist.
d. Peter is not an artist.
2. Statement: It is desirable to put the child in school at the age

of 5 or so.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. At that age the child reaches appropriate level of

development and is ready to learn.
II. The schools do not admit children after six years of age.
a. Only assumption I is implicit

b. Only assumption II is implicit
c. Neither I nor II is implicit
d. Either I or II is implicit

- 202 -
3. Double your money in five months.' - An advertisement.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. The assurance is not genuine.

II. People want their money to grow.
a. Both I and II are implicit

c. Only assumption I is implicit
4. Unemployment allowance should be given to all unemployed Filipino

youth above 18 years of age.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. There are unemployed youth in the Philippines who needs

monetary support.
II. The government has sufficient funds to provide
allowance to all unemployed youth.

b. Neither I nor II is implicit
c. Only assumption II is implicit
d. Both I and II are implicit
5. In the Philippine show business, even if artists are gifted and

are packaged to perfection, they would still not automatically
become famous if the audience would not support and watch their
shows.
Which of the following is a correct conclusion that can be drawn

from the information provided?
a. Audience empathize with the artists who are humble.

b. The audience cannot stop an artist to become famous.
c. Untalented can be packaged into load actors despite their
embarrassing lack of acting ability.
d. Artists become famous because they are liked by the audience.
6. Francine was advised by the Doctor that she should not take part
in the dance competition

- 203 -
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. The Doctor did not want Francine to take part in the

competition because he was afraid that she might lose
II. Francine had major surgery because of her injury.
III. Francine did not have the money to go for the
auditions.
a. Assumption I, II, and III follow

b. Only Assumption I follows
c. Assumption II follows but Assumption I and III do not follow
d. None of the three assumptions follow
7. In an election conducted in Saint Francis Village, only 20% of

the total number of women in the village came to vote.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. The number of men in the village is more than the number

of women in Saint Francis Village.
II. Women had to cook food and could not come to vote.

b. Neither Assumption I nor Assumption II follows
c. Only Assumption II follows
d. Either Assumption I or Assumption II follows
8. The school has decided to cancel the summer camp this year
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. No entries have been received by the Institution for

students willing to join the summer camp
II. It is being cancelled because the weather is too hot

b. Only Assumption II follows
c. Neither Assumption I nor Assumption II follows
d. Either Assumption I or Assumption II follows
9. Most of the college students are found more interested in

fashion than the study.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. The colleges should ban the use of fashionable clothes &
other products.

- 204 -
II. The college students should be busy in study so that
they will not have the extra time for fashion & other
things.

b. Only Assumption II follow
c. Assumption I and II follow
d. Not either Assumption I and II follow
10. Recently the counting of a leopard was done & found that
some of the leopards are missing from the leopard reserve.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. The government should arrange strictly for saving the

remaining leopards.
II. The government should immediately find the criminals
responsible for the missing of leopards.

b. Only Assumption II follow
c. Assumption I and II follow
d. Not either Assumption I and II follow
11. Films have become indispensable for the entertainment of

people.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. Films are the only media of entertainment.

II. People enjoy films.

b. Either I or II is implicit
c. Neither I nor II is implicit
d. Only assumption II is implicit
12. Apart from the entertainment value of television, its

educational value cannot be ignored.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. People take television to be a means of entertainment

only.
II. The educational value of television is not released
properly.

- 205 -

c. Either I or II is implicit
d. Both I and II are implicit
13. “Policies and programmers and seminars cannot change the

women’s status. There is a greater need for attitudinal
change in the society towards working women. “- View of
Mr. Dela Cruz.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. It is possible to make change in the attitude of the

society towards working women.
II. Status of the working women is not satisfactory
a. If both I and II are implicit

b. If only assumption I is implicit
c. If only assumption II is implicit
d. If either I or II is implicit
14. “The potential of knowledge as a creator of wealth is gaining

currency all around the world “– View of an economist.
ASSUMPTIONS:
II. Only usable knowledge that is protect able may have

the potential of wealth creation.
III. Only usable knowledge that is protected may have the
potential of wealth creation.
a. If only assumption I is implicit

b. If only assumption II is implicit
c. If neither I nor II is implicit
d. If either I or II is implicit
15. Of all the newspapers published in Mumbai, readership of the

"Times" is the largest in the Metropolis.
ASSUMPTIONS:
I. Times' is not popular in mofussil areas.

II. Times' has the popular feature of cartoons on burning
social and political issues.

b. Neither I nor II is implicit
c. Only assumption II is implicit

- 206 -
GENERAL INFORMATION
I. PHILIPPINE CONSTITUITION
• Is the body of rules and principles in accordance with which

the powers of sovereignty are regularly exercised by the state.
PREAMBLE
We, the sovereign Filipino people, imploring the aid of Almighty God,
in order to build a just and humane society and establish a Government
that shall embody our ideals and aspirations, promote the common good,
conserve and develop our patrimony, and secure to ourselves and our
posterity the blessings of independence and democracy under the rule
of law and a regime of truth, justice, freedom, love, equality, and
peace, do ordain and promulgate this Constitution.
ARTICLE I National Territory

ARTICLE II Declaration of Principles and State Policies
ARTICLE III Bill of Rights
ARTICLE IV Citizenship
ARTICLE V Suffrage
ARTICLE VI Legislative Department
ARTICLE VII Executive Department
ARTICLE VIII Judicial Department
ARTICLE IX Constitutional Commissions
ARTICLE X Local Government
ARTICLE XI Accountability of Public Officers
ARTICLE XII National Economy and Patrimony
ARTICLE XIII Social Justice and Human Rights
ARTICLE XIV Education, Science and Technology, Arts, Culture and
Sports
ARTICLE XV The Family
ARTICLE XVI General Provisions
ARTICLE XVII Amendments or Revisions
ARTICLE XVIII Transitory Provisions
Here’s the link to view the full content:
https://www.officialgazette.gov.ph/constitutions/1987-constitution/

- 207 -
II. CODE OF CONDUCT AND ETHICAL STANDARDS FOR PUBLIC OFFICIALS

AND EMPLOYEES (R.A. 67 13)
• It is an Act an act establishing a code of conduct and ethical

standards for public officials and employees, to uphold the
time-honored principle of public office being a public trust,
granting incentives and rewards for exemplary service,
enumerating prohibited acts and transactions and providing
penalties for violations thereof and for other purposes.
Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the

Philippines in Congress assembled:
Section 1. Title. - This Act shall be known as the "Code of Conduct

and Ethical Standards for Public Officials and Employees."
Section 2. Declaration of Policies. - It is the policy of the State to

promote a high standard of ethics in public service. Public officials
and employees shall at all times be accountable to the people and shall
discharge their duties with utmost responsibility, integrity,
competence, and loyalty, act with patriotism and justice, lead modest
lives, and uphold public interest over personal interest.
Section 3. Definition of Terms. - As used in this Act, the term:
(a) "Government" includes the National Government, the local

governments, and all other instrumentalities, agencies or branches of
the Republic of the Philippines including government-owned or
controlled corporations, and their subsidiaries.lawphi1.net
(b) "Public Officials" includes elective and appointive officials and

employees, permanent or temporary, whether in the career or non-career
service, including military and police personnel, whether or not they
receive compensation, regardless of amount.
(c) "Gift" refers to a thing or a right to dispose of gratuitously, or

any act or liberality, in favor of another who accepts it, and shall
include a simulated sale or an ostensibly onerous disposition thereof.
It shall not include an unsolicited gift of nominal or insignificant
value not given in anticipation of, or in exchange for, a favor from
a public official or employee.
(d) "Receiving any gift" includes the act of accepting directly or

indirectly, a gift from a person other than a member of his family or
relative as defined in this Act, even on the occasion of a family

- 208 -
celebration or national festivity like Christmas, if the value of the
gift is neither nominal nor insignificant, or the gift is given in
anticipation of, or in exchange for, a favor.
(e) "Loan" covers both simple loan and commodatum as well as

guarantees, financing arrangements or accommodations intended to
ensure its approval.
(f) "Substantial stockholder" means any person who owns, directly or

indirectly, shares of stock sufficient to elect a director of a
corporation. This term shall also apply to the parties to a voting
trust.
(g) "Family of public officials or employees" means their spouses and

unmarried children under eighteen (18) years of age.
(h) "Person" includes natural and juridical persons unless the context
indicates otherwise.
(i) "Conflict of interest" arises when a public official or employee

is a member of a board, an officer, or a substantial stockholder of a
private corporation or owner or has a substantial interest in a
business, and the interest of such corporation or business, or his
rights or duties therein, may be opposed to or affected by the faithful
performance of official duty.
(j) "Divestment" is the transfer of title or disposal of interest in

property by voluntarily, completely and actually depriving or
dispossessing oneself of his right or title to it in favor of a person
or persons other than his spouse and relatives as defined in this Act.
(k) "Relatives" refers to any and all persons related to a public

official or employee within the fourth civil degree of consanguinity
or affinity, including bilas, inso and balae.
Section 4. Norms of Conduct of Public Officials and Employees. - (A)

Every public official and employee shall observe the following as
standards of personal conduct in the discharge and execution of
official duties:
(a) Commitment to public interest. - Public officials and employees

shall always uphold the public interest over and above personal
interest. All government resources and powers of their respective
offices must be employed and used efficiently, effectively, honestly
and economically, particularly to avoid wastage in public funds and
revenues.
(b) Professionalism. - Public officials and employees shall perform

and discharge their duties with the highest degree of excellence,

- 209 -
professionalism, intelligence and skill. They shall enter public
service with utmost devotion and dedication to duty. They shall
endeavor to discourage wrong perceptions of their roles as dispensers
or peddlers of undue patronage.
(c) Justness and sincerity. - Public officials and employees shall

remain true to the people at all times. They must act with justness
and sincerity and shall not discriminate against anyone, especially
the poor and the underprivileged. They shall at all times respect the
rights of others, and shall refrain from doing acts contrary to law,
good morals, good customs, public policy, public order, public safety
and public interest. They shall not dispense or extend undue favors on
account of their office to their relatives whether by consanguinity or
affinity except with respect to appointments of such relatives to
positions considered strictly confidential or as members of their
personal staff whose terms are coterminous with theirs.
(d) Political neutrality. - Public officials and employees shall

provide service to everyone without unfair discrimination and
regardless of party affiliation or preference.
(e) Responsiveness to the public. - Public officials and employees

shall extend prompt, courteous, and adequate service to the public.
Unless otherwise provided by law or when required by the public
interest, public officials and employees shall provide information of
their policies and procedures in clear and understandable language,
ensure openness of information, public consultations and hearings
whenever appropriate, encourage suggestions, simplify and systematize
policy, rules and procedures, avoid red tape and develop an
understanding and appreciation of the socio-economic conditions
prevailing in the country, especially in the depressed rural and urban
areas.
(f) Nationalism and patriotism. - Public officials and employees shall

at all times be loyal to the Republic and to the Filipino people,
promote the use of locally produced goods, resources and technology
and encourage appreciation and pride of country and people. They shall
endeavor to maintain and defend Philippine sovereignty against foreign
intrusion.
(g) Commitment to democracy. - Public officials and employees shall

commit themselves to the democratic way of life and values, maintain
the principle of public accountability, and manifest by deeds the
supremacy of civilian authority over the military. They shall at all
times uphold the Constitution and put loyalty to country above loyalty
to persons or party.
(h) Simple living. - Public officials and employees and their families
shall lead modest lives appropriate to their positions and income.

- 210 -
They shall not indulge in extravagant or ostentatious display of wealth
in any form.
(B) The Civil Service Commission shall adopt positive measures to

promote (1) observance of these standards including the dissemination
of information programs and workshops authorizing merit increases
beyond regular progression steps, to a limited number of employees
recognized by their office colleagues to be outstanding in their
observance of ethical standards; and (2) continuing research and
experimentation on measures which provide positive motivation to public
officials and employees in raising the general level of observance of
these standards.
Section 5. Duties of Public Officials and Employees. - In the

performance of their duties, all public officials and employees are
under obligation.
(a) Act promptly on letters and requests. - All public officials and
employees shall, within fifteen (15) working days from receipt thereof,
respond to letters, telegrams or other means of communications sent by
the public. The reply must contain the action taken on the request.
(b) Submit annual performance reports. - All heads or other responsible

officers of offices and agencies of the government and of government-
owned or controlled corporations shall, within forty-five (45) working
days from the end of the year, render a performance report of the
agency or office or corporation concerned. Such report shall be open
and available to the public within regular office hours.
(c) Process documents and papers expeditiously. - All official papers

and documents must be processed and completed within a reasonable time
from the preparation thereof and must contain, as far as practicable,
not more than three (3) signatories therein. In the absence of duly
authorized signatories, the official next-in-rank or officer in charge
shall sign for and in their behalf.
(d) Act immediately on the public's personal transactions. - All public

officials and employees must attend to anyone who wants to avail
himself of the services of their offices and must, at all times, act
promptly and expeditiously.
(e) Make documents accessible to the public. - All public documents

must be made accessible to, and readily available for inspection by,
the public within reasonable working hours.
Section 6. System of Incentives and Rewards. - A system of annual

incentives and rewards is hereby established in order to motivate and
inspire public servants to uphold the highest standards of ethics. For
this purpose, a Committee on Awards to Outstanding Public Officials

- 211 -
and Employees is hereby created composed of the following: the
Ombudsman and Chairman of the Civil Service Commission as Co-Chairmen,
and the Chairman of the Commission on Audit, and two government
employees to be appointed by the President, as members.
It shall be the task of this Committee to conduct a periodic, continuing

review of the performance of public officials and employees, in all
the branches and agencies of Government and establish a system of
annual incentives and rewards to the end that due recognition is given
to public officials and employees of outstanding merit on the basis of
the standards set forth in this Act.
The conferment of awards shall take into account, among other things,
the following: the years of service and the quality and consistency of
performance, the obscurity of the position, the level of salary, the
unique and exemplary quality of a certain achievement, and the risks
or temptations inherent in the work. Incentives and rewards to
government officials and employees of the year to be announced in
public ceremonies honoring them may take the form of bonuses,
citations, directorships in government-owned or controlled
corporations, local and foreign scholarship grants, paid vacations and
the like. They shall likewise be automatically promoted to the next
higher position with the commensurate salary suitable to their
qualifications. In case there is no next higher position or it is not
vacant, said position shall be included in the budget of the office in
the next General Appropriations Act. The Committee on Awards shall
adopt its own rules to govern the conduct of its activities.
Section 7. Prohibited Acts and Transactions. - In addition to acts and

omissions of public officials and employees now prescribed in the
Constitution and existing laws, the following shall constitute
prohibited acts and transactions of any public official and employee
and are hereby declared to be unlawful:
(a) Financial and material interest. - Public officials and employees

shall not, directly or indirectly, have any financial or material
interest in any transaction requiring the approval of their office.
(b) Outside employment and other activities related thereto. - Public

officials and employees during their incumbency shall not:
(1) Own, control, manage or accept employment as officer,

employee, consultant, counsel, broker, agent, trustee or
nominee in any private enterprise regulated, supervised or
licensed by their office unless expressly allowed by law;
(2) Engage in the private practice of their profession unless

authorized by the Constitution or law, provided, that such

- 212 -
practice will not conflict or tend to conflict with their
official functions; or
(3) Recommend any person to any position in a private

enterprise which has a regular or pending official
transaction with their office.
These prohibitions shall continue to apply for a period of one (1)

year after resignation, retirement, or separation from public office,
except in the case of subparagraph (b) (2) above, but the professional
concerned cannot practice his profession in connection with any matter
before the office he used to be with, in which case the one-year
prohibition shall likewise apply.
(c) Disclosure and/or misuse of confidential information. - Public

officials and employees shall not use or divulge, confidential or
classified information officially known to them by reason of their
office and not made available to the public, either:
(1) To further their private interests, or give undue

advantage to anyone; or
(2) To prejudice the public interest.
(d) Solicitation or acceptance of gifts. - Public officials and

employees shall not solicit or accept, directly or indirectly, any
gift, gratuity, favor, entertainment, loan or anything of monetary
value from any person in the course of their official duties or in
connection with any operation being regulated by, or any transaction
which may be affected by the functions of their office.
As to gifts or grants from foreign governments, the Congress consents

to:
(i) The acceptance and retention by a public official or employee of

a gift of nominal value tendered and received as a souvenir or mark of
courtesy;
(ii) The acceptance by a public official or employee of a gift in the

nature of a scholarship or fellowship grant or medical treatment; or
(iii) The acceptance by a public official or employee of travel grants

or expenses for travel taking place entirely outside the Philippine
(such as allowances, transportation, food, and lodging) of more than
nominal value if such acceptance is appropriate or consistent with the
interests of the Philippines, and permitted by the head of office,
branch or agency to which he belongs.

- 213 -
The Ombudsman shall prescribe such regulations as may be necessary to
carry out the purpose of this subsection, including pertinent reporting
and disclosure requirements.
Nothing in this Act shall be construed to restrict or prohibit any

educational, scientific or cultural exchange programs subject to
national security requirements.
Section 8. Statements and Disclosure. - Public officials and employees

have an obligation to accomplish and submit declarations under oath
of, and the public has the right to know, their assets, liabilities,
net worth and financial and business interests including those of their
spouses and of unmarried children under eighteen (18) years of age
living in their households.
(A) Statements of Assets and Liabilities and Financial Disclosure. -

All public officials and employees, except those who serve in an
honorary capacity, laborers and casual or temporary workers, shall
file under oath their Statement of Assets, Liabilities and Net Worth
and a Disclosure of Business Interests and Financial Connections and
those of their spouses and unmarried children under eighteen (18) years
of age living in their households.
The two documents shall contain information on the following:
(a) real property, its improvements, acquisition costs, assessed value

and current fair market value;
(b) personal property and acquisition cost;
(c) all other assets such as investments, cash on hand or in banks,

stocks, bonds, and the like;
(d) liabilities, and;
(e) all business interests and financial connections.
The documents must be filed:
(a) within thirty (30) days after assumption of office;
(b) on or before April 30, of every year thereafter; and
(c) within thirty (30) days after separation from the service.
All public officials and employees required under this section to file
the aforestated documents shall also execute, within thirty (30) days
from the date of their assumption of office, the necessary authority
in favor of the Ombudsman to obtain from all appropriate government

- 214 -
agencies, including the Bureau of Internal Revenue, such documents as
may show their assets, liabilities, net worth, and also their business
interests and financial connections in previous years, including, if
possible, the year when they first assumed any office in the
Government.
Husband and wife who are both public officials or employees may file
the required statements jointly or separately.
The Statements of Assets, Liabilities and Net Worth and the Disclosure
of Business Interests and Financial Connections shall be filed by:
(1) Constitutional and national elective officials, with the national

office of the Ombudsman;
(2) Senators and Congressmen, with the Secretaries of the Senate and
the House of Representatives, respectively; Justices, with the Clerk
of Court of the Supreme Court; Judges, with the Court Administrator;
and all national executive officials with the Office of the President.
(3) Regional and local officials and employees, with the Deputy
Ombudsman in their respective regions;
(4) Officers of the armed forces from the rank of colonel or naval
captain, with the Office of the President, and those below said ranks,
with the Deputy Ombudsman in their respective regions; and
(5) All other public officials and employees, defined in Republic Act
No. 3019, as amended, with the Civil Service Commission.
(B) Identification and disclosure of relatives. - It shall be the duty

of every public official or employee to identify and disclose, to the
best of his knowledge and information, his relatives in the Government
in the form, manner and frequency prescribed by the Civil Service
Commission.
(C) Accessibility of documents. - (1) Any and all statements filed

under this Act, shall be made available for inspection at reasonable
hours.
(2) Such statements shall be made available for copying or reproduction

after ten (10) working days from the time they are filed as required
by law.
(3) Any person requesting a copy of a statement shall be required to

pay a reasonable fee to cover the cost of reproduction and mailing of
such statement, as well as the cost of certification.

- 215 -
(4) Any statement filed under this Act shall be available to the public
for a period of ten (10) years after receipt of the statement. After
such period, the statement may be destroyed unless needed in an ongoing
investigation.
(D) Prohibited acts. - It shall be unlawful for any person to obtain

or use any statement filed under this Act for:
(a) any purpose contrary to morals or public policy; or
(b) any commercial purpose other than by news and communications

media for dissemination to the general public.
Section 9. Divestment. - A public official or employee shall avoid

conflicts of interest at all times. When a conflict of interest arises,
he shall resign from his position in any private business enterprise
within thirty (30) days from his assumption of office and/or divest
himself of his shareholdings or interest within sixty (60) days from
such assumption.
The same rule shall apply where the public official or employee is a
partner in a partnership.
The requirement of divestment shall not apply to those who serve the
Government in an honorary capacity nor to laborers and casual or
temporary workers.
Section 10. Review and Compliance Procedure. - (a) The designated

Committees of both Houses of the Congress shall establish procedures
for the review of statements to determine whether said statements which
have been submitted on time, are complete, and are in proper form. In
the event a determination is made that a statement is not so filed,
the appropriate Committee shall so inform the reporting individual and
direct him to take the necessary corrective action.
(b) In order to carry out their responsibilities under this Act, the
designated Committees of both Houses of Congress shall have the power
within their respective jurisdictions, to render any opinion
interpreting this Act, in writing, to persons covered by this Act,
subject in each instance to the approval by affirmative vote of the
majority of the particular House concerned.
The individual to whom an opinion is rendered, and any other individual

involved in a similar factual situation, and who, after issuance of
the opinion acts in good faith in accordance with it shall not be
subject to any sanction provided in this Act.
(c) The heads of other offices shall perform the duties stated in
subsections (a) and (b) hereof insofar as their respective offices are

- 216 -
concerned, subject to the approval of the Secretary of Justice, in the
case of the Executive Department and the Chief Justice of the Supreme
Court, in the case of the Judicial Department.
Section 11. Penalties. - (a) Any public official or employee,

regardless of whether or not he holds office or employment in a casual,
temporary, holdover, permanent or regular capacity, committing any
violation of this Act shall be punished with a fine not exceeding the
equivalent of six (6) months' salary or suspension not exceeding one
(1) year, or removal depending on the gravity of the offense after due
notice and hearing by the appropriate body or agency. If the violation
is punishable by a heavier penalty under another law, he shall be
prosecuted under the latter statute. Violations of Sections 7, 8 or 9
of this Act shall be punishable with imprisonment not exceeding five
(5) years, or a fine not exceeding five thousand pesos (P5,000), or
both, and, in the discretion of the court of competent jurisdiction,
disqualification to hold public office.
(b) Any violation hereof proven in a proper administrative proceeding

shall be sufficient cause for removal or dismissal of a public official
or employee, even if no criminal prosecution is instituted against
him.
(c) Private individuals who participate in conspiracy as co-principals,

accomplices or accessories, with public officials or employees, in
violation of this Act, shall be subject to the same penal liabilities
as the public officials or employees and shall be tried jointly with
them.
(d) The official or employee concerned may bring an action against any
person who obtains or uses a report for any purpose prohibited by
Section 8 (D) of this Act. The Court in which such action is brought
may assess against such person a penalty in any amount not to exceed
twenty-five thousand pesos (P25,000). If another sanction hereunder or
under any other law is heavier, the latter shall apply.
Section 12. Promulgation of Rules and Regulations, Administration and

Enforcement of this Act. - The Civil Service Commission shall have the
primary responsibility for the administration and enforcement of this
Act. It shall transmit all cases for prosecution arising from
violations of this Act to the proper authorities for appropriate
action: Provided, however, that it may institute such administrative
actions and disciplinary measures as may be warranted in accordance
with law. Nothing in this provision shall be construed as a deprivation
of the right of each House of Congress to discipline its Members for
disorderly behavior.
The Civil Service Commission is hereby authorized to promulgate rules

and regulations necessary to carry out the provisions of this Act,

- 217 -
including guidelines for individuals who render free voluntary service
to the Government. The Ombudsman shall likewise take steps to protect
citizens who denounce acts or omissions of public officials and
employees which are in violation of this Act.
Section 13. Provisions for More Stringent Standards. - Nothing in this

Act shall be construed to derogate from any law, or any regulation
prescribed by anybody or agency, which provides for more stringent
standards for its official and employees.
Section 14. Appropriations. - The sum necessary for the effective

implementation of this Act shall be taken from the appropriations of
the Civil Service Commission. Thereafter, such sum as may be needed
for its continued implementation shall be included in the annual
General Appropriations Act.
Section 15. Separability Clause. - If any provision of this Act or the

application of such provision to any person or circumstance is declared
invalid, the remainder of the Act or the application of such provision
to other persons or circumstances shall not be affected by such
declaration.
Section 16. Repealing Clause. - All laws, decrees and orders or parts
thereof inconsistent herewith, are deemed repealed or modified
accordingly, unless the same provide for a heavier penalty.
Section 17. Effectivity. - This Act shall take effect after thirty
(30) days following the completion of its publication in the Official
Gazette or in two (2) national newspapers of general circulation.

- 218 -
III. PEACE AND HUMAN RIGHTS ISSUES AND CONCEPT

PEACE – Is a stress-free state of security and calmness that comes
when there’s no fighting or war, everything coexisting in perfect
harmony and freedom.
HUNMAN RIGHTS - are norms that aspire to protect all people
everywhere from severe political, legal, and social abuses.
CURRENT PEACE ISSUES IN THE PHILIPPINES

COMPREHENSIVE AGREEMENT OF THE BANGSAMORO ISSUE
The Comprehensive Agreement on Bangsamoro (CAB) is a final peace

agreement signed between the Government of the Philippines and the
Moro Islamic Liberation Front on March 27, 2014 at the Malacañang
Palace in Manila. Under the agreement, the Islamic separatists would
turn over their firearms to a third party, which would be selected by
the rebels and the Philippine government. The MILF agreed to
decommission its armed wing, the Bangsamoro Islamic Armed Forces
(BIAF). In return, the government would establish an autonomous
Bangsamoro. Power sharing was a central point to the autonomy redesign.
The current ARMM charter lists 14 areas that are outside the powers of
the regional legislature. In this comprehensive peace agreement, the
parties list 81 powers categorized into reserved for the central
government, exclusive to the Bangsamoro, and concurrent with or shared
by the two sides for power sharing. Of the 81 powers, 58 are devolved
to the Bangsamoro, nine are reserved to the central government, and 14
are shared. The Framework Agreement on the Bangsamoro and Four annexes,
namely on Transitional Arrangements and Modalities, Revenue Generation
and Wealth Sharing, Power Sharing and Normalization, together with the
Addendum on Bangsamoro Waters, will be included in the comprehensive
agreement. The Armed Forces of the Philippines has raised red alert
status on March 24 in preparation for the event. Philippine President
Benigno Aquino III, MILF chair Hadji Murad Ibrahim, and Malaysian Prime
Minister Najib Razak are among the key people expected to be present
at the signing of the agreement.
In pursuit of their goal of liberating Bangsamoro, the MNLF engaged

the government forces in extensive armed collisions, peaking in the
early 70s when the rebels’ blitz-like operations brought them control
of a substantial number of municipalities surrounding Cotabato City
and its airport complex. This prompted the Marcos regime to beef up
military presence by deploying almost three-fourths of the army in
most Muslim parts of Mindanao. Things took a different turn in 1976

- 219 -
when Libyan leader Muammar Gaddafi brokered an agreement[7] that led to
the signing of the Tripoli Agreement introducing the concept of an
autonomous Muslim region in Mindanao. On August 1, 1989, under the
mandate of the new 1987 Constitution, Congress enacted Republic Act
6734 authorizing the creation of the Autonomous Region in Muslim
Mindanao (ARMM). However, out of the 13 provinces and 9 cities that
participated in the plebiscite, only the provinces of Lanao del Sur,
Maguindanao, Sulu, and Tawi-Tawi opted to become part of the ARMM. The
ARMM was formally established on November 6, 1990.
Instead of bringing the Muslim leaders together, this agreement further

fragmented the MNLF, because some factions within the group preferred
independence over autonomy. Thus, a group of officers led by Hashim
Salamat broke away and formed the Moro Islamic Liberation Front (MILF)
to continue their armed struggle for an independent Bangsamoro (Moro
nation) in Mindanao.
Though the combined strength of these two rebel forces has not reached
a point of posing any real threat to the government in Manila, their
existence—and the reasons for their resilience—certainly brings many
headaches for the government. For nearly five decades, five presidents
have tried to completely end these two rebellions, utilizing both force
and diplomacy. So far, no combination has succeeded. Perhaps the most
remarkable effort to bring closure to these movements was that of the
Ramos Administration, which tried to reach out to both the communist
and Muslim rebels through peaceful means. There were many efforts to
reach peace with Islamist separatists.
Framework Agreement
On October 15, 2012, the Philippine government signed a much-hyped

document touted as the Framework Agreement on the Bangsamoro, which
culminated the Aquino Administration's effort to end the deadlock in
the peace process. This new document, while merely providing for a
general framework for the actual peace negotiations, announced that
"the status quo is unacceptable and that the Bangsamoro shall be
established to replace the Autonomous Region in Muslim Mindanao (ARMM).
The Bangsamoro was the new autonomous political entity (NPE) referred
to in the Decision Points of Principles as of April 2012." According
to President Aquino, this was the agreement that could "finally seal
genuine, lasting peace in Mindanao." with Bangsamoro replacing ARMM
which was described by President Benigno Aquino III as "a failed
experiment".
Reaching the Agreement
The peace talks between the MILF and the Philippine government had
been brokered by Malaysia since 1997. After 2009, the negotiations

- 220 -
were also supported by an International Contact Group (the ICG). The
ICG represented an innovation in peace process support, in that it was
a hybrid body composed of both states and international non-
governmental organisations (INGOs). The members were Turkey, Saudi
Arabia, the United Kingdom, and Japan, The Asia Foundation, the Centre
for Humanitarian Dialogue, Muhammadiyah, and Conciliation Resources.
When the Asia Foundation became an official member of the Third Party
Monitoring Team in 2012, the Community of San’Egidio from Italy
replaced the Asia Foundation in the ICG.
On January 24, 2014, Philippine government chief negotiator Miriam
Coronel Ferer and MILF chief negotiator Mohagher Iqbal signed a peace
agreement in Kuala Lumpur. The agreement would pave the way for the
creation of the new Muslim autonomous entity called “Bangsamoro” under
a law to be approved by the Philippine Congress.
The government aims to set up the region by 2016. The agreement calls
for Muslim self-rule in parts of the southern Philippines in exchange
for a deactivation of rebel forces by the MILF. MILF forces would turn
over their firearms to a third party to selected by the MILF and the
Philippine government. A regional police force would be established,
and the Philippine military would reduce the presence of troops and
help disband private armies in the area. In the Agreement, the
government committed to change a 37-year autonomy experiment whose
current version, the Autonomous Region in Muslim Mindanao (ARMM), has
failed to live up to the Moro people’s aspiration for freedom from a
highly centralized government.
COMMUNIST REBELLION IN THE PHILIPPINES ISSUE
The ongoing communist rebellion in the Philippines is a conflict

between the government of the Philippines and the New People’s Army
(NPA), which is the armed wing of the Marxist–Leninist–Maoist Communist
Party of the Philippines (CPP). The conflict is also associated with
the National Democratic Front of the Philippines (NDFP), which serves
as the political wing of the CPP.
The history of the rebellion can be traced back to March 29, 1969,
when Jose Maria Sison’s newly formed CPP entered an alliance with a
small armed group led by Bernabe Buscayno. Buscayno’s group, which was
originally a unit under the Marxist–Leninist 1930s-era Partido
Komunista ng Pilipinas-1930 (PKP-1930), was renamed the New People’s
Army (NPA) and became the armed wing of the CPP. Less than two years
later, President Ferdinand Marcos introduced martial law, leading to
the radicalization of many young people and a rapid growth of the CPP-
NPA.
In 1992, the NPA split into two factions: the reaffirmist faction, led
by Sison, and the rejectionist faction, which advocated the formation

- 221 -
of larger military units and urban insurgencies. Thirteen smaller
factions eventually emerged from the group. Until 2002, the NPA
received a considerable amount of aid from outside the Philippines,
although later developments forced it to rely more on support from
local sources. The CPP-NPA rebellion is the world’s longest ongoing
communist insurgencyand is the largest, most prominent communist
conflict in the Philippines, in contrast to the 1995–present Marxist–
Leninist Revolutionary Workers’ Party rebellion and the now-defunct
1942–1954 Hukbalahap and 1986–2011 Cordillera People’s Liberation Army
rebellions. Between 1969 and 2008, more than 43,000 insurgency-related
fatalities were recorded. Another rebellion is that of the Marxist–
Leninist Party of the Philippines and its armed wing, the
Rebolusyonaryong Hukbong Bayan (RHB), which broke away from the
Communist Party of the Philippines in 1998 and has since been in
conflict with both the government and the CPP.
Formation of The Communist Party of The Philippines (CPP)

The original Partido Komunista ng Pilipinas-1930 (Communist Party of
the Philippines) was established in 1930 by members of the Partido
Obrero de Filipinas and the Socialist Party of the Philippines with
the help of the COMINTERN. It would later lead an anti-Japanese
Hukbalahap Rebellion in 1942 with the Hukbo ng Bayan Laban sa Hapon.
During World War II, these communist guerrillas fought against both
the Japanese and other guerrilla bands. In the years following, Maoist
factions began organizing mass organizations such as Kabataang
Makabayan, Malayang Kilusan ng Kababaihan and hosting theoretical
studies on Marxism–Leninism–Maoism. They would eventually break off
from the old party and form the Communist Party of the
Philippines/Marxist–Leninist–Maoist in 1968.
Founding of The New People’s Army (NPA)

The New People's Army would be established by Jose Maria Sison and
Bernabe Buscayno as the armed wing of the CPP-MLM. The new Maoist
leadership would drop the reformist ideas that led the CPP-1930 to
collaborate with the government of Ferdinand Marcos, and enforce Maoist
principles, aimed at creating a socialist state through New Democracy
by launching a people's war. Its initial strength was estimated to
compromise approximately 60 guerrillas and 35 weapons.
Establishment of The National Democratic Front (NDF)

The National Democratic Front was established in 1973 as the political
front of the CPP-MLM, bringing together broad revolutionary
organizations which accepted their 12-point program, and building
international relations with foreign communist parties such as the
Communist Party of India (Maoist) and Communist Party of Nepal (Maoist)

- 222 -
WEST PHILIPINE SEA ISSUE
Philippines vs. China (PCA case number 2013–19), also known as the
South China Sea Arbitration, was an arbitration case brought by the
Republic of the Philippines against the People's Republic of China
(PRC) under Annex VII of the United Nations Convention on the Law of
the Sea (UNCLOS, ratified by the Philippines in 1984 and by the PRC in
1996) concerning certain issues in the South China Sea, including the
nine-dash line introduced by the Republic of China (Taiwan) since as
early as 1947. A tribunal of arbitrators appointed the Permanent Court
of Arbitration (PCA) as the registry for the proceedings.
On 19 February 2013, China declared that it would not participate in

the arbitration. On 7 December 2014, it published a white paper to
elaborate its position that, among other points, the tribunal lacks
jurisdiction. In accordance with Article 3 of Annex VII of UNCLOS, the
Philippines appointed 1 of the 5 arbitrators, while China did not
appoint any. On 29 October 2015, the tribunal concluded that it had
jurisdiction to consider seven of the Philippines' submissions, subject
to certain conditions, and postponed the consideration of its
jurisdiction on the other eight submissions to the merits phase. On 12
July 2016, the arbitral tribunal ruled in favor of the Philippines on
most of its submissions. It clarified that while it would not "rule on
any question of sovereignty and would not delimit any maritime
boundary", China's historic rights claims over maritime areas (as
opposed to land masses and territorial waters) within the "nine-dash
line" have no lawful effect unless entitled to under UNCLOS. China has
rejected the ruling, as has Taiwan. Eight governments have called for
the ruling to be respected, 35 issued generally positive statements
noting the verdict but not called for compliance, and eight rejected
it. The United Nations itself "doesn't have a position on the legal
and procedural merits of the case or on the disputed claims", and on
12 July the Secretary-General "expressed his hope that the continued
consultations on a Code of Conduct between ASEAN and China under the
framework of the Declaration of the Conduct of Parties in the South
China Sea will lead to increased mutual understanding among all the
parties."
The dispute has been affected by the fact that after Japan renounced
all claims to the Spratly Islands and other conquered islands and
territories in the Treaty of San Francisco and Treaty of Peace with
the Republic of China (Taiwan) signed on 8 September 1951, it did not
indicate successor states since China was not invited to the treaty
talks held in San Francisco. In reaction to that, on 15 August, the
Chinese government issued the Declaration on the Draft Peace Treaty
with Japan by the US and the UK and on the San Francisco Conference by
the then Foreign Minister Zhou Enlai, reiterating China's sovereignty
over the archipelagos in the South China Sea, including the Spratly
Islands, and protesting about the absence of any provisions in the

- 223 -
draft on who shall take over the South China Sea islands following
Japan's renouncement of all rights, title and claim to them. It
reiterated that "the Chinese government of the day had taken over those
islands" and that the PRC's rightful sovereignty "shall remain intact".
On 28 April 1952, the United States presided over the signing of the
Treaty of Peace between Japan and the Republic of China. Article 2 of
the document provided that "It is recognized that under Article 2 of
the Treaty of Peace which Japan signed at the city of San Francisco on
8 September 1951 (hereinafter referred to as the San Francisco Treaty),
Japan has renounced all right, title, and claim to Taiwan (Formosa)
and Penghu (the Pescadores) as well as the Spratly Islands and the
Paracel Islands."
The Philippines bases its claim on its geographical proximity to the

Spratly Islands.
In May 1956, the dispute escalated after Filipino national Tomas Cloma
and his followers settled on the islands and declared the territory as
"Freedomland", now known as Kalayaan for himself and later requested
to make the territory a protectorate of the Philippines. Tomas Cloma
even stole China (ROC)'s national flag from the Taiping Island. In
July 1956, he apologised officially for his act and he surrendered the
flag he stole to China's embassy in Manila. On 2 October 1956, he wrote
a letter and ensured he would not make further training voyages or
landings in the territorial waters of China (ROC).
Philippine troops were sent to three of the islands in 1968, when the
Philippines were under President Ferdinand Marcos. In the 1970s, some
countries began to occupy islands and reefs in the Spratlys. The
Spratlys were placed under the jurisdiction of the province of Palawan
in 1978.
The PRC claims it is entitled to the Paracel and Spratly Islands

because they were seen as integral parts of the Ming dynasty. China
and Taiwan have these same territorial claims. The Republic of China
(Taiwan) took control of the largest island – Taiping Island – in the
group since 1946.
Vietnam states that the islands have belonged to it since the 17th
century, using historical documents of ownership as evidence. Hanoi
began to occupy the westernmost islands during this period.
In the early 1970s, Malaysia joined the dispute by claiming the islands
nearest to it.
Brunei also extended its exclusive economic zone, claiming Louisa Reef.

- 224 -
The arbitration involved the Philippines and China
Philippines stance
The Philippines contended that the "nine-dotted line" claim by China
is invalid because it violates the UNCLOS agreements about exclusive
economic zones and territorial seas. It says that because most of
the features in the South China Sea, such as most of the Spratly
Islands, cannot sustain life, they cannot be given their own
continental shelf as defined in the convention.
China Stance
China refused to participate in the arbitration, stating that
several treaties with the Philippines stipulate that bilateral
negotiations be used to resolve border disputes. It also accuses the
Philippines of violating the voluntary Declaration on the Conduct
of Parties in the South China Sea, made in 2002 between ASEAN and
China, which also stipulated bilateral negotiations as the means of
resolving border and other disputes. China issued a position paper
in December 2014 arguing the dispute was not subject to arbitration
because it was ultimately a matter of sovereignty, not exploitation
rights. Its refusal did not prevent the arbitral tribunal from
proceeding with the case. After the award ruling, the PRC issued a
statement rejecting it as 'null' and having decided not to abide by
the arbitral tribunal's decision, said it will "ignore the ruling".
Claimants of the South China Sea
Taiwan Stance
The arbitral tribunal has not invited Taiwan to join the arbitration,
and no opinion of Taiwan has been sought. The Philippines claimed
that Taiping Island is a rock. In response,[42] Ma Ying-jeou,
President of the Republic of China (Taiwan), rejected the
Philippines' claim as "patently false". Taiwan invited the
Philippines and five arbitrators to visit Taiping Island; the
Philippines rejected the invitation, and there was no response from
the arbitral tribunal.
Vietnam Stance
On 11 December 2014, Vietnam filed a statement to the tribunal which
put forward three points: 1) Vietnam supports the filing of this
case by the Philippines, 2) it rejects China's "nine-dashed line",
and 3) it asks the arbitral tribunal to take note of Vietnam's claims
on certain islands such as the Paracels.

- 225 -
Other Stances
Brunei sent its own UNCLOS claim through a preliminary submission

prior to the arbitration. In May 2009, Malaysia and Vietnam, as well
as Vietnam alone, filed claims to the International Tribunal for the
Law of the Sea with regard to the islands. This was in relation to
extending their claimed continental shelves and Exclusive Economic
Zones. The People's Republic of China rejected the claims since
those violate the "nine-dotted line". The Philippines challenged the
Malaysian claim stating that the claims overlap with the North Borneo
dispute.
Indonesia made a comment on China's claim by saying that the features

are rocks and cannot sustain life, effectively calling the Chinese
claim invalid. The Philippines echoed Indonesia's claims, further
stating that the islands belong to them through geographic
proximity.
Arbitration
The arbitral tribunal convened a Hearing on Jurisdiction and

Admissibility on 7 to 13 July 2015, rendered an Award on Jurisdiction
and Admissibility on 29 October 2015, convened a hearing on the merits
from 24 to 30 November 2015, and issued a unanimous award on 12 July
2016.
Hearings
On 7 July 2015, case hearings began with the Philippines asking the
arbitral tribunal to invalidate China's claims. The hearings were also
attended by observers from Indonesia, Japan, Malaysia, Thailand and
Vietnam. The case has been compared to Nicaragua v. United States due
to similarities of the parties involved such as that a developing
country is challenging a permanent member of the United Nations
Security Council in an arbitral tribunal.
On 29 October 2015, the tribunal ruled that it had the power to hear
the case. It agreed to take up seven of the 15 submissions made by
Manila, in particular whether Scarborough Shoal and low-tide areas
like Mischief Reef can be considered islands. It set aside seven more
pointed claims mainly accusing Beijing of acting unlawfully to be
considered at the next hearing on the case's merits. It also told
Manila to narrow down the scope of its final request that the judge’s
order that "China shall desist from further unlawful claims and
activities."
The tribunal scheduled the hearing on merits of the case from 24 to 30

November 2015.

- 226 -
Award on Jurisdiction and Admissibility
On 29 October 2015, the PCA published the award by the arbitral tribunal
on Jurisdiction and Admissibility, for the case. The tribunal found
that it has jurisdiction to consider the following seven Philippines'
Submissions. (Each number is the Philippines' Submissions number.) The
tribunal reserved consideration of its jurisdiction to rule on Nos. 1,
2, 5, 8, 9, 12, and 14.
• No.3 Philippines'position that Scarborough Shoal is a rock under

Article 121(3).
• No.4 Philippines' position that Mischief Reef, Second Thomas
Shoal, and Subi Reef are low tide elevations that do not generate
entitlement to maritime zones.
• No.6 Whether Gaven Reef and McKennan Reef (including Hughes Reef)
are low-tide elevations "that do not generate any maritime
entitlements of their own".
• No.7 Whether Johnson Reef, Cuarteron Reef, and Fiery Cross Reef
do or do not generate an entitlement to an exclusive economic
zone or continental shelf.
• No.10 "premised on [the] fact that China has unlawfully prevented
Philippine fishermen from carrying out traditional fishing
activities within the territorial sea of Scarborough Shoal."
• No.11 "China's failure to protect and preserve the marine
environment at these two shoals [Scarborough Shoal and Second
Thomas Shoal]."
• No.13 Philippines' protest against China's "purported law
enforcement activities as violating the Convention on the
International Regulations for the Prevention of Collisions at Sea
and also violating UNCLOS".
The tribunal stated in the award that there are continuing disputes in
all of the 15 submissions from the Philippines, but for submissions
such as No.3, No.4, No.6 and No.7, no known claims from the Philippines
prior to the initiation of this arbitration exist, and that China was
not aware of (nor had previously opposed) such claims prior to the
initiation of arbitration. For Submissions No.8 to No.14, the tribunal
held the view that the lawfulness of China's maritime activities in
the South China Sea is not related to sovereignty.
Timeline of Events
January 22, 2013 – Philippines served China with notification and

Statement of Claim.
February 19, 2013 – China rejected the Philippines' Notification.
July 11, 2013 – First meeting of the arbitral tribunal at The

Hague.

- 227 -
July 31, 2013 – Philippines commented on draft Rules of
Procedure for the Tribunal.
August 1, 2013 – China indicated that "it does not accept the
arbitration initiated by the Philippines".
August 27, 2013 – Procedural Order No 1 issued via PCA Press

Release on behalf of the arbitral tribunal.
March 30, 2014 – Submission of the Philippines Memorial.
May 14-15, 2014 – Second meeting of the arbitral tribunal at The

Hague.
May 21, 2014 – China comments on draft Procedural Order No 2
and observes that "it does not accept the
arbitration initiated by the Philippines".
May 29, 2014 – Philippines comments on draft Procedural

Order No 2.
June 2, 2014 – Procedural Order No 2 issued via PCA Press

December 15, 2014 – China had not filed a Counter-Memorial.
December 16, 2014 – Procedural Order No 3 issued via PCA Press

March 16, 2015 – The Philippines made a Supplemental Written

Submission to the Arbitral Tribunal.
April 20-21, 2015 – Third meeting of the arbitral tribunal at The

Hague.
April 21, 2015 – Procedural Order No 4 issued via PCA Press

July 7-13, 2015 – Hearing of the arbitral tribunal at The Hague.
October 29, 2015 – PCA issued award on jurisdiction and

Admissibility.
July 12, 2016 – PCA issued award on merits

- 228 -
CURRENT HUMAN RIGHTS ISSUES IN THE PHILIPPINES
EXTRA JUDICIAL EXECUTIONS

Extrajudicial executions and other human rights violations continued
under the government’s “war on drugs”. Human rights defenders and
political activists were killed, harassed, detained and unjustly
charged. Media freedom was unduly curtailed and dangerous anti-terror
legislation was passed. Various groups condemned the government’s
heavy-handed approach to the COVID-19 pandemic. President Duterte
renewed his call on Congress to reinstate the death penalty.
The UN Human Rights Council (UNHRC) adopted a resolution to provide

technical assistance and capacity building to the government. The
resolution fell short of calls for stronger action to address ongoing
violations in the country. Killings and other human rights violations
continued under the government’s “war on drugs”. On several occasions,
President Duterte incited violence against people suspected of using
or selling drugs, while promising to protect those who kill
them.2 Reports of killings increased in cities where police chiefs who
had previously overseen abusive operations were appointed. Based on
government data, police killed at least 155 people from April to July,
compared to 103 people from December 2019 to March. Killings by unknown
individuals, many with suspected links to the police, continued.
Victims were overwhelmingly poor. Vice President Leni Robredo released
a report in January countering government information on the “war on
drugs”. She stated that government efforts targeted people who use or
sell small amounts of illicit drugs and called on the government to
end its deadly approach known as Oplan Tokhang (“Operation Knock and
Plead”), prosecute those involved in drug trafficking, and improve its
collection and interpretation of drug-related data. In June, the UN
Human Rights Office released a report detailing extrajudicial
executions and attacks against human rights defenders, political
activists and the media, among other violations.
In July, the government announced the establishment of an inter-agency

panel to “review” cases of drug-related killings by the police. Human
rights groups said the panel was formed to shield the government from
international scrutiny.
Despite repeated calls for an international investigation, the UNHRC

adopted in October a resolution providing technical assistance and
capacity-building to the government. The resolution required the UN
Human Rights Office to continue to provide the UNHRC with updates over
the next two years. In December, the International Criminal Court
stated crimes were committed in the “war on drugs”, adding that it
expected to decide in 2021 whether or not to open an investigation.

- 229 -
REPRESSION OF DISSENT
In February, prisoner of conscience Senator Leila de Lima marked her

third year in detention on politically motivated charges after she
sought to investigate drug-related killings. Also in February, a court
issued arrest warrants against former Senator and critic of the “war
on drugs” Antonio Trillanes IV, activist priest Fr. Flaviano “Flavie”
Villanueva and nine others on charges of conspiracy to commit sedition.
Five activists were arrested in raids by security forces in Tacloban
City.
In March, a court issued arrest warrants for perjury against activists

seeking court protection after the Philippine military tagged them as
“terrorists”.
In July, President Duterte signed into law Republic Act 11479 (Anti-
Terrorism Act of 2020).6 Human rights groups criticized the new law
for contravening international standards and granting the government
unchecked powers to detain perceived enemies of the state. Over 30
petitions challenging its constitutionality were pending before the
Supreme Court at year’s end.
On 10 August, activist and peace advocate Randall Echanis and his

neighbour were killed in Metro Manila. A week later, human rights
defender Zara Alvarez was shot dead in Bacolod City.8 Echanis and
Alvarez were branded as “terrorists” in a 2018 government list. Other
human rights defenders and political activists were arbitrarily
detained and faced increased threats and harassment after the
government “red-tagged” or linked them to communist armed groups.
In October, police treatment of detained activist Reina Mae Nasino

attending the funeral of her three-month-old baby sparked public
outrage.
On 10 December, police arrested journalist Lady Ann Salem and six trade
unionists during raids in Metro Manila on charges of illegal possession
of firearms and explosives. Human rights groups claimed the charges
were fabricated.
On 30 December, police killed nine people and arrested 17 in Capiz and

Iloilo provinces. Local groups said they were from an Indigenous
community defending their land while police claimed they were members
of the New People’s Army and that the nine were killed after resisting
arrest.

- 230 -
KILLINGS
The AFP’s Human Rights Office confirmed the deaths of 14 civilians
used by insurgent groups as human shields in separate military
operations against them. From January to May, 11 terrorist bombings in
Maguindanao, Masbate, and Camarines Sur in the Bicol region killed
three and wounded four AFP members. From January to May, 40 AFP
personnel died in clashes with the NPA, 10 with the ASG, and five with
the BIFF.
NGO Global Witness documented 48 killings of environmental and land
rights activists in 2017 and alleged security force involvement in
some of the killings.
Antigovernment groups were responsible for numerous civilian deaths.
The NPA, ISIS-P, ASG, the Maute Group, Ansar al-Khalifa, the BIFF, and
other violent extremist groups used roadside bombs, ambushes, and other
means to kill political figures and other civilians, including persons
suspected of being military and police informers.
The NPA also menaced government offices and attacked or threatened
businesses, power stations, farms, and private communication
facilities to enforce collection of extortion payments, or so-called
revolutionary taxes.
LESBIAN, GAY, BISEXUAL, TRANSGENDER AND INTERSEX (LGBTI) PEOPLE
In February, Makati City police sparked an outcry after “profiling” 67

individuals as part of its “Oplan X-Men” targeting transgender women.
In April, a local government official subjected three LGBTI individuals

to degrading treatment by forcing them to perform sexually-suggestive
acts as punishment for alleged COVID-19 curfew violations. In December,
a Senate panel approved a bill that aims to prohibit discrimination
and violence on the basis of sexual orientation and gender identity
and expression.
ABDUCTIONS
Armed criminal and terrorist groups kidnapped civilians for ransom.
The NPA and some separatist groups were also responsible for a number
of arbitrary detentions and kidnappings for ransom. Through unofficial
channels, authorities reportedly facilitated ransom payments on behalf
of victims’ families and employers. The security forces at times
attempted to rescue victims.
The UN Office of the Special Representative of the Secretary-General

for Children and Armed Conflict reported the abduction by the ASG and
the Maute Group of seven children in five incidents in 2017.

- 231 -
PHYSICAL ABUSE, PUNISHMENT, AND TORTURE
attempted to rescue victims. The UN Office of the Special
Representative of the Secretary-General for Children and Armed Conflict
reported the abduction by the ASG and the Maute Group of seven children
in five incidents in 2017.
FREEDOM OF EXPRESSION
attempted to rescue victims. The UN Office of the Special
Representative of the Secretary-General for Children and Armed Conflict
reported the abduction by the ASG and the Maute Group of seven children
in five incidents in 2017.
VIOLENCE AND HARRASSMENT

Journalists continued to face harassment and threats of violence,
including from politicians and government authorities critical of their
reporting. Human rights NGOs frequently criticized the government for
failing to protect journalists. The Center for Media Freedom and
Responsibility (CMFR) reported that, in July, three journalists and an
intern covering a picket line in Central Luzon were attacked,
threatened, arrested, and unjustly accused of possessing illegal drugs
and firearms by the police, who claimed they recovered.
drugs and guns from the news correspondents. The journalists and intern
were released in August, but police alleged they were spreading alarm
and scandal, and constituted an illegal assembly. The CMFR reported
the deaths of seven journalists or media workers through July, but has
not yet determined whether the killings were related to their work. As
of July, murder charges were filed against suspects in one case; the
others were under investigation. Journalists and media personalities
reported an increase in online threats, including of violence and
harassment, in response to articles and comments critical of the
government. The NGO Freedom House reported in late 2017 that the
Duterte administration hired workers, a “keyboard army,” to participate
in online attacks against critics, especially journalists, whom they
viewed as critical of the administration and to support the antidrug

- 232 -
campaign. In April, after Facebook selected Rappler and Vera Files as
third-party fact checkers for the country, the Presidential
Communications Operations Office publicly criticized the selection,
calling the outlets “partisan” for not supporting the president. In
July Senate President Vicente Sotto III requested the online news
website Inquirer.net take down three opinion pieces (two from 2014 and
one from 2016) alleging his involvement in a 1982 rape case. The news
website temporarily removed the articles pending an internal
investigation. The National Union of Journalists of the Philippines
called Sotto’s request an affront to press freedom. In August the
National Union of Journalists and the CMFR criticized the Presidential
Task Force on Media Security and an administration media official for
pressuring a community newspaper to take down a story quoting the head
of the task force.
DISCRIMINATION
In law but not always in practice, women have most of the rights and
protections accorded to men, and the law seeks to eliminate
discrimination against women. The law accords women the same property
rights as men. In Muslim and indigenous communities, however, property
ownership law or tradition grants men more property rights than women.
The CHR and others alleged that multiple statements by President
Duterte incited violence against women. One example included Duterte
telling soldiers to shoot NPA women in their genitals. No law mandates
nondiscrimination based on gender in hiring, although the law prohibits
discrimination in employment based on sex. Nonetheless, women continued
to face discrimination on the job as well as in hiring (see section
7.d.). The law does not provide for divorce. Legal annulments and
separation are possible, and courts generally recognized foreign
divorces if one of the parties was a foreigner. These options, however,
are costly, complex, and not readily available to the poor. The Office
of the Solicitor General is required to oppose requests for annulment
under the constitution. Informal separation is common, but brings with
it potential legal and financial problems. Muslims have the right to
divorce under Muslim family law.
PERSON WITH DISABILITIES

The constitution prohibits discrimination against persons with
physical, sensory, intellectual, and mental disabilities. In June,
President Duterte signed the Philippine Mental Health Law aimed at
providing affordable and accessible mental health services. Other laws
provide for equal access for persons with disabilities to all public
buildings and establishments. The National Council for Disability
Affairs formulated policies and coordinated the activities of
government agencies for the rehabilitation, self-development, and

- 233 -
self-reliance of persons with disabilities and their integration into
the mainstream of society. The law was not effectively enforced, and
many barriers remained for persons with disabilities. Advocates for
persons with disabilities contended that equal access laws were
ineffective due to weak implementing regulations, insufficient
funding, and inadequately focused integrative government programs. The
great majority of public buildings remained inaccessible to persons
with physical disabilities. Many schools had architectural barriers
that made attendance difficult for persons with disabilities.
Government efforts to improve access to transportation for persons
with disabilities were limited. Persons with disabilities continued to
face discrimination and other challenges in finding employment (see
section 7.d.). Some children with disabilities attended schools in
mainstream or inclusive educational settings. The Department of
Education’s 648 separate education centers did not provide nationwide
coverage, and the government lacked a clear system for informing
parents of children with disabilities of their educational rights and
did not have a well-defined procedure for reporting discrimination in
education. From January to June, the DSWD provided services to 3,374
persons with disabilities in assisted-living centers and community
based vocational centers nationwide, significantly more than reported
in 2017. If a person with disabilities suffered violence, access to
after-care services was available through the DSWD, crisis centers,
and NGOs. Of local government units, 60 percent had a Persons with
Disability Office to assist in accessing services including health,
rehabilitation, and education. The constitution provides for the right
of persons with physical disabilities to vote. The Commission on
Elections determines the capacity of persons with mental disabilities
to vote during the registration process, and citizens may appeal
exclusions and inclusions in court. A federal act authorizes the
commission to establish accessible voting centers exclusively for
persons with disabilities and senior citizens
INDIGENOUS PEOPLE
Although no specific laws discriminate against indigenous people, the
geographical remoteness of the areas many inhabit and cultural bias
prevented their full integration into society. Indigenous children
often suffered from lack of health care, education, and other basic
services. Government officials indicated that approximately 80 percent
of the country’s government units complied with the long-standing legal
requirement that indigenous peoples be represented in policy making
bodies and local legislative councils. The National Commission on
Indigenous Peoples, a government agency staffed by tribal members, was
responsible for implementing constitutional provisions to protect
indigenous peoples. It has authority to award certificates identifying

- 234 -
“ancestral domain lands” based on communal ownership, thereby stopping
tribal leaders from selling the land. Additionally, the commission
studies “ancestral sea” claims, since some indigenous groups, such as
the Sama-Bajau, who customarily lived in western Mindanao,
traditionally practiced migratory fishing. No “ancestral sea” claims
were approved, and the lack of access to traditional fishing grounds
contributed to the displacement of many Sama-Bajau. Armed groups
frequently recruited from indigenous populations. Indigenous peoples’
lands were also often the site of armed encounters related to resource
extraction or intertribal disputes, which sometimes resulted in
displacement or killings. In December 2017, eight Lumad persons were
killed in a firefight with the AFP in South Cotabato, Mindanao. An
internal AFP investigation reported that the army had responded to
valid reports of 25 armed NPA members encamped near the Lumad lands to
recruit members from the group. The NGO network Karapatan filed a
complaint with the CHR, alleging the AFP massacred the Lumads who were
simply defending their ancestral lands. The CHR investigation was
underway as of November.

- 235 -
IV. ENVIRONMENT MANAGEMENT AND PROTECTION
• Environment management is “a purposeful activity with the goal

to maintain and improve the state of an environmental resource
affected by human activities.
ENVIRONMENTAL RULES AND REGULATIONS
Here’s the link to view the full content:
1. RA 8749 (Clean Air Act of 1999)

https://lawphil.net/statutes/repacts/ra1999/ra_8749_1999.html
2. RA 9275 (Philippine Clean Water Act)

https://www.lawphil.net/statutes/repacts/ra2004/ra_9275_2004.htm
l
3. PD 1586 (Environmental Impact Statement System)

https://lawphil.net/statutes/presdecs/pd1978/pd_1586_1978.html
4. RA 6969 (Toxic Substances and Hazardous Waste Control Act)

5. RA 9003 (Ecological Solid Waste Management Act)

https://www.lawphil.net/statutes/repacts/ra2001/ra_9003_2001.htm
l
6. RA 9512 (Environmental Education Act of 2008.


- 236 -
EXERCISES
1. It comprises the Philippine archipelago, with all the islands and

waters embraced therein, and all other territories over which the
Philippines has sovereignty or jurisdiction.
a. State Policies c. National Territory

b. Philippine Constitution d. National Principle
2. The right of the people to information on matters of public

concern shall be recognized.
a. Section 6, Bill of rights c. Section 8, Bill of rights

b. Section 7, Bill of rights d. Section 9, Bill of rights
3. The privilege of the writ of habeas corpus shall not be suspended

except in cases of ______ when the public safety requires it.
a. terrorism c. invasion or rebellion

b. war declaration d. intervention
4. The exercise right of all Filipino citizens in voting local and

national leaders.
a. right to veto c. consent

b. suffrage d. right of freedom
5. The House of Representatives shall be composed of not more

than______, unless otherwise fixed by law.
a. 150 members c. 250 members

b. 200 members d. 265 members
6. Have the control of all the executive departments, bureaus, and

offices.
a. Senate c. The President

b. House of Representatives d. Supreme Court
7. The member of the Supreme Court or any lower collegiate shall be

appointed through the following qualifications, except:
a. A natural-born citizen of the Philippines.

b. Must have been for fifteen years or more a judge of a lower
court or engaged in the practice of law in the Philippines.
c. Must be at least Thirty-five years of age
d. A member of the Philippine Bar.

- 237 -
8. The Chairman of the Civil Service Commission shall hold the office
for how many years?
a. 3 years c. 6 years
b. 5 years d. 7 years
9. Have the power, authority, and duty to examine, audit, and settle
all accounts pertaining to the revenue and receipts.
a. Bureau of Internal Revenue c. Accounting Department

b. Commission on Audit d. Book Keeper
10. The Commission on Human Rights is an independent office that

composed of a Chairman and how many members?
a. 3 members c. 5 members
b. 4 members d. 6 members
11. The so-called foundation of the nation.
a. Filipino People c. Family

b. Politician d. Taxes
12. The independent office of the Ombudsman is also known as?
a. Prosecutor c. Tanodbayan
b. Investigator d. Deputy
13. Shall have the exclusive power to initiate all cases of

impeachment.
a. Senate c. House of Representatives

b. Supreme Court d. Sandiganbayan
14. The Commission on Audit is composed of a Chairman and how many

Commissioners?
a. 2 Commissioners c. 4 Commissioners
b. 3 Commissioners d. 6 Commissioners
15. The Commission on Elections is composed of a Chairman and how

many Commissioners?
a. 3 Commissioners c. 6 Commissioners
b. 5 Commissioners d. 7 Commissioners

- 238 -
16. This Act is known as the Code of Conduct and Ethical Standards
for Public Officials and Employees.
a. R.A 6713 c. R.A 6371

b. R.A 6173 d. R.A 6317
17. It arises when a public official or employee is a member of a

board, an officer, or a substantial stockholder of a private
corporation or owner.
a. Conflict of interest c. Barriers

b. Disruption d. Complication
18. Public officials and employees shall remain true to the people at
all times.
a. Honest-to-goodness c. Integrity and honesty

b. Trustworthiness d. Justness and sincerity
19. Public officials and employees and their families shall lead
modest lives appropriate to their positions and income.
a. Simple living c. Modest life

b. Unpretentious life d. Minimalism
20. Public officials and employees shall extend prompt, courteous,

and adequate service to the public.
a. Sensibility to the Agency c. Public Official affinity

b. Responsiveness to the public d. Humanitarianism
21. It serves as the political wing of the Communist Party of the

Philippines.
a. National Democratic Front of the Philippines

b. Communists Forces of the Philippines
c. Local Revels
d. Political Activist
22. Are a violation of this right, designating the deliberate killing

of an individual by a State agent without a previous judgment
affording all judicial guarantees, such as a fair and unbiased
procedure.
a. Drug War c. Physical Abuse

b. Extra Judicial execution d. Torture and Killings

- 239 -
23. The R.A 9262 is a criminal case otherwise known as:
a. Anti-Violence Against Women and Their Children Act of 2004.

b. Anti-Money Laundering Act of 2001 (AMLA)
c. Anti-Terrorism Act of 2020
d. Anti-Discrimination Act of 2011
24. Any unjustified, legal or actual, direct or indirect distinction

or unequal treatment, or failure to treat a person or a group of
persons in comparison to other persons.
a. Intolerance c. Inequity
b. Bias d. Discrimination
25. This Act shall be known as “The Indigenous People Rights Act of
1997”
a. R.A. 8173 c. R.A. 8731

b. R.A. 8371 d. R.A. 8317
26. Is a physical, sexual, and/or psychological maltreatment or

neglect of a child or children.
a. Child abuse c. Emotional abuse

b. Physical abuse d. Psychological abuse
27. Action taken in an attempt to stop or penalize a person who makes

a public statement or does something that is seen as a threat to
a powerful interest group, such as a government, corporation or
profession.
a. Oppression of Press freedom

b. Due process of the law
c. Suppression of dissent
d. Repression of Public opinion
28. An Act providing for a Comprehensive Air Pollution control policy

and for other purposes. This Act shall be known as the Philippine
Clean Air Act of 1999.
a. R.A. 8749 c. R.A. 8974

b. R.A. 8479 d. R.A. 8497
29. Any alteration of the physical, chemical and biological properties

of the atmospheric air.
a. Hazardous substances c. Greenhouse gases

b. Air pollutant d. Air pollution

- 240 -
30. Those gases that can potentially or can reasonably be expected to

induce global warming, which include carbon dioxide, methane,
oxides of nitrogen, chlorofluorocarbons, and the like.
a. Carbon dioxide c. Greenhouse gases

b. Industrial air pollution d. Air pollution
31. Discharge from known sources which is passed into a body of water
or land, or wastewater flowing out of a manufacturing plant,
industrial plant including domestic, commercial and recreational
facilities.
a. Effluent c. Emission
b. outflow d. Air pollution
32. A landward and outer limiting edge adjacent to the border of any
water bodies or a limit beyond where beyond where saturation zone
ceases to exist.
a. Border c. Margin
b. Limits d. Gap
33. Republic Act No. 9003 shall be known as the?
a. Environmental Education Act of 2008

b. Ecological Solid Waste Management Act of 2000
c. National Environment Awareness Act of 2008
d. National Environmental Protection Law
34. Shall refer to the process of recovering materials intended for

the same or different purpose without the alteration of physical
and chemical characteristic.
a. Re-use c. Reduce
b. Recycle d. Resource
35. This Act shall be known as the "National Environmental Awareness

and Education Act of 2008".
a. R.A. 9215 c. R.A. 9512

b. R.A. 9125 d. R.A. 9152

- 241 -
36. The State shall pursue a policy of balancing development and

environmental protection. To achieve this end, the frame work for
sustainable development shall be pursued, except.
a. Formulate a holistic national program of air pollution

management that shall be implemented by the government through
proper delegation and effective coordination of functions and
activities;
b. Encourage cooperation and self-regulation among citizens and
industries through the application of market-based instruments;
c. Focus primarily on pollution prevention rather than on control
and provide for a comprehensive management program for air
pollution;
d. Provide for the establishment and operation of appropriate
devices, methods, systems and procedures necessary to monitor,
compile and analyze data on ambient air quality.
37. Any building or immobile structure, facility or installation which emits

or may emit any air pollutant.
a. Pollution control c. Mobile source

b. Stationary source d. Pollutants device
38. A subsurface water that occurs beneath a water table in soils and
rocks, or in geological formations.
a. Freshwater c. Water vapor

b. Groundwater d. Industrial water
39. This Act shall be known as the "Philippine Clean Water Act of
2004."
a. R.A. 9257 c. R.A. 9527
b. R.A. 9725 d. R.A. 9275
40. The following rights of citizens are hereby sought to be

recognized and the State shall seek to guarantee their enjoyment,
except.
a. The right to breathe clean air;

b. The right to utilize and enjoy all-natural resources according
to the principles of sustainable development;
c. The right to have green environment.
d. The right to participate in the formulation, planning,
implementation and monitoring of environmental policies and
programs and in the decision-making process.

- 242 -
PRAYER BEFORE EXAM
Dear Lord, as I take this exam, I thank you that my value

Is not based on my performance, but on your great love for me.
Come into my heart so that we can walk through this time together.
Help me, not only with this test, but the many tests of life that are sure
to come my way.
As I take this exam, bring back to my mind everything I studied and

be gracious with what I have overlooked. Help me to remain focused
and calm, confident in the facts and in my ability, and firm in the
knowledge that no matter what happens today you are there with me.
Amen.

Civil Service Reviewer - Updated

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Civil Service Reviewer - Updated

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Civil Service Reviewer - Updated

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

All rights reserved.

No part of this workbook material may be reproduced in any

Nothing is impossible. The word itself says

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

I. Word Analogy …………………………………………………………………………………………… 1 - 4

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

LOGICAL AND ANALYTICAL REASONING

I. Alphanumeric Series …………………………………………………………………………… 172 - 176

I. Philippine Constitution ………………………………………………………………… 206

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

• A word analogy is a vocabulary problem that compares two

Examples and Explanation

1. dog:puppy :: cat: _______

2. bricks:road :: glass: _______

Explanation: You might say that ‘bricks used to be used to create

3. night: ______ :: right:left

4. ______ :guide :: drawing:illustration

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

1. catholic:priest :: moslem: ______ Word Analogy Tips and

a. public roads c. traffic

7. theme:main idea :: moral:______

a. a value c. a piece of advice

a. small hero c. small drug

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

10. chapter:book :: handle:______

11. FLQV:JISU :: DJNR:______

12. mnemonic:memory :: ______:______

13. 10:1010 :: 11:______

14. skew:gloomy :: slant: ______

15. miserly:cheap :: homogeneous: ______

16. ______:______ :: auditorium:audience

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

18. ______:______ :: slapstick:laughter

19. ______:______ :: verve:enthusiasm

20. spy:clandestine ::______:______

22. hut:cottage:______ :: candle:lamp:floodlight

23. daisy:flower:plant :: bungalow:house:______

24. palette:easel:brush :: textbook:lesson plan:______

a. artist c. report card

25. rule:command:dictate :: doze:sleep:______

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

II. PARAGRPAH ORGANIZATION

• Refers to the way sentences are ordered and structured to

Paragraph Organization Tips and Techniques

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

A. Imagine for a moment that an unknown animal had been discovered

A. It is very vital to have social media presence however personal

A. The basic steps in building a website are easy to remember and

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

A. This will be one of your tickets to land a job in the government.

A. Your passport will arrive in 7 days if you choose the rush

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

a. ABCDE b. ECBAD c. BCEAD D. DBCAE

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

A. There is a hunger center that acts as a sort of brake on the

A. A tobacco leaf is cured by heat, air or sun.

A. Speaking in English every day is also proven effective.

Email: jacsreviewer18@gmail.com J.A WorkBook – 2022 EDITION

12. mnemonic:memory :: :

16. : :: auditorium:audience

18. : :: slapstick:laughter

19. : :: verve:enthusiasm

20. spy:clandestine :::